program book & lecture materials...welcome to nabl’s fourteenth annual tax and securities law...

266
PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS March 10-11, 2016 Omni Shoreham Hotel Washington, DC

Upload: others

Post on 16-Jul-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS March 10-11, 2016 │Omni Shoreham Hotel │ Washington, DC

Page 2: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Please call or e-mail: Tom Harding Thomas N. Harding and Associates, Ltd.

Telephone: (773) 477-9506E-mail: [email protected]

Website: municipalbondblueskylawservices.com330 West Diversey Parkway, Suite 906, Chicago, Illinois 60657

Thomas N. Harding and associates

B L U E S K Y

Thomas N. Harding and associates

Thomas N. Harding AND associates

B L U E S K Y

hA&

B L U E S K YB L U E S K Y

Thomas N. Harding AND associates

B L U E S K YB L U E S K Y

Thomas N. Hardingand associates, ltd.

Your underwriter client needs a blue sky memorandum.Right now.Can’t remember when you did thelast one? Never done one before?

What’s the solution?Outsource your blue sky work to Thomas N. Harding and Associates, Ltd.We provide blue sky memoranda and handle the notice filings.Right away. For a price that is cost effective for you. We do everything except pay the filing fees.

Page 3: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Agenda 1DC Metro Map 3 3Omni Shoreham Hotel Meeting Space 4Welcome from the Chair 5Panel Chairs 6Panelists 6Governmental & Industry Panelists 7Institute Highlights 9General Information 10Mobile App & Polling 13Sponsors 15

Materials General Session OutlineGS "P3s and Social Impact Bonds: The Next Big Thing?” 27

Securities OutlinesS-1 Current Disclosure Issues in Primary Offerings 43S-2 Current Continuing Disclosure Issues - Practitioners only 53S-3 Securities Regulatory Update 111S-4 What To Do If the SEC Calls 119S-5 The Underwriter Due Diligence Process 133

Tax OutlinesT-1 The New Money Bond Issue 163T-2 The Refunding Bond Issue 173T-3 Applying the Allocation and Accounting Regulations 183 T-4 Tax Hot Topics 195T-5 Tax Enforcement 201

Joint Session Outline J-1 Exploring the Pricing Process 215

Ethics Session OutlineE-1 Ethics and Attorney Liability 226

Table of Contents

Please call or e-mail: Tom Harding Thomas N. Harding and Associates, Ltd.

Telephone: (773) 477-9506E-mail: [email protected]

Website: municipalbondblueskylawservices.com330 West Diversey Parkway, Suite 906, Chicago, Illinois 60657

Thomas N. Harding and associates

B L U E S K Y

Thomas N. Harding and associates

Thomas N. Harding AND associates

B L U E S K Y

hA&

B L U E S K YB L U E S K Y

Thomas N. Harding AND associates

B L U E S K YB L U E S K Y

Thomas N. Hardingand associates, ltd.

Your underwriter client needs a blue sky memorandum.Right now.Can’t remember when you did thelast one? Never done one before?

What’s the solution?Outsource your blue sky work to Thomas N. Harding and Associates, Ltd.We provide blue sky memoranda and handle the notice filings.Right away. For a price that is cost effective for you. We do everything except pay the filing fees.

Page 4: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

LexisNexis and the Knowledge Burst logo are registered trademarks of Reed Elsevier Properties Inc., used under license. NABL is a registered trademark of the National Association of Bond Lawyers. © 2016 LexisNexis. OFF03684-0 0316

Federal Taxation of Municipal Bonds Deskbook FiFth Edition Updated November 2015. Available in eBook format.

Federal Securities Laws of Municipal Bonds Deskbook Sixth Edition Available in print with an eBook combination or as a stand-alone eBook publication.

The latest editions of two popular NABL® titlesTrust NABL and LexisNexis for thorough and current coverage of the latest municipal bond issues. Take advantage of show savings on these popular deskbooks from the NABL Publications Library:

Stop by the LexisNexis® Booth

and take advantage of show savings.

Order today!Order at

www.lexisnexis.com/NABLSave20Visit www.lexisnexis.com/nabl

Call toll-free 800.533.1637

*Offer expires March 31, 2016. Offer is limited to attendees of the NABL 2016 Tax & Securities Law Institute, and is void where prohibited by law or by your employer’s policies. Applies to new orders only. Discount cannot be combined with any other offers or be applied to current subscriptions, renewals or online subscriptions. Offer may be extended to other members of firm or organization. Sales to federal government customers may be subject to specific contract pricing. Prices on the LexisNexis® Store do not reflect sales tax, shipping or handling.

Visit the LexisNexis® Booth

20%* Show Discount deskbooks ...

the latest editions ... eBook format options ...

Web access ... show discounts ...

NABL experts

Page 5: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Start End Event LocationWednesday, March 9, 2016

5:00pm 7:00pm Check-in Desk Open West Registration Desk

Thursday, March 10, 20167:00am 5:30pm Check-In Desk West Registration Desk

7:00am 5:30pm Exhibits Open West Promenade

7:00am 8:00am Continental Breakfast Ambassador Ballroom

8:00am 9:15am S-1: Current Disclosure Issues in Primary Offerings Empire

8:00am 9:15am S-2: Current Continuing Disclosure Issues (Practitioners Only) Palladian

8:00am 9:15am T-4: Tax Hot Topics Diplomat9:15am 9:30am Break Empire, Palladian and

Diplomat Foyers9:30am 10:45am S-4: What To Do If the SEC Calls Palladian9:30am 10:45am T-1: The New Money Bond Issue Diplomat9:30am 10:45am T-5: Tax Enforcement Empire

10:45am 11:00am Break Empire, Palladian and Diplomat Foyers

11:00am 12:15pm E-1: Ethics and Attorney Liability Palladian11:00am 12:15pm S-3: Securities Regulatory Update Diplomat11:00am 12:15pm T-3: Applying the Allocation and Accounting Regulations Empire12:15pm 1:05pm Luncheon featuring David Wasserman Regency Ballroom

1:15pm 2:30pm General Session: P3s and Social Impact Bonds: The Next Big Thing? Regency Ballroom

2:30pm 2:45pm Transition Break Empire, Palladian and Diplomat Foyers

2:45pm 4:00pm S-2: Current Continuing Disclosure Issues (Practitioners Only) Palladian

2:45pm 4:00pm T-2: The Refunding Bond Issue Diplomat2:45pm 4:00pm T-5: Tax Enforcement Empire

4:00pm 4:15pm Break Empire, Palladian and Diplomat Foyers

4:15pm 5:30pm J-1: Exploring the Pricing Process Palladian

4:15pm 5:30pm S-5: The Underwriter Due Diligence Process Empire

4:15pm 5:30pm T-4: Tax Hot Topics Diplomat

5:30pm 6:30pm Welcome Reception Ambassador Ballroom

Agenda

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 1

Page 6: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Start End Event LocationFriday, March 11, 2016

7:00am 12:30pm Information Desk & CLE Desk Open West Registration Desk7:00am 11:00am Exhibits Open West Promenade7:00am 8:00am Continental Breakfast Ambassador Ballroom8:00am 9:15am E-1: Ethics and Attorney Liability Palladian8:00am 9:15am J-1: Exploring the Pricing Process Diplomat8:00am 9:15am S-4: What To Do If the SEC Calls Congressional 8:00am 9:15am T-2: The Refunding Bond Issue Empire

9:15am 9:30am Break Empire, Palladian and Diplomat Foyers

9:30am 10:45am S-1: Current Disclosure Issues in Primary Offerings Diplomat9:30am 10:45am S-5: The Underwriter Due Diligence Process Palladian9:30am 10:45am T-1: The New Money Bond Issue Empire

10:45am 11:00am Break Empire, Palladian and Diplomat Foyers

11:00am 12:15pm S-3: Securities Regulatory Update Palladian11:00am 12:15pm T-2: The Refunding Bond Issue Empire11:00am 12:15pm T-3: Applying the Allocation and Accounting Regulations Diplomat

Securities Law

► S-1CurrentDisclosureIssuesinPrimaryOfferings► S-2CurrentContinuingDisclosureIssues-practitioners

only► S-3SecuritiesRegulatoryUpdate► S-4WhatToDoIftheSECCalls► S-5TheUnderwriterDueDiligenceProcess

Tax Law

► T-1TheNewMoneyBondIssue► T-2TheRefundingBondIssue► T-3ApplyingtheAllocationandAccountingRegulations► T-4TaxHotTopics► T-5TaxEnforcement

Ethics Session► E-1EthicsandAttorneyLiability

Joint Session

► J-1ExploringthePricingProcess

Breakout Session Topics

Agenda

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 2

Page 7: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

DC Metro Map

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 3

Page 8: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Omni Shoreham Hotel | Meeting Space

NABL CHECK-IN DESKLobby Level

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 4

Page 9: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s theme, “Back to the Future,” acknowledges the return of the Institute to its original home in Washington D.C. and the increased use of technology at the Institute through the TSLI Mobile App. Technologypermeatesourlivesandisanincreasinglyimportantcomponentofthepublicfinanceindustryasregulatorsutilize technology to promote pricing transparency and encourage more disclosure, and market participants rely on technology to market bonds. The experienced practitioners and government representatives serving as faculty for the Institutewilldiscussthesethemesaswellasotherdevelopmentsthataretrendinginpublicfinancetoday.

The Joint Panel will explore the process of pricing bonds both from the tax law and securities law perspective. Tax panels at the Institute will discuss the latest issues confronting the Section 103 bar, including the most recent developments in tax law in the “Tax Hot Topics” panel and the new allocation and accounting regulations in “Applying the Allocation and Accounting Regulations.” Other tax panels will utilize a series of hypotheticals to examine both arbitrage and private activity problems that arise in new money and refunding bond issues and use the survey tool on the TSLI Mobile App to give audience members the opportunity to participate more actively in the discussion.

Securities law panels will discuss recent developments, such as market initiatives related to continuing disclosure, primary disclosure related to potential natural disasters, and a regulatory update from various government repre-sentatives. A panel entitled “What to Do if the SEC Calls” will provide insight into what bond counsel may expect when assisting issuer clients through the MCDC settlement process. The General Session will explore current topics in P3s, such as social infrastructure projects and social impact bonds. The ethics panel will focus on help-ing lawyers identify problematic situations and avoiding professional liability. A highlight of the Institute will be the luncheon speaker, David Wasserman, who will speak on a topic that is timely and trending - the 2016 elections. Mr. Wasserman will provide a non-partisan, insider’s view of what our future may hold.

I am grateful to my Vice-Chair, Perry Israel, for his enthusiastic and invaluable assistance in organizing the Institute. I would also like to thank all of our panelists for their participation on the panels. Their participation is not limited to speaking at the Institute but also includes many hours of preparation, particularly by the panel chairs. The Institute would not be a success without the dedication of our esteemed faculty. My sincere thanks also goes out to NABL’s Education & Member Services Committee and NABL’s staff, particularly, Susan Zelner, Gillian McBurney, Bill Daly and Linda Wyman.

On behalf of Perry and myself, welcome to the Institute. We hope that you have an enjoyable and educational experience throughout the next two days, and we also hope to see you at the Welcome Reception on Thursday, March 10, at 5:30 pm.

Carol J. McCoog2016 TSLI ChairHawkinsDelafield&WoodLLP

2016 TSLI Chair

Carol J. McCoog HawkinsDelafield&WoodLLP

Portland, OR

2016 TSLI Vice-Chair

Perry E. IsraelLawOfficeofPerryIsrael

Sacramento, CA

Welcome from the Chair

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 5

Page 10: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Panel Chairs

M. Jason AkersFoley & Judell, L.L.P.

New Orleans, LA

Michael BartolottaCitigroup Global Markets Inc

Houston, TX

Michael L. CheroutesColorado Center for Infrastructure

InvestmentDenver, CO

Marybeth E. FrantzHarris Beach PLLC

Pittsford, NY

Deanna L.S. GregoryPacificaLawGroupLLP

Seattle, WA

Carol L. LewStradling Yocca Carlson & Rauth

Newport Beach, CA

Kenneth R. ArtinBryant Miller Olive P.A.

Orlando, FL

Alison J. BengePacificaLawGroupLLP

Seattle, WA

Randy J. CuratoALAS, Inc.Chicago, IL

R. Todd Greenwalt Bracewell & Giuliani LLP

Houston, TX

Teri M. GuarnacciaBallard Spahr LLP

Baltimore, MD

Paul S. MacoBracewell & Giuliani LLP

Washington, DC

Navjeet K. BalSocial Finance, Inc.

Boston, MA

Peter K.M. ChanMorgan Lewis

Chicago, IL

Marc DispenseGeorge K. Baum & Company

Denver, CO

Clifford M. GerberSidley Austin LLPSan Francisco, CA

Stephen E. HeaneyStifel, Nicolaus & Company,

IncorporatedLos Angeles, CA

Darren C. McHughStradling Yocca Carlson & Rauth, P.C.

Denver, CO

*Panelists subject to change, please check the TSLI Mobile App for the most current list of panelists.

Panelists*

Richard ChirlsOrrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP

New York, NY

Mitchell E. HerrHolland & Knight LLP

Miami, FL

Alexandra (Sandy) M. MacLennanSquire Patton Boggs (US) LLP

Tampa, FL

Joseph (Jodie) E. SmithMaynard Cooper & Gale P.C.

Birmingham, AL

Dee P. WisorButler Snow LLP

Denver, CO

Daniel M. DeatonNixon Peabody LLP

Los Angeles, CA

N. Gordon KnoxMiles & Stockbridge P.C.

Baltimore, MD

Jeffery J. QualkinbushBarnes & Thornburg LLP

Indianapolis, IN

Vicky TsilasBallard Spahr LLPWashington, DC

Matthias M. EdrichKutak Rock LLP

Denver, CO

Michael L. LarsenParker Poe Adams & Bernstein LLP

Charleston, SC

Bruce M. Serchuk Nixon Peabody LLP

Washington, DC

Stephen E. WeylHinckley, Allen & Snyder LLP

Boston, MA

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 6

Page 11: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Panelists*

Governmental & Industry Panelists* John J. Cross III

U.S. Department of the TreasuryWashington, DC

Spence HanemannInternal Revenue Service

Washington, DC

Rebecca J. Olsen U.S. Securities and Exchange

CommissionWashington, DC

Robert A. FippingerMunicipal Securities Rulemaking

BoardWashington, DC

Rebecca L. HarrigalInternal Revenue Service

Washington, DC

Johanna L. Som De CerffInternal Revenue Service

Washington, DC

LeeAnn GauntU.S. Securities and Exchange

CommissionBoston, MA

Leslie M. NorwoodSecurities Industry and Financial

Markets AssociationNew York, NY

Mark R. Zehner U.S. Securities and Exchange

CommissionPhiladelphia, PA

*Panelists subject to change, please check the TSLI Mobile App for the most current list of panelists.

John M. McNallyHawkinsDelafield&WoodLLP

Washington, DC

J. Hobson PresleyBalch & Bingham LLP

Birmingham, AL

Linda B. SchakelBallard Spahr LLPWashington, DC

Christine WalshBank of America Merrill Lynch

New York, NY

George G. WolfOrrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP

San Francisco, CA

Richard J. MooreOrrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP

San Francisco, CA

Mitchell RapaportNixon Peabody LLP

Washington, DC

Scott E. Schickli Orrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP

Portland, OR

Bradley S. WatermanLawOfficesofBradleyS.Waterman

Washington, DC

Edwin G. OswaldOrrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP

Washington, DC

Douglas RichmondAon Risk Solutions

Kansas City, KS

John O. SwendseidSherman & Howard L.L.C.

Reno, NV

Ben WatkinsFlorida State Board of Administration

Tallahassee, FL

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 7

Page 12: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ADD NATIONAL.Build Stronger Bonds

To learn more about building stronger bonds with insurance from National, visit www.nationalpfg.com

When you add bond insurance from National to your municipal offering, you enhance your bonds with substantial claims-paying resources devoted exclusively to U.S. public finance. We combine extensive due diligence, superior execution and more than 40 years of bond insurance experience to bring the highest level of confidence to the municipal finance marketplace.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 8

Page 13: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

General Session: ““P3s and Social Impact Bonds: The Next Big Thing?”” Thursday, March 10, 1:15pm – 2:30pmRegency Ballroom

NABL Board Secretary, Dee P. Wisor will lead the panelists in dis-cussing Public Private Partnerships including the federal emphasis on P3s, types of transactions being done, advantages and disadvantag-es of various P3 models, and federal tax issues presented by P3s. The panelists will also discuss the devel-oping use of pay for performance contracts (sometimes referred to as

social impact bonds) to provide improved social outcomes. Panelists include bond lawyer, John Swendseid, former bond lawyer, Michael Cheroutes, who headed the Colorado High Performance Transportation Enterprise where he used P3sasaprojectdeliveryandfinancingmodel,andformerbond lawyer, Navjeet Bal, who is now General Counsel at SocialFinancewhichisa501(c)(3)nonprofitorganizationdedicated to mobilizing capital to drive social progress.

Luncheon Featuring David WassermanThursday, March 10, 12:15pm – 1:05pmRegency BallroomDC Update: An Insider’s Look at the 2016 Elections. David Wasserman analyzes the cur-rent congressional and electoral environment in a lively, timely, and strictly non-partisan presentation. What factors will shape the road to the White House? Will Democrats take back the Senate in 2016? Do Democrats have any hope of taking back the House? What does this polarized Congress mean for Washington’s agenda, and will the logjam ever break? Drawing on his extensive re-search on cultural and voting patterns and armed with an encyclopedic knowledge of congressional districts, Was-serman highlights critical races and picks apart what’s at stake in 2016 and beyond. He examines the parties’ mes-saging, historical trends, and the critical subgroups of voters that will determine the next president. In all of his presenta-tions, Wasserman incorporates up-to-date examples from the past week of news and fascinating facts and statistics.

Welcome Reception Thursday, March 10, 5:30pm - 6:30pm Ambassador BallroomOn Thursday evening, NABL will host a reception for all attendees. This Welcome Reception will provide a great opportunity to visit with bond lawyers from across the country as well as government representatives in the nation’s capital.

Securities SessionsThe Institute will explore the latest developments in the se-curities law area. Practitioners and regulators on the “Cur-rent Disclosure Issues in Primary Offerings” and “Current Continuing Disclosure Issues” panels will discuss, among other things, GASB 68, voluntary disclosure and amend-ments to continuing disclosure agreements. In a panel en-titled, “What To Do If The SEC Calls,” panelists will discuss the SEC enforcement process and what attorneys repre-senting issuers can expect. “The Underwriter Due Diligence Process” will explore this process from the perspective of in-house counsel, underwriter’s counsel and disclosure coun-sel, including topics such as what we have learned about underwriter’s due diligence since the 2012 risk alert and the expectations, roles and interaction among the respective counsel and the bankers. Finally, staff from the MSRB, SEC OfficeofMunicipalSecurities,andtheSECEnforcementDivision will discuss regulatory initiatives and updates and recent enforcement actions.

Tax SessionsTwo returning tax panels at the Institute will explore the lat-est issues confronting the Section 103 bar relating to “Tax Hot Topics” and “Tax Enforcement.” The most recent devel-opmentsintaxlawwillbediscussedinthefirstoftheseandthe on-going saga of handling tax enforcement will be dealt with in the latter. The three other tax panels will structured to break some new ground. Based more on a case study model, these panels will discuss tax problems facing issu-ers in “The New Money Bond Issue” and “The Refunding Bond Issue” and provide a more in-depth look at “Applying theAllocationandAccountingRegulations.”Thefirsttwoofthese panels will provide a series of related hypotheticals to examine both arbitrage and private activity problems that arise in each type of issue and provide practice pointers as well as give the audience the opportunity to participate more actively in the discussion. The last of the panels will examine the new allocation and accounting regulations through a series of hypotheticals and audience questions and answers as we work to understand how those regula-tions will be applied to a myriad of situations.

Institute Highlights

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 9

Page 14: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

General Information

Joint PanelThe process of pricing bonds largely remains a mys-tery to most bond lawyers. However, with an increased amount of attention placed on this process by both the IRSandSEC,itisimportantforpublicfinancelawyerstobecome more familiar with how pricing works. In a joint panel entitled “Exploring the Pricing Process,” panelists will describe the process from before the time the initial offering price is determined to the free-to-trade wire and beyond. Tax law issues to be discussed include the pro-posed issue price regulations and securities law issues includeagreementsbetweenunderwritingfirmsandissu-ers in the AAU and BPA.

Ethics PanelThis year’s ethics panel entitled, “Ethics and Attorney Li-ability” will focus on how potential attorney liability can arise inthecontextofpublicfinance,bestpracticestoavoidpit-falls and how the ethical rules apply to the practice. We hope to have expert guidance from attorneys from mal-practice carriers who can share their experiences about what heightens the risk of liability.

Continuing Legal Education (CLE)The Institute offers the opportunity to earn up to 11 hours of CLE credit, depending on the jurisdiction, including ethics credit. NABL has applied for CLE credits from those states that have mandatory CLE requirements. The necessary forms will be available for you at the NABL Check-in Desk.

Closed SessionPractitioners only

S-2: Current Continuing Disclosure Issues Thursday 3/10: 8:00am - 9:15amThursday 3/10: 2:45pm - 4:00pm

All of the other sessions at TSLI are open to everyone.

Complimentary Wireless InternetComplimentary wireless internet is offered in the meeting rooms and guestrooms. To access the wireless internet in the meeting rooms, select "Omni Meeting" as your WiFi network and enter NABL2016 as your username and password.

Shoreham Spa and Health ClubThe Shoreham Spa and Health Club at the Omni offers state-of the-art equipment and is open 24 hours. It is com-plimentary for guests 18 years of age or 13 and accompa-nied by an adult. Members and guests must sign in at the spa desk prior to using the facility. Spa services such as hydrating and cleansing facials to soothing massages are of-fered at the spa. It is open daily from 8:00am – 9:00pm, and appointment may be arranged by calling (202) 756-5199.

Business CenterThe hotel’s UPS Store is located on the lobby level andprovidesafullrangeofofficeservices.ItisopenMonday-Friday from 8:00am-6:00pm.

ParkingValet parking, which includes in and out privileges, is $35 plus tax per car daily.

WEDNESDAY, 3/95:00pm – 7:00pm

THURSDAY, 3/107:00am – 5:30pm

FRIDAY, 3/117:00am – 12:30pm

NABL Check-in DeskThe Check-in Desk will operate during the following dates and times at the West Registration Desk:

Institute Highlights

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 10

Page 15: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 11

Page 16: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Lewis Roca Rothgerber Christie is proud to support the National Association of Bond Lawyers

Bryant Barber602 262 5375 direct201 East Washington StreetSuite 1200Phoenix, AZ 85004

Lewis Roca Rothgerber Christie LLP lrrc.com

Albuquerque Colorado Springs Denver Irvine Las VegasLos Angeles Phoenix Reno Silicon Valley Tucson

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 12

Page 17: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Great Scott! TSLI is Mobile Download the TSLI Mobile app for a full Institute experience. The TSLI Mobile App will allow you to take part insessionpolling,findotherattendees,setyourschedule,andviewsessionoutlinesandmaterials.Fora

more interactive Institute experience, several panelists will be conducting live polling through the mobile app during their sessions. Read the information below on how to participate in the session polling. Whenyoufirstrun the app, it will take a little longer to set itself up. The time this takes depends on the device and your con-nection,sowerecommendyouallocateafewextraminuteswhenyoufirstlaunchtheapp.

How to Download the App:• Go to the Google Play or App Store on you phone or tablet. Search “NABL Events” and download the app.• Go to this link https://crowd.cc/tsli16.• Or simply scan the QR code below based on the platform of choice.

Complimentary wireless internet is available in the meeting rooms, and the username and access code will be NABL2016. Most content within the app is available whether or not you are connected to the Internet; however, for op-timal performance and to receive the most up-to-date information, a data or Wi-Fi connection is recommended. When connected, the app downloads updates (like a schedule or room change). Once downloaded, all of the data is stored locally on the device so you can access it without Wi-Fi.

Logging into the Mobile App:Access to certain features of the app require logging in, including creating your own personal schedule and adding and sharing contact information with other attendees. To log into the app, use the credientials that were emailed to you prior to TSLI If you have any questions, please stop by NABL's Check-in Desk.

Use the App to Answer Polling Questions► Load the TSLI mobile app on your device.

► Select“Agenda.”Select“SessionByDay.”Selectyourcurrentsession’scorrectdayandtime.

► Selectapollingquestion.

► Selectyouranswer.

► Select“Finish.”Select“ExitPoll.”(Youmayneedtoscrolldowntoseethe“Finish”buttonifthequestionislong.)

► Attendeesdonotneedtobeloggedintoanswerpollingquestions.

Download the app today and start planning your TSLI mobile experience. https://crowd.cc/tsli16

Mobile App & Polling

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 13

Page 18: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

http://crowd.cc/tsli16

Download the TSLI Mobile App Now!

You can also scan this code with a QR Reader on your device.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 14

Page 19: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

NABL thanks all of our sponsors for their support.

Interested in sponsoring other NABL events? Contact Susan Zelner at [email protected] or call 202-503-3300.

Gold Level Sponsor

Media Sponsor

Bronze Level Sponsor

Gold Level Sponsor

Bronze Level Sponsor

Platinum Level Sponsor

Bronze Level Sponsor

Platinum Level Sponsor

Silver Level Sponsor Silver Level Sponsor

Sponsors

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 15

Page 20: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Sidley is proud to support the National Association of Bond Lawyers as the 2016 Diversity Sponsor.

Clifford Gerber Partner

555 California Street Suite 2000 San Francisco, California 94104 +1 415 772 1246

Find out how we are fostering inclusiveness in our law firm’s culture at

sidley.com/diversity

sidley.com

AMERICA • ASIA PACIFIC • EUROPE

Sidley and Sidley Austin refer to Sidley Austin LLP and affiliated partnerships as explained at www.sidley.com/disclaimer. MN-3202

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 16

Page 21: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Our Public Finance Group has comprehensive

transactional and tax expertise, serving as bond

counsel in a broad range of public finance

transactions as well as representing issuers,

underwriters, borrowers, commercial banks,

bond purchasers and corporate trustees in

tax-exempt financings throughout the

United States.

Experienced bond counsel preparedto meet any publicfinancing need

A L B A N Y B O S TO N C O N C O R D H A R T F O R D N E W YO R K P R O V I D E N C E

hinckleyallen.com© 2016 Hinckley, Allen & Snyder LLP. All rights reserved. Attorney Advertising.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 17

Page 22: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TEAMWORK GUARANTEED

Ass

ured

Gua

rant

y M

unic

ipal

Cor

p. a

nd a

� lia

ted in

sure

rs, N

ew Y

ork,

NY.

| A

ssur

ed G

uara

nty

Ltd. (

NYS

E:AG

O)

ASSURED GUARANTY MUNICIPAL | MUNICIPAL ASSURANCE CORP. | ASSURED GUARANTY CORP.

ASSURED GUARANTY CORP.

ASSURED GUARANTY MUNICIPAL

Bond insurer for over 10,000 issuers. $500 million of daily trading liquidity.

Trusted by holders of over $300 billion of our insured municipal bonds. For

three decades, our strong guaranty and responsive service have helped issuers

launch cost-saving insured bonds with speed and certainty. Choose Assured

Guaranty, the proven leader in municipal bond insurance.

EMBRACE POSSIBILITIES, INVEST IN CERTAINTIES.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 18

Page 23: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

2016Fundamentals of Municipal Bond Law Seminar

May 4-6, 2016Swissotel Chicago | Chicago, IL

41st Annual Bond Attorneys' WorkshopOctober 19-21, 2016

Fairmont Chicago | Chicago, IL

201715th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute

Members-Only EventMarch 9-10, 2017

The Omni Shoreham | Washington, DC

Fundamentals of Municipal Bond Law SeminarApril 19-21, 2017

Sheraton Downtown Denver | Denver, CO

42nd Annual Bond Attorneys' WorkshopOctober 4-6, 2017

Fairmont Chicago | Chicago, IL

201816th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute

Members-Only EventFebruary 21-23, 2018

JW Marriott Phoenix Desert Ridge | Phoenix, AZ

Fundamentals of Municipal Bond Law SeminarApril 25-27, 2018

The Westin Charlotte | Charlotte, NC

43rd Annual Bond Attorneys' WorkshopSeptember 26-28, 2018

Fairmont Chicago | Chicago, IL

Upcoming Meetings & Educational Events

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 19

Page 24: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

BAW41st Annual Bond

Attorneys' Workshop

Save The DateOctober 19-21, 2016 | Fairmont Chicago

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 20

Page 25: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

FUNDAMENTALS OF MUNICIPAL BOND LAW SEMINAR20

16May 4-6, 2016 | Swissotel Chicago | Chicago, IL

Training your associates to be industry champions.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 21

Page 26: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Thank you to the Bond Buyer for being the official media sponsor.

Daily editions of the Bond Buyer will be available for attendees during the Institute

by the Registration Desk.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 22

Page 27: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Because opinions with respect to the interpretation of state and federal laws relating to municipal obligations fre-quently differ, the National Association of Bond Lawyers has given the authors and editors of this work the opportu-nity to express their individual legal interpretations and opinions. The interpretations and opinions are not intended toreflectanypositionofNABL,orthelawfirms,branchesofgovernment,ororganizationswithwhichtheauthorsandeditorsareassociated,unlesstheyhavebeenspecificallyadoptedbysuchorganizations.Foreducationalpurposes, the authors and editors may have employed hyperbole or offered suggested interpretations for the pur-pose of stimulating discussion. Neither the authors and editors of this volume nor NABL take responsibility as to the completeness and accuracy of the materials contained herein, and accordingly readers must conduct independent research of original sources of authority. This volume is provided to further legal education and research and is not intended to provide legal advice or counsel as to any particular situation. If you discover any errors or omissions, please direct your comments to the Chair of the Tax and Securities Law Institute for consideration in future volumes.

NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF BOND LAWYERS601 13th Street, NW

Suite 800 South Washington, DC 20005

Copyright is not claimed for those portions hereof prepared by any official or employee of the United States of America in the course of his or her official duties.

©Copyright 2016-National Association of Bond Lawyers

NOTICE

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 23

Page 28: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

General Session Outline

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 24

Page 29: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 25

Page 30: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENERAL SESSION: GS

GS: GENERAL SESSION – P3s AND SOCIAL BONDS: THE NEXT BIG THING?

Chair

Dee P. Wisor Butler Snow LLP – Denver, CO

Panelists: Navjeet K. Bal Social Finance, Inc.- Boston, MA John O. Swendseid Sherman & Howard L.L.C. – Reno, NVMark L. Cheroutes Colorado Center for Infrastructure Investment – Denver, CO

1) What is a public private partnership?

a) Public private partnership may not really be a partnership:

i) According to Black’s Law Dictionary a partnership is: A voluntary contract between

two or more competent persons to place their money, effects, labor, and skill, or some

or all of them, in lawful commerce or business, with the understanding that there shall

be a proportional sharing of the profits and losses between them.

ii) For tax purposes the IRS says: A partnership is the relationship existing between two

or more persons who join to carry on a trade or business. Each person contributes

money, property, labor or skill, and expects to share in the profits and losses of the

business.

b) There is no common definition of public private partnership.

i) According to the World Bank a public private partnership is: "a long-term contract

between a private party and a government entity, for providing a public asset or

service, in which the private party bears significant risk and management

responsibility, and remuneration is linked to performance".

ii) The National Council for Public-Private Partnerships uses this definition: A public-

private partnership (P3) is a contractual arrangement between a public agency

(federal, state or local) and a private sector entity. Through this agreement, the skills

and assets of each sector (public and private) are shared in delivering a service or

facility for the use of the general public. In addition to the sharing of resources, each

party shares in the risks and rewards potential in the delivery of the service and/or

facility.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 26

Page 31: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENE

RAL

SESS

ION:

GS

iii) The Federal Highway Administration (“FHWA”) says: Public-private partnerships

are contractual agreements formed between a public agency and a private sector

entity that allow for greater private sector participation in the delivery and financing

of transportation projects.

2) Increased interest in P3s in the US.

a) The American Society of Civil Engineers 2013 Report Card for American Infrastructure

gives the US a D+ and estimates the needed investment by 2020 at $3.6 Trillion.

b) With reduced federal, state and local resources for funding infrastructure, will P3s fill

some of the gap?

c) Increased Federal Government emphasis on P3 approaches.

i) Presidential Memorandum-Expanding Public-Private Collaboration on Infrastruture

Development and Financing, July 17, 2014.

(1) This launched the Build America Investment Initiative.

ii) Expanding our Nation’s Infrastructure through Innovative Financing, U.S.

Department of the Treasury, Office of Economic Policy, September 2014.

iii) FHWA encourages the use of P3 financing. https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/ipd/p3/

(1) FHWA has many tools available including a Model Public-Private Partnership

Core Toll Concessions Contract Guide

https://www.fhwa.dot.gov/ipd/pdfs/p3/model_p3_core_toll_concessions.pdf and

an Availability Payment Concessions Public-Private Partnerships Model Contract

Guide http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/ipd/p3/resources/apguide.aspx

iv) The Government Accounting Office prepared a report evaluating federal government

partnerships with the private sector. http://www.gao.gov/assets/230/226973.pdf

v) On October 26, 2015, the IRS issued final allocation and accounting regulations

which provide improved tax treatment for public-private partnerships. See,

http://federalregister.gov/a/2015-27328 as corrected in minor respects at

http://federalregister.gov/a/2015-30321 and http://federalregister.gov/a/2015-30322.

(1) NABL has encouraged additional changes to the management and other service

contract safe harbors against private business use in Revenue Procedure 97-13, as

amended by Revenue Procedure 2001-39 and Notice 2014-67.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 27

Page 32: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENERAL SESSION: GS

(a) “We offer these comments in response to the request for public comments set

forth in Notice 2014-67 and in light of recent initiatives of President Obama to

foster the development of public private collaboration on infrastructure.”

vi) The President’s FY 2016 contains a proposal for qualified public infrastructure bonds

(“QPIBs”) which would expand the availability of tax-exempt financing for use in P3

structures. QPIBs would not be subject to the bond volume cap requirement and the

alternative minimum tax (AMT) preference. Facilities eligible for QPIB financing

include airports, docks and wharves, mass commuting facilities, facilities for the

furnishing of water, sewage facilities, solid waste disposal facilities, and qualified

highway or surface freight transfer facilities.

vii) EPA Region 3 has prepared “Community Based Public Private Partnerships and

Alternative Market-Based Tools for Integrated Green Stormwater Infrastructure”

April 2015 to assist municipalities in the Chesapeake Bay region with stormwater

needs.

d) According to the National Conference of State Legislatures, as of February 2014, 33

states and Puerto Rico have adopted laws authorizing public-private partnerships for

highway and bridge projects.

e) The Bipartisan Policy Center has prepared model P3 legislation:

http://bipartisanpolicy.org/library/public-private-partnership-p3-model-legislation/

f) This increased interest in public-private partnerships has not occurred, however, without

controversy and concerns being expressed with respect to some aspects of P3s. See

“Private Roads and Public Costs”, prepared by the U.S. PRIG Education Fund at

http://cdn.publicinterestnetwork.org/assets/H5Ql0NcoPVeVJwymwlURRw/Private-

Roads-Public-Costs.pdf

3) Some types of P3 procurement

a) Design-Build

i) Private party designs and builds asset.

ii) Public entity owns, finances, operates and maintains.

b) DBOM: Design-Build-Operate-Maintain

i) Private party designs, constructs, operates and maintains the asset.

ii) Public entity owns the asset.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 28

Page 33: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENE

RAL

SESS

ION:

GS

c) DBF: Design-Build-Finance

i) Private party designs, constructs, and finances the asset.

ii) Public entity owns, operates and maintains the asset.

d) DBFOM: Design-Build-Finance-Operate-Maintain

i) Private party designs, constructs, finances, operates and maintains the asset.

ii) Public entity owns the asset.

e) DBFOMT: Design-Build-Finance-Operate-Maintain-Transfer

i) Private party designs, constructs, finances, owns, operates and maintains the asset. In

this model, the private party owns the asset until the end of the contract when the

ownership is transferred to the public sector.

f) Asset monetization where the public entity sells or leases an existing asset.

4) Projects which may be eligible for P3.

a) New facility (“greenfield”)

i) Presido Parkway, Denver FasTracks, Port of Miami Tunnel, I-595 Managed Lanes,

Long Beach Courthouse.

b) Existing facility (“brownfield”)

i) Chicago Skyway, Indiana Toll Road, Midway Airport.

ii) If there are outstanding tax-exempt bonds related to the facility:

(1) Do the covenants permit the P3 transaction?

(2) Remedial action rules if the P3 will cause the outstanding bonds to be private

activity bonds.

c) Most often used to provide infrastructure like transportation, ports, electric, water and

sewer airports, and broadband.

d) Can be used for social infrastructure like schools, libraries, courthouses, hospitals, and

prisons.

5) Revenues available to make payments under P3 agreement.

a) User fees collected by private party.

i) Toll roads, managed lanes, airports, parking.

ii) Private party bears risk of demand for the project.

b) Shadow Tolls

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 29

Page 34: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENERAL SESSION: GS

i) Used on transportation projects where tolling may not be feasible: per vehicle

amounts paid to private party by public entity and not by users.

c) Availability payments.

i) Public entity makes performance based payments to private party once the project is

available for use. Public entity bears demand risk as the amount it pays is the same

whether the project is used or not. Often used for projects which may not be self-

supporting like mass transit or social infrastructure.

d) Sometimes payments are subject to appropriation by the public entity.

6) The capital funding for the project may include:

a) Equity of the private party.

b) Bank debt of the private party.

c) Transportation Infrastructure Finance and Innovation Act: TIFIA.

i) Fixing America’s Surface Transportation Act cuts TIFIA funding.

d) Railroad Rehabilitation & Improvement Financing: RRIF.

e) Water Infrastructure Finance and Innovation Act: WIFIA.

i) Fixing America’s Surface Transportation Act: tax-exempt bonds can now be used

with WIFIA.

f) Private activity bonds.

i) Section 142(m) of the Internal Revenue Code authorizes private activity bonds for:

surface transportation project which receives Federal assistance under Title 23;

international bridge or tunnel which receives Federal assistance under Title 23; or a

facility for transfer of freight (from truck to rail or rail to truck) which receives

Federal assistance under Title 23.

ii) Subject to volume cap limitation administered by Secretary of Transportation: up to

$15 billion. As of August 2015, almost $6 billion has been issued and another $5

billion allocated.

g) Governmental bonds.

i) Could be tax-exempt: P3 may create private business use but the private

payment/security test may not be met.

h) Government grants.

7) Possible advantages of P3:

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 30

Page 35: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENE

RAL

SESS

ION:

GS

a) Risk transfer to private party.

b) Contract can create incentives to lead to on time under budget project delivery.

c) May bring new funding sources like private equity.

d) Can avoid underbidding.

e) Brings private sector technical expertise which public entity may not have.

f) Potential cost savings by having one entity responsible for all or significant parts of

project.

g) Better operation and maintenance. Public entities tend to defer maintenance when

revenues are constrained.

h) Full life cycle costs represented by contract: construction costs, operations and

maintenance, capital replacement.

i) Possible source of funding for other public entity purposes: for example public entity

leases a project to a private party and uses the upfront lease payment to redeem debt.

8) Possible disadvantages:

a) Higher transaction costs.

b) Higher financing costs as opposed to traditional tax-exempt financing.

c) Private parties must pay taxes (e.g., income and property taxes) which public entities do

not and those costs will be recovered through P3 payments.

d) Private entity operation of a project could mean loss of governmental immunity for tort

liabilities.

e) Loss of control by public entity. For example, toll or rate setting may not be controlled by

public entity.

f) Lack of transparency.

i) The Colorado General Assembly passed a bill on CDOT P3 transparency which the

Governor vetoed. The Governor than signed an executive order to increase

transparency on CDOT P3 projects.

ii) The Virginia General Assembly passes legislation to create the Public-Private

Partnership Advisory Commission.

g) Foreign entity ownership of a government asset.

h) P3 model may not work for small project.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 31

Page 36: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

i) A public entity which does not have the resources to fund a project through a tax-exempt

bond model will not have revenues to pay P3 obligations.

9) Value for money analysis is done to determine if the project should use a P3 procurement.

a) Compares the costs and benefits of a traditional governmental procurement to the costs of

the P3 procurement over the life of the project.

10) Some 2015 P3 transactions which reached financial close:

a) North Carolina's I-77 HOT Lanes P3.

b) Ohio's Portsmouth Bypass.

c) Pennsylvania's Rapid Bridges Replacement Project.

d) Michigan freeway lighting P3.

e) Kentucky broadband P3.

11) Some recent P3 transactions which did not proceed or were terminated:

a) Indianapolis Justice Center P3.

b) Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) ended its contract to build a new 55-mile

section of U.S. 460 between Petersburg and Suffolk.

c) Accelerated Regional Transportation Improvements project in Los Angeles.

d) Project Neon to improve I-15 in Las Vegas.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 32

Page 37: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENE

RAL

SESS

ION:

GS

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 33

Page 38: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENERAL SESSION: GS

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 34

Page 39: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENE

RAL

SESS

ION:

GS

3/9/2016

1

TSLI │ March 10-11, 2016 │Omni Shoreham Hotel │ Washington, DC

General Session:P3s and Social Impact

Bonds: The Next Big Thing?

The General Session will use live polling via the TSLI App

To Download the TSLI App, Connect Your Mobile Device to WiFiTo access the wireless internet, select "Omni Meeting" as your WiFinetwork

Username: NABL2016 Password: NABL2016

(Both are case sensitive)

Downloading the TSLI App• Go to your device’s mobile app store (On

Apple devices, the App Store. On Android devices, the Google Play store)

• Search “nabl” or “nabl events”

• Download NABL Events

Using the App to Answer Polling Questions• Download the TSLI event.

• Select “Agenda.” Select “Session By Day.” Select Thursday, March 10. Select General Session.

• Select polling question #1. Select an answer. Scroll down. Select “Finish.” Select “Exit Poll.”

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 35

Page 40: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENERAL SESSION: GS

3/9/2016

1

TSLI │ March 10-11, 2016 │Omni Shoreham Hotel │ Washington, DC

General Session:P3s and Social Impact

Bonds: The Next Big Thing?

The General Session will use live polling via the TSLI App

To Download the TSLI App, Connect Your Mobile Device to WiFiTo access the wireless internet, select "Omni Meeting" as your WiFinetwork

Username: NABL2016 Password: NABL2016

(Both are case sensitive)

Downloading the TSLI App• Go to your device’s mobile app store (On

Apple devices, the App Store. On Android devices, the Google Play store)

• Search “nabl” or “nabl events”

• Download NABL Events

Using the App to Answer Polling Questions• Download the TSLI event.

• Select “Agenda.” Select “Session By Day.” Select Thursday, March 10. Select General Session.

• Select polling question #1. Select an answer. Scroll down. Select “Finish.” Select “Exit Poll.”

3/9/2016

2

Q1: What types of P3 projects have you worked on: (Pick all that apply)

□ Roads, bridges and tunnels□ Mass transit□ Governmental buildings□ Stadium□ Broadband □ Parking□ Street Lighting□ Water, Wastewater and Storm Drainage□ Other

Live Poll Results

Q2: What is the status of P3 legislation in your State?

A.Statute broadly authorizing P3s adopted

B.Statute authorizing P3s in a particular sector (e.g., transportation) adopted

C.Legislation being considered

D.No statutory authorityLive Poll Results

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 36

Page 41: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENE

RAL

SESS

ION:

GS

3/9/2016

3

Q3: Pick the two types of state laws in your experience that are most difficult to deal with in financing a PPP project.

A. Laws that require competitive bidding of the construction of public works (however defined) projects?

B. Other procurement laws that may require some sort of public or competitive process be used to select a private partner?

C. Constitutional or statutory requirements that prevent a government from making a binding contract with a private partner to make payments over a term that extends beyond a budget year, budgeted amount or other limit?

D. Well intended laws specifically allowing PPPs that are too detailed to be practical to use in many situations?

E. Any state laws the requirements of which are not presumptively and conclusively met on receipt of a favorable opinion from nationally recognized bond counsel?

Live Poll Results

Q4: Which two changes in tax law/regulation/guidance would best facilitate financing of public private partnership projects for governmental or publicly used facilities in your practice?

A. Constitutional or statutory requirements that prohibit or limit a government’s ability to participate in a joint ventures, including provisions prohibiting the “loaning of credit”?

B. Procurement laws that require public bidding or the use of a public or competitive to select a PPP participant?

C. Constitutional or statutory requirements that prevent a government from making a binding contract to make payments over a term that extends beyond a budget year or similar limit?

D. Well intended laws specifically allowing PPPs that are too detailed to be practical to use in many situations?

E. Any state laws the requirements of which are not presumptively and conclusively met on receipt of a favorable opinion from nationally recognized bond counsel?

Live Poll Results

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 37

Page 42: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENERAL SESSION: GS

3/9/2016

3

Q3: Pick the two types of state laws in your experience that are most difficult to deal with in financing a PPP project.

A. Laws that require competitive bidding of the construction of public works (however defined) projects?

B. Other procurement laws that may require some sort of public or competitive process be used to select a private partner?

C. Constitutional or statutory requirements that prevent a government from making a binding contract with a private partner to make payments over a term that extends beyond a budget year, budgeted amount or other limit?

D. Well intended laws specifically allowing PPPs that are too detailed to be practical to use in many situations?

E. Any state laws the requirements of which are not presumptively and conclusively met on receipt of a favorable opinion from nationally recognized bond counsel?

Live Poll Results

Q4: Which two changes in tax law/regulation/guidance would best facilitate financing of public private partnership projects for governmental or publicly used facilities in your practice?

A. Constitutional or statutory requirements that prohibit or limit a government’s ability to participate in a joint ventures, including provisions prohibiting the “loaning of credit”?

B. Procurement laws that require public bidding or the use of a public or competitive to select a PPP participant?

C. Constitutional or statutory requirements that prevent a government from making a binding contract to make payments over a term that extends beyond a budget year or similar limit?

D. Well intended laws specifically allowing PPPs that are too detailed to be practical to use in many situations?

E. Any state laws the requirements of which are not presumptively and conclusively met on receipt of a favorable opinion from nationally recognized bond counsel?

Live Poll Results

3/9/2016

4

Introduction to pay for success

Navjeet BalVice President and General Counsel

Q5: Are your government clients interested in SIBs?

A. My clients have never heard of them before

B. Preliminary discussions are happening at the policy level

C. My client(s) are actively engaged in getting necessary authorization for SIBs

D. My client(s) have entered into a SIB/PFS contract

Live Poll Results16

“What works”

Impact Investing

Government accountability

Pay for

Success

PAY FOR SUCCESS SITS AT THE INTERSECTION OF THREE POWERFUL MOVEMENTS

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 38

Page 43: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENE

RAL

SESS

ION:

GS

3/9/2016

5

17

WHAT IS PAY FOR SUCCESS?Nonprofit

interventionprovider

Private funders / impact investors

Payor(often

government)

Expansion capital ($) Outcomes

Repayment ($)

Pay for Success is about measurably improving thelives of people most in need by driving government

resources toward more effective programs 18

EXAMPLE: NEW YORK WORKFORCE RE-ENTRY TRANSACTION

Service Provider

2,000 High-Risk Formerly

Incarcerated Individuals

2013 deal with Center for Employment Opportunities (CEO)

Impact Investors

Intermediary

Evaluator / Validator

Outcome Payor

placed by Bank of America

Target Population

19

11 PAY FOR SUCCESS DEALS HAVE REACHED THE MARKET TO DATEIssue areas evolving rapidly

Teen Pregnancy Asthma Veterans Workforce Diabetes

Photographs courtesy of Center for Employment Opportunities, Chicago Public Schools, FrontLine Services, and Nurse-Family Partnership.

Additional projects in development:

• New York City

• New York State• Massachusetts

Criminal Justice (Recidivism)

1

2

3

Salt Lake CountyChicago

Early Childhood Education

4

5

• Cuyahoga County• Massachusetts• Denver

Homelessness

6

7

8

• South Carolina• Connecticut*

10

*Signed contract, launch pending project financing

• Santa Clara9

11

Families & Health

20

THE PAY FOR SUCCESS LANDSCAPE IS EVOLVING QUICKLY

Taken steps to explore PFS (legislation, procurement, developing project)

Active PFS project launched

2011 2016

Do Not Distribute

MARCH 2016

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 39

Page 44: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

GENERAL SESSION: GS

3/9/2016

5

17

WHAT IS PAY FOR SUCCESS?Nonprofit

interventionprovider

Private funders / impact investors

Payor(often

government)

Expansion capital ($) Outcomes

Repayment ($)

Pay for Success is about measurably improving thelives of people most in need by driving government

resources toward more effective programs 18

EXAMPLE: NEW YORK WORKFORCE RE-ENTRY TRANSACTION

Service Provider

2,000 High-Risk Formerly

Incarcerated Individuals

2013 deal with Center for Employment Opportunities (CEO)

Impact Investors

Intermediary

Evaluator / Validator

Outcome Payor

placed by Bank of America

Target Population

19

11 PAY FOR SUCCESS DEALS HAVE REACHED THE MARKET TO DATEIssue areas evolving rapidly

Teen Pregnancy Asthma Veterans Workforce Diabetes

Photographs courtesy of Center for Employment Opportunities, Chicago Public Schools, FrontLine Services, and Nurse-Family Partnership.

Additional projects in development:

• New York City

• New York State• Massachusetts

Criminal Justice (Recidivism)

1

2

3

Salt Lake CountyChicago

Early Childhood Education

4

5

• Cuyahoga County• Massachusetts• Denver

Homelessness

6

7

8

• South Carolina• Connecticut*

10

*Signed contract, launch pending project financing

• Santa Clara9

11

Families & Health

20

THE PAY FOR SUCCESS LANDSCAPE IS EVOLVING QUICKLY

Taken steps to explore PFS (legislation, procurement, developing project)

Active PFS project launched

2011 2016

Do Not Distribute

MARCH 2016

3/9/2016

6

Q6: Does your state have legislation authorizing pay for performance contracting?

□ Yes□ No

Live Poll Results22

WHY DO WE CARE ABOUT PAY FOR SUCCESS?

Focus on evidence and outcomes

Helps scale up high-quality services

Influences government funding decisions

23

WHEN IS PAY FOR SUCCESS USEFUL?

Underserved, large-scale population, with adequate demand for intervention

Defined Target Population

Key intervention outcomes measured against carefully constructed control

Rigorously Evaluated

Well-codified program model with fidelity monitoringCodified Program Model

High-quality providers with capacity to scaleScalable Service Providers

Outcomes attract civic and/or commercial supportInterest From Payors

Clear link to economic savings / benefit within acceptable timeframePositive Economics

Only appropriate for interventions meeting a number of criteria

Q7: Which of the following is an actual hashtag on Twitter: (Pick all that apply)A. #PublicPrivatePtnsP3B. #PayforSuccessC. #MoneyForNothingD. #RepealTaxCode

Live Poll Results

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 40

Page 45: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Securities Outlines

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 41

Page 46: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-1

S-1 CURRENT DISCLOSURE ISSUES IN PRIMARY OFFERINGS

Chair:

Jeffery J. Qualkinbush Barnes & Thornburg LLP – Indianapolis, IN

Panelists:

Teri M. Guarnaccia Ballard Spahr LLP – Baltimore, MD M. Jason Akers Foley & Judell, L.L.P. – New Orleans, LA

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 42

Page 47: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-1

CURRENT DISCLOSURE ISSUES IN PRIMARY OFFERINGS

I. DISCLOSURES REGARDING PAST CONTINUING DISCLOSURE COMPLIANCE AND CORRECTIVE 15C2-12 FILINGS

A. Background.a. The Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) has issued three series or

groups of settlement agreements with several of the underwriters which self-reported under the SEC’s Municipal Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initiative (“MCDC”); however, the SEC has not yet issued any settlement agreements with governmental entities or obligated persons which self-reported under the MCDC.

b. Although the SEC previously stated that the settlement agreements issued under MCDC would provide guidance regarding what the SEC believes to be material misstatements regarding prior continuing disclosure compliance by obligated persons, industry professionals have not found the examples provided by the SEC in these first three series of settlement agreements to provide much, if any, guidance on the SEC’s position.

B. Disclosure Considerations. a. What is an appropriate level of detail for disclosure in an official statement of past

failures to comply with continuing disclosure undertakings?

i. If the obligated person believes during the past five years it has complied, in all material respects, with its previous undertakings, should it make such a statement in the official statement?

ii. If the obligated person believes during the past five years it has complied, in all material respects, with its previous undertakings, should it list in the official statement all non-material compliance failures in the past five years?

iii. If the obligated person has failed to file an event notice for a change in the ratings of one or more series of bonds, should it list in the official statement such failure to file?

iv. If the obligated person filed its annual financial information and audited financial statements on a timely basis for many series of the bonds, but failed to link such information to the CUSIPs of one or more series of bonds, should it list in the official statement such failure?

v. If the obligated person was slow or late in filing the audited financial statements but filed the unaudited financial statements during the past five years within the time required by the previous undertakings, should it make such a statement in the official statement?

vi. What statement or statements need to be included in the official statement regarding the steps the obligated person has taken to ensure future compliance?

b. How long should an issuer continue to detail past failures to comply with its continuing disclosure undertakings in its official statements? Note that part of the requirements of any settlement with an issuer under MCDC is that the issuer must

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 43

Page 48: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-1

publish details of the settlement in its official statements for the next five years. However, settlements are only necessary for failures for which the Division of Enforcement believes enforcement action is necessary.

c. When does the five-year reporting period for non-compliance start? Does it begin on the date the failure occurs, or does it begin on the date the failure is corrected and an event notice of non-compliance is filed with EMMA?

II. “GREEN” BONDS

A. What are “Green” Bonds?a. From The Economist, “Green grow the markets, O” (July 5, 2014) – “Nonetheless,

there is far from universal agreement over the question, ‘What makes a bond green?’”

b. The World Bank maintains a green bond program designed to finance projects for the mitigation of and/or the adaptation to, climate change. Implementation of the program includes eligibility criteria for projects and methods of monitoring compliance with program principles.

c. On January 13, 2014, a group of financial institutions published the “Green Bonds Principles,” which is a set of voluntary guidelines for potential green bond issuers as to disclosure.

i. Green bonds are roughly defined as bonds which finance projects and activities that promote climate or other environmental sustainability purposes.

ii. Principles focus on four key areas of information (A) eligible uses of bond proceeds, (B) processes for evaluating and selecting of projects, (C) methods to track bond proceeds and (D) ongoing reporting of project performance.

iii. The group that initially created the principles has also established a Green Bonds Principles Governance Framework, which provides a mechanism for interested issuers, underwriters and investors to participate in updating the Green Bonds Principles.

B. Disclosure Considerations.a. Is information on the “green” nature of the projects funded with the proceeds of green

bonds material to an investor’s decision whether or not to purchase the bonds for purposes of Rule 10b-5?

i. The bonds are purposely marketed as “green” bonds.

ii. If the bonds are not in default, there is no incipient risk of default, and their tax-exempt status is not in jeopardy, but the project financed with bond proceeds is no longer considered “green,” how would any harm to an investor be measured?

iii. If the project financed with bond proceeds is no longer considered “green,” does it affect the value at which the bonds would be sold in the secondary market?

b. Should information on the “green” nature of bond-financed projects be considered part of the annual financial information for purposes of Rule 15c2-12?

i. Many green projects may not have any environmental “performance” which can be measured after completion of construction.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 44

Page 49: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-1

ii. Under SEC Releases 33-7856 and 34-42728 on electronic delivery of information, both the official statement and the issuer’s web site should contain disclaimers that the information regarding the use of proceeds of the green bonds does not constitute part of the official statement.

C. Sample Disclosure.The Green Bonds are general obligations of the Commonwealth issued to finance projects that are designed to be environmentally beneficial. The purpose of labeling a portion of the Commonwealth’s general obligation bonds as Green Bonds is to allow investors to invest directly in environmentally beneficial projects.

As outlined in the Capital Plan, the Commonwealth develops policies and targets capital investments that balance sustainable economic development, quality of life and the protection of natural resources. The Commonwealth is selling “Green Bonds” to finance the investment of certain projects that fall into the following four categories (collectively, “Green Projects”) that are designed to be environmentally beneficial, for which the selection methodology is outlined below:

Clean Water and Drinking Water Projects.

Methodology: Projects which are designed to improve the quality of the Commonwealth’s drinking water or reduce pollution in the Commonwealth’s water supply according to state and federal standards. Projects may include initiatives involving the Massachusetts Water Pollution Abatement Trust, a state agency established pursuant to Title VI of the Federal Clean Water Act, for clean drinking water and reduction of water pollution.

Energy Efficiency and Conservation Projects in State Buildings.

Methodology: Projects which are designed to reduce energy costs in existing public buildings or create new energy-saving “green” buildings. This category may include projects within the Accelerated Energy Program, a three-year initiative to “green” 700 sites in 700 working days encompassing over 4,000 state buildings. This program includes projects designed to reduce greenhouse gas emissions, energy use and water use across Commonwealth facilities. This category may also include the construction of a headquarters building for the Massachusetts Division of Fisheries and Wildlife which is expected to achieve zero net energy through solar photovoltaics, innovative mechanical systems and building envelope quality.

Land Acquisition, Open Space Protection and Environmental Remediation Projects.

Methodology: Projects which support open space as well as environmental clean-up efforts at various sites, including Federal Superfund Site restorations and other brownfield remediation and clean-up projects. Projects under this category may also include land protection programs, including open space acquisitions and wildland acquisitions.

River Revitalization and Preservation and Habitat Restoration Projects.

Methodology: Projects which restore waterways and riverine habitats. The projects may include rehabilitation of environments or ecologies which have suffered from

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 45

Page 50: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-1

human development or invasive species. This category may include natural habitat restoration and management, wetland restoration, flood control and urban reforestation projects.

Proceeds of the Green Bonds are expected to be used to fund some or all of such types of Green Projects. Green Bonds are general obligations of the Commonwealth, and holders of the Green Bonds do not assume any specific project risk related to any of the funded Green Projects.

The Commonwealth plans to post quarterly updates on use of Green Bonds proceeds via its website: www.massbondholder.com. The Commonwealth plans to post a final list of projects funded when all proceeds of the Green Bonds have been spent.

III. PENSION DISCLOSURE

A. SEC Focus – In a December 3, 2014 article in The Bond Buyer, SEC Commissioner Daniel Gallagher indicated general dissatisfaction with the state of public pension and OPEB disclosure. He advocated an increase in Commission resources overseeing the municipal market, more frequent enforcement in the area of pension disclosure and the exploration of new ways to induce issuers to adopt recent GASB standards.

B. GASB Statements Nos. 67 and 68 – These statements both apply to employee pension accounting and financial reporting. Statement No. 67 went into effect for financial reporting of fiscal years beginning after June 15, 2013 and Statement No. 68 went into effect for financial reporting of fiscal years beginning after June 15, 2014.

a. These reporting requirements make some significant changes regarding how the pension liability is calculated including potential changes in the discount rate used.

b. Cost sharing participants in pooled pension programs, will be required to include a proportionate share of the pension liability of the pool instead of the amount the participant has been billed by the pool.

c. For a very detailed discussion of Statement No. 67 and Statement No. 68, please listen to the NABL Teleconference It is 2015: Pension Disclosure and GASB 68 held on June 16, 2015, and available to NABL members at the NABL Website (www.nabl.org).

IV. BANK LOANS (Note – this topic addresses bank loans as a topic of disclosure in primary offerings of bonds, not application of Rule 15c2-12 to disclosure of bank loans themselves)A. Background - MSRB Notice 2012-18, Notice Concerning Voluntary Disclosure of Bank

Loans to EMMA (April 3, 2012) – discusses, in the context of encouraging voluntary reporting of bank loans to EMMA, disclosure concerns from the increase in issuer financing via bank loans, which are often not disclosed until release of the issuer’s audited financial statements, and often only as part of an aggregate debt total.

a. Lack of timeliness.

b. Concern over loan covenants which could cause acceleration of the debt.

c. Possible parity position of loans with respect to issuer bonds as to security may dilute security position of bondholders.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 46

Page 51: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-1

B. Disclosure Considerations.a. Direct bank loans should be incorporated into the issuer’s most recently audited

financial statements (normally attached to the issuer’s official statements).

b. However, the terms and provisions contained in the bank loan documents are often material to bond purchasers.

i. Financial or other covenants of the issuer.

ii. Events of default, including cross-default provisions.

iii. Remedies upon default.

iv. Liens and/or pledges of security for the bonds.

c. Beware direct bank loans which contain bank fees in a side letter. Such side letters may also contain issuer continuing covenants not included in the loan or reimbursement agreement.

V. LEGISLATIVE CHANGES – To what extent should the official statement disclose potential legislative changes affecting the tax-exempt status of the bonds or the status of the issuer’s pension liabilities?

A. Sample Language. a. Example 1 There are or may be pending in the Congress of the United States legislative proposals, including some that carry retroactive dates that, if enacted, could alter or amend the federal tax matters referred to above or affect the market value of the bonds. It cannot be predicted whether or in what form any such proposal might be enacted or whether, if enacted, it would apply to bonds issued prior to enactment”

b. Example 2 The information presented in this Official Statement is based on the laws and regulations of the United States of America and the State of _________ and related court and administrative law decisions in effect as of the date of this Official Statement (collectively, the “Laws”). In addition, the opinions delivered in connection with the issuance of the 2014 Bonds are based on the Laws. No assurance can be given as to the impact, if any, future events, regulations, legislation, court decisions or administrative decisions may have with respect to the Laws or that any or all of the Laws will remain in effect during the entire term of the 2014 Bonds.

B. Should such disclosure be generic, or limited to specific proposals? What is the legislative threshold below which the adoption of specific legislation should be considered too speculative to disclose? How does this compare to the language frequently found in a bond purchase agreement that provides the underwriter with the right to terminate its obligation to purchase the bonds if the underwriter believes the introduction of legislation may have a material impact of the marketability of the bonds?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 47

Page 52: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-1

VI. NATURAL DISASTERS – To what extent should the official statement disclose potential natural disasters affecting the economic strength of the obligated party to repay the bonds?

A. Sample Language. a. Example 1

In 2008, the University was closed for the fall semester as a result of damage caused by Hurricane Ike to the area surrounding the University. There can be no assurance that a hurricane or other weather related event will not affect the operations of the University and therefore the ability of the Borrower to operate the Series 2014 Project. If the Series 2014 Project is unable to open for operations as a result of such a weather related event, the Ground Lessor is obligated pursuant to the Ground Lease to pay an amount sufficient to meet debt service payments and other recurring payments from the date of such suspension or interruption. Such payments are required under the Ground Lease to continue until such time as the Series 2014 Project is available to be occupied and thereafter until the revenues of the Series 2014 Project, without regard to insurance proceeds or payments by the Ground Lessor or the University, will be sufficient to maintain a Fixed Charges Coverage Ratio of not less than 1.20 for the most recently completed fiscal year, irrespective of the length of time required to meet such requirement. See “THE GROUND LEASE – Ground Lessor Commitment to Repair and Replace the Series 2014 Project” herein. In the event of a weather event affecting the University and the ability of the Series 2014 Project to operate, unless the Ground Lessor is no longer obligated to pay for repair, replacement or lost revenues as provided in the Ground Lease, the only obligor with respect to such payments is the Ground Lessor.

b. Example 2 The Issuer is located along the Gulf Coast of Louisiana in an area that is prone to hurricanes and other tropical events. In the last ten years, Hurricanes Gustav, Ike and Isaac, along with less intense tropical storms and tropical depressions, have impacted parts of the Louisiana coast. In addition, Hurricanes Katrina and Rita caused significant damage to various parts of Louisiana in 2005. The Issuer cannot predict if or when any such tropical event will occur or the effect any such tropical event may have on its operations, population, demographics, economic or financial stability, or ability to pay debt service on the Bonds.

B. Should such disclosure regarding natural disasters be included in all official statements or only in those for governmental entities that have a history of large scale natural disasters? How is this helpful to potential investors?

VII. BANKRUPTCY

A. Background.a. Municipalities cannot be forced into involuntary bankruptcy and need to be

specifically authorized by their state to file Chapter 9 municipal bankruptcy. There are 22 states that either do not permit bankruptcy or otherwise give specific authorization for municipal bankruptcy. Of the remaining 28 states, there are varying requirements for bankruptcy.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 48

Page 53: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-1

b. The law of the applicable state may authorize other remedies for issuers in financial distress short of bankruptcy, but with equally transformative results.

i. State appointed individual or body to provide some level of financial oversight.

ii. State appointed receiver.

c. A number of equitable remedies are also available through state court.

i. Writ of mandamus allowing creditors to compel the assessment of a tax.

ii. Appointment of a receiver.

B. Disclosure Considerations. a. Discussion of Chapter 9 Bankruptcy

i. Should the official statement specifically discuss the lack of availability to the issuer of Chapter 9 bankruptcy if it is not available under State law?

ii. Should the security section discuss the potential priority treatment in bankruptcy of bondholders’ claims on the security for the bonds, e.g. a general obligation of the issuer versus a pledge of revenues or receipts pursuant to an indenture? What about their position versus other creditors, e.g. bond insurers?

iii. If bonds are secured by lease payments of a local government, should the official statement discuss the local government’s ability to reject the lease in bankruptcy (and the differences in its monetary obligations depending on whether the lease is a capital or an operating lease)?

b. Discussion of Other Remedies

i. Should the official statement discuss State law statutory remedies for financially distressed local governments, either those which may be imposed, or those that are voluntary?

ii. What about equitable remedies? To what extent should the standard caveats in bond counsel’s opinion regarding enforceability be highlighted in the body of the official statement?

VIII. GENERAL OBLIGATION DEBT

A. Distinguish between the nature of the bonds as an obligation of the issuer and the nature of the security for the bonds.

a. Bonds are a limited obligation of an issuer if payment is limited to a specific source of revenue or funds of the issuer. Bonds are a general obligation of an issuer if they are payable from any legally available source of revenues or funds of the issuer.

b. Disclosure should itemize those general categories of revenues or funds which are available to the issuer, e.g. property taxes, sales taxes, state aid, etc.

c. Disclosure should also specifically mention those sources of revenues or funds which are not legally available to the issuer for payment of the bonds, or which have priority over payment of the bonds.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 49

Page 54: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-1

d. Disclosure should also discuss the issuer’s financial operations (funds, cash on hand, etc.), budgetary process and recent history of expenditures against budgeted amounts.

B. Disclosure of security for general obligation bonds.

a. Pledges of taxes require disclosure of the legal mechanisms for the imposition and collection of such taxes (including timing of imposition and collection of taxes as compared to the debt service schedule for the bonds), any limitations on imposition and any other uses with a claim against tax revenues.

b. Taxes of general applicability require disclosure of issuer demographic information and collections over a recent historical period (typically ten years, but some people are having experiences with the rating agencies requesting 25+ years).

c. Pledges of aid from another governmental body should include a discussion of the legal mechanisms for receipt of aid and/or appropriation risk, as applicable.

IX. OTHER RECENT ISSUES RAISED IN PRIMARY OFFERINGS

A. What disclosure, if any, should be provided in the official statement about secondary market trading, including the possibility of a secondary market not developing or ceasing to exist over time?

B. What disclosure, if any, should be provided in the official statement on a non-party entity if the financial stability of the entity directly responsible for paying the debt service on the bonds is contingent (even remotely) on the financial stability of the non-party entity. Examples of transactions in which this could arise may be a University’s student fee bond financing in which the State provides annual appropriations to the University to assist in the repayment of the bonds or a public hospital financing that is receives city or county subsidies to support its operations.

X. CERTIFICATION OF THE OFFICIAL STATEMENT

A. Certification by the issuer and all entities responsible for the repayment of the bonds is standard in the industry.

B. What certification of the official statement is being provided by the professional or professionals who have assisted the issuer in the preparation of the official statement?

C. What opinion letters regarding the official statement are being provided by the counsels involved in the transaction?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 50

Page 55: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 51

Page 56: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

S-2: CURRENT CONTINUING DISCLOSURE ISSUES

Chair:

Alexandra M. MacLennan Squire Patton Boggs (US) LLP - Tampa, FL

Panelists:

J. Ben Watkins III Florida State Board of Administration - Tallahassee, FL Michael G. Bartolotta Citigroup Global Markets, Inc. - Houston, TX Paul S. Maco Bracewell & Guiliani LLP - Washington, D.C

This panel will explore the current market initiatives underway to enhance compliance with continuing disclosure undertakings under Rule 15c2-12 and discuss voluntary disclosure practices beyond contractual requirements. This panel is designated as “Practitioners Only” in order to facilitate open and free discussion of various proposals and approaches being discussed.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 52

Page 57: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2

CONTINUING DISCLOSURE: Creating Blueprints for Enhanced Disclosure

I. Historical Timeline for SEC Rule 15c2-12.

A. SEC Rule 15c2-121 went into effect January 1, 1990. It was proposed and adopted in the aftermath of the massive default in the Washington Public Power Supply System bond transactions. In fact, the proposing release was published on the same date the SEC Staff Report on the Investigation in the Matter of Transactions in Washington Public Power Supply System Securities (1988) was delivered to Congress. The rule, as adopted, required participating underwriters in certain municipal securities transactions to obtain and review issuer’s disclosure documents before purchasing securities and to provide copies of those disclosure documents to their investing customers. The proposing release2 also included a discussion of the SEC’s views on an underwriter’s obligation to have a reasonable basis for recommending the purchase of municipal securities and, in connection with that obligation, to review the accuracy of the statements made in the issuer’s disclosure documents in a professional manner.

B. On March 9, 1994, the SEC published its views on the disclosure obligations of various participants in municipal securities transactions under federal anti-fraud laws in both primary offerings of securities as well as with respect to disclosure on a continuing basis in the secondary market.3 On the same date, the SEC proposed amendments to Rule 15c2-124 thatwould prohibit (subject to certain exceptions and exemptions) underwriters from participating in municipal securities transactions unless the issuer contractually agrees to provide certain disclosure on a continuing basis while the securities are outstanding. The final rule amendments were adopted November 10, 19945 and applied to municipal securities sold on or after July 3, 1995.

C. The market operated under the rule as adopted in 1994 for nearly 15 years before the SEC proposed further amendments to the rule on July 30, 20086. The 2008 amendment disposed of the original multiple repository system (the “NRMSIRs”) in favor of a single internet-based repository system operated by the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board commonly known as “EMMA.” The 2008 amendments were made final on December 5, 20087

and went into effect July 1, 2009 marking an end to the long national NRMSIR nightmare (or so it was thought).

D. On July 17, 2009, the SEC proposed additional amendments to the rule8 that, for the first time since 1994, changed the required content of continuing disclosure undertakings,

1 17 CFR 240.15c2-12.2 SEC Release No. 34-26100 (September 22, 1988). 3 SEC Release No. 33-7049, 34-33741 (March 9, 1994). 4 SEC Release No. 34-33742 (March 9, 1994). 5 SEC Release No. 34-34961 (November 10, 1994) 6 SEC Release No. 34-58255 (July 30, 2008). 7 SEC Release No. 34-59062 (December 5, 2008). 8 SEC Release No. 34-60332 (July 17, 2009).

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 53

Page 58: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

imposed a 10 business day deadline for event disclosure, removed the materiality standard from some events and modified the exemption provisions for variable rate demand obligations. The adopting release9 also included interpretive guidance regarding the obligation of participating underwriters to evaluate the likelihood of future compliance by the issuer with its continuing disclosure undertakings, a harbinger of sorts for the SEC’s Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initiative announced in March 2014.

II. The SEC Report on the Municipal Securities Market (July 31, 2012)

A. In July 2012, the United States Securities and Exchange Commission released its Report on the Municipal Securities Market.10

B. Contains the SEC’s recommendations to improve municipal disclosure and market structure (particularly for pre- and post-trade price transparency.

C. Multi-pronged approach, including legislative and regulatory changes, as well as encouragement for more industry-based initiatives.

D. The SEC’s recommendations in the report touched on Continuing Disclosure in a number of ways:

1. SEC recommended addressing compliance issues regarding continuing disclosure by requiring issuers have disclosure policies and procedures in place regarding their disclosure obligations and suggesting a mechanism to enforce compliance with continuing disclosure agreements and other obligations of municipal issuers

2. SEC wants additional event disclosures relating to issuance of new debt (whether or not subject to Rule 15c2-12 and whether or not arising as a result of a municipal securities issuance).

3. The SEC recommended a safe harbor from private liability for forward-looking statements in disclosure materials, but only to municipal issuers that provide ongoing public disclosures on a current and timely basis.

III. The Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initiative

A. In March 2014, the SEC Division of Enforcement announced the Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation Initiative (the “MCDC Initiative”), a self-reporting program intended to address what the SEC believed were potentially widespread violations of the federal securities laws resulting from misrepresentations in municipal bond offering documents about prior compliance with continuing disclosure obligations.

B. Pursuant to the MCDC Initiative, the SEC Division of Enforcement agreed to recommend standardized settlement terms to issuers and obligated persons involved in the offer or sale of municipal securities (collectively, “issuers”) as well as underwriters of such offerings

9 SEC Release No. 34-62184A (June 10, 2010). 10 Issued July 31, 2012; available at www.sec.gov.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 54

Page 59: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2

if they self-reported to the Division possible violations involving materially inaccurate statements relating to prior compliance with the continuing disclosure undertakings required by Rule 15c2-12.

C. The standardized settlement terms require underwriters to:

1. retain an independent consultant, not unacceptable to the SEC staff, to conduct a compliance review and, within 180 days of the institution of proceedings, provide recommendations to the underwriter regarding the underwriter’s municipal underwriting due diligence process and procedures;

2. within 90 days of the independent consultant’s recommendations, take reasonable steps to enact such recommendations; provided that the underwriter may seek approval from the SE staff to not adopt recommendations that the underwriter can demonstrate to be unduly burdensome;

3. cooperate with any subsequent investigation by the SEC Division of Enforcement regarding the false statement(s), including the roles of individuals and/or other parties involved; and

4. provide the SEC staff with a compliance certification regarding the applicable undertakings by the underwriter on the one-year anniversary of the date of institution of the proceedings.

D. Under the proposed standardized settlement terms with respect to issuers, the issuer must undertake to:

1. establish appropriate policies and procedures and training regarding continuing disclosure obligations within 180 days of the institution of the proceedings;

2. comply with existing continuing disclosure undertakings, including updating past delinquent filings within 180 days of the institution of the proceedings;

3. cooperate with any subsequent investigation by the SEC Enforcement Division regarding the false statement(s), including the roles of individuals and/or other parties involved;

4. disclose in a clear and conspicuous fashion the settlement terms in any final official statement for an offering by the issuer within five years of the date of institution of the proceedings; and

5. provide the SEC staff with a compliance certification regarding the applicable undertakings by the issuer on the one-year anniversary of the date of institution of the proceedings.

E. On June 18, 2015, the SEC approved settlements with 36 underwriters who had self-reported under the MCDC Initiative.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 55

Page 60: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

F. Included within the settlement agreements are 92 examples of what the SEC Division of Enforcement cited as municipal securities offerings that contained misstatements (or omissions) about continuing disclosure compliance in official statements since 2010.

G. On September 30, 2015, the SEC announced an additional 22 settlements with underwriters under the MCDC initiative.

IV. Current Industry Initiatives

A. In late October, 2015, SIFMA hosted a meeting of municipal market stakeholders to discuss the state of the market in the aftermath of the MCDC Initiative. Healthy discourse has been had over the issues of the means to enhance compliance by issuers with continuing disclosure undertakings.

B. Subsequent meetings for subgroups have been held on discreet topics.

C. Primarily the areas of focus include:

1. Leverage the financial statement auditor’s relationship with issuers as a means of reminding issuers of continuing disclosure obligations.

a. A 2014 Louisiana law11 requires public entities to keep records regarding continuing disclosure compliance and also requires the public entity’s auditor to review the public entity's compliance with the recordkeeping requirements, as well as a sample of the public entity's filings on EMMA to determine if such filings are in compliance with the continuing disclosure agreements to which the public entity is a party.

b. Issues presented include what the role of the auditor should be with respect to inquiring about or ascertaining compliance with continuing disclosure undertakings and whether a mechanism (voluntary or state law mandated) should be employed to have issuers certify or otherwise represent to the auditors (and the market) as to the status of their compliance with continuing disclosure undertakings.

2. Identify and recommend improvements to the EMMA system that will, among other things, address the structuring and organization of disclosure documents on EMMA to facilitate retrieval of relevant information and further enhance the email reminder function.

3. Request guidance from the SEC on questions of materiality of specific disclosure information.

a. Although the settlement agreements under MCDC list examples of continuing disclosure misstatements, the lack of context for these examples does not provide a basis for future use in determining what continuing disclosure failings should be disclosed under Rule 15c2-12.

11 A copy of the statute is attached as Appendix A.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 56

Page 61: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2

4. Request updated guidance from the SEC on amending continuing disclosure agreements.

a. MCDC highlighted the fact that disclosure practices evolve over time and older continuing disclosure agreements may require the production of information that is no longer relevant, available or easily produced.

b. The SEC in the “NABL 1” letter12 set out an amendment process that has been written into many (if not most) continuing disclosure undertakings, which has three conditions that must be satisfied:

(i) The amendment may only be made in connection with a change in circumstances that arises from a change in legal requirements, change in law, or change in the identity, nature, or status of the obligated person, or type of business conducted;

(ii) The undertaking, as amended, would have complied with the requirements of the rule at the time of the primary offering, after taking into account any amendments or interpretations of the rule, as well as any change in circumstances; and

(iii) The amendment does not materially impair the interests of holders, as determined either by parties unaffiliated with the issuer or obligated person (such as the trustee or bond counsel), or by approving vote of bondholders pursuant to the terms of the governing instrument at the time of the amendment.

c. The SEC staff anticipated, at the time, that undertakings would include a general description of the type of financial information and operating data that will be provided, rather than references to specific tables and other information. “These descriptions need not state more than a general category of financial information and operating data.”

d. It would facilitate the amendment process if the SEC staff would provide additional guidance that approves (or at least doesn’t disapprove) an amendment process designed to update the disclosure requirements set forth in older continuing disclosure undertakings so long as adequate notice is provided bondholders and the new requirements would be sufficient if the applicable bonds were being issued today (i.e. allowing the disclosure requirements to evolve as market requirements change).

V. Removing Road Blocks to Increased Voluntary (including Interim) Disclosure

A. In 2000, NABL issued a paper13 for use by its members in counseling clients regarding voluntary secondary market disclosure.

B. In 2013, NABL was part of a joint effort of a number of municipal market organizations to produce a paper regarding voluntary disclosure of bank loans.14

12 A copy of the NABL 1 Letter is attached as Appendix B. 13 A copy of this paper is included in Appendix C. 14 A copy of this paper is included in Appendix D.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 57

Page 62: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

C. The 2012 SEC Report including many references to a desire to increase the amount and frequency of the delivery of information by municipal issuers to the secondary market.

D. Reluctance by municipal issuers to undertake consistent and frequent voluntary disclosure is likely tied to several factors:

1. “Out of sight, out of mind” or “fix it and forget it.” Municipal issuers may build into their procedures annual filings to satisfy contractual undertakings but the municipal market is not first and foremost on the list of entities and individuals that local administrators and finance officers are concerned about satisfying. Elected officials, senior administration and the local citizenry will always come first, other than in the midst of a bond issue. An infrequent issuer that issues only long term fixed rate debt may not recognize or appreciate the value of enhancing the flow of information to the secondary market. Voluntary disclosure over the course of a 30 year bond issue will not affect the amount of debt service to be paid and the relative value of the issuer’s bonds in the secondary market will not affect the financial position of the issuer.

2. Concern about increased exposure for securities liability. Information provided to the market by a municipal issuer will be subject to the anti-fraud provisions of the federal securities laws and this has stymied widespread voluntary disclosure programs by infrequent or smaller issuers, perhaps on the advice or counsel.

E. In order to increase voluntary disclosure, issuers who do not currently provide additional disclosure to the secondary market will need to be convinced of the importance of doing so and should be advised of ways in which such disclosure can be undertaken without exposing the issuer to unwarranted additional liability and may, under some circumstances, control the extent of information subject to anti-fraud laws.

F. Use of disclaimers on EMMA filings or “terms of use” pages on websites are not likely to be sufficient to insulate an issuer from liability.

G. Would a “safe harbor” for voluntary disclosure alleviate issuer/regulator concerns?

1. Development of market-accepted disclaimer language to use when posting voluntary information on EMMA.

2. Confirmation that compliance with disclosure policies and procedures would be sufficient to avoid a negligence charge by the SEC.

3. Acceptance by market participants of “terms of use” for web-based disclosure of interim financial and other information

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 58

Page 63: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2

VI. How NABL Members can be part of the solution.

1. Talk to your clients about their existing or anticipated continuing disclosure requirements, including consideration of amendment to existing undertakings.

2. Encourage the adoption of a formal workable disclosure policy.

3. Make sure the issuer is provided a template for the tables and other information that is required to be updated.

4. Talk to your clients about additional voluntary disclosure of information already produced and distributed for other purposes.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 59

Page 64: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

Appendix A

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 60

Page 65: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

1

2014 Louisiana Laws Revised Statutes TITLE 39 - Public Finance RS 39:1438 - Issuers of securities; continuing disclosure requirements; audit requirements Universal Citation: LA Rev Stat § 39:1438 §1438. Issuers of securities; continuing disclosure requirements; audit requirements A. Definitions. For purposes of this Section: (1) "Auditor" means the legislative auditor or any private accounting firm which prepares the annual financial audit of a public entity under rules of the legislative auditor regarding the audit of governmental entities, quasi-governmental entities, or entities otherwise subject to public audit by the legislative auditor. (2) "Continuing disclosure agreement" means any agreement entered into by an obligated person which sets forth the continuing disclosure obligations of such obligated person pursuant to the SEC rule. (3) "EMMA" means the Electronic Municipal Market Access system maintained by the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board. (4) "Issuer" means any "issuer of municipal securities" as defined in the SEC rule. (5) "Municipal securities" means any securities which are issued by a public entity which are subject to continuing disclosure under the SEC rule. (6) "Obligated person" has the meaning defined in the SEC rule. (7) "Public entity" means the state, its agencies, departments, boards, commissions, parishes, municipalities, school boards, special districts, special authorities, and any other political subdivision or other entity created by any of the foregoing. (8) "SEC rule" means the municipal securities continuing disclosure rule of the United States Securities and Exchange Commission codified as Section 240.15c2-12 of Title 17 of the Code of Federal Regulations, together with all corresponding rules, updates, notices, and interpretations of the United States Securities and Exchange Commission and the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board, as may be amended from time to time. B. Findings and purpose. The legislature recognizes that public entities often act as issuer or obligated persons of municipal securities and therefore are often subject to the SEC rule, which was established in order to provide municipal securities investors with more timely and transparent access to financial and other material information while such securities remain outstanding. The legislature finds that the continuing disclosure requirements of the SEC rule

S-2 Appendix A Page 1

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 61

Page 66: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

2

are in the public interest, and now desires to establish procedures to provide for compliance and audit with respect to municipal securities issued in the state. C. Recordkeeping. (1) Every public entity shall continuously maintain: (a) A list of all Louisiana municipal securities for which the public entity is the issuer or an obligated person. (b) A copy of all continuing disclosure agreements to which the public entity is a party. (c) If, pursuant to a continuing disclosure agreement to which the public entity is a party, the public entity is responsible for filing notices of changes in bond ratings, a list of current ratings for such securities, if any. (2) All records required to be kept by a public entity under this Section shall be subject to inspection by the public entity's auditor. D. Audit. As part of its annual financial audit of a public entity, a public entity's auditor shall: (1) Review the public entity's compliance with the recordkeeping requirements of this Section. (2) Review a sample of the public entity's filings on EMMA to determine if such filings are in compliance with the continuing disclosure agreements to which the public entity is a party. Acts 2014, No. 463, §1.

S-2 Appendix A Page 2

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 62

Page 67: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

B

Appendix B

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 63

Page 68: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

S-2 Appendix B Page 114th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 64

Page 69: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

B

S-2 Appendix B Page 214th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 65

Page 70: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

S-2 Appendix B Page 3

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 66

Page 71: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

B

S-2 Appendix B Page 4

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 67

Page 72: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

S-2 Appendix B Page 5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 68

Page 73: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

B

S-2 Appendix B Page 6

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 69

Page 74: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

S-2 Appendix B Page 7

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 70

Page 75: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

B

S-2 Appendix B Page 8

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 71

Page 76: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

S-2 Appendix B Page 9

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 72

Page 77: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

B

S-2 Appendix B Page 10

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 73

Page 78: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

S-2 Appendix B Page 11

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 74

Page 79: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

B

S-2 Appendix B Page 12

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 75

Page 80: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

Appendix C

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 76

Page 81: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

1These papers are available on the internet at www.nfma.org.

Final as Approved by the NABL Board on September 20, 2000

PROVIDING INFORMATION TO THE SECONDARY MARKET REGARDING MUNICIPAL SECURITIES

This paper has been prepared under the auspices of the National Association of Bond

Lawyers (“NABL”) for use by its members in counseling clients regarding voluntary secondary

market disclosure. Voluntary secondary market disclosure involves at least three distinct types of

activities: (i) complying with contractual agreements to provide periodic disclosures that are in

addition to those mandated by undertakings under Rule 15c2-12 adopted by the Securities and

Exchange Commission under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“Rule 15c2-12”), (ii) responding

to ad hoc investor inquiries, and (iii) providing information concerning material events in addition

to that required to be disclosed pursuant to Rule 15c2-12. While distinct, these activities have a

common group of legal and business considerations associated with them.

Many participants in the municipal bond markets from the so called “buy side,” e.g., analysts

working for municipal bond mutual funds and insurance companies and bond traders at investment

banks, have expressed concern about the quantity, quality and accessibility of information regarding

the obligors on municipal securities following the primary offering of those securities. These

concerns have been discussed in some detail in a position paper issued by the National Federation

of Municipal Analysts (“NFMA”) in 1998, and in three sector specific papers issued by the NFMA

related to the housing, health care and land based financing sectors of the municipal securities

markets.1

Rule 15c2-12 was amended effective in 1995 to require that an obligor with respect to most

municipal securities enter into a continuing disclosure undertaking before any underwriter could bid

for or agree to underwrite its bonds. These amendments were promulgated by the Securities and

S-2 Appendix C Page 1

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 77

Page 82: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

2See Regulation FD (Fair Disclosure), 17 C.F.R. pt. 243.

-2-

Exchange Commission in response to a broad industry initiative recommending changes in the

municipal market to increase the information available after municipal securities were initially

marketed. The amendments to Rule 15c2-12 generally require that an obligor with respect to

municipal securities undertake a binding commitment enforceable by the holders of the municipal

securities to provide “financial information or operating data, provided at least annually, of the type

included in the final official statement,” as well as audited financial statements if not submitted as

part of the annual financial information, when and if available, and also to provide information

regarding certain specified material events on a timely basis.

Some commentators have suggested that the amendments to Rule15c2-12 resulted in several

unintended consequences. Specifically, these commentators claim that some obligors (i) have begun

to limit the amount of initial disclosure made available in primary offerings in order to limit the

amount of continuing disclosure required pursuant to Rule 15c2-12, (ii) have declined to provide

responses to informal inquiries, and (iii) have refused to provide information directly upon request,

instead referring inquirers to the nationally recognized municipal securities information repositories

created under Rule 15c2-12.

It has been suggested that these responses from obligors were attributable to a concern that

providing information beyond that required by Rule 15c2-12 undertakings created risks of liability

for insider trading on material nonpublic information, or that the information provided to any

investor was required to be provided to all investors and potential investors.2 In addition, there has

been concern that any information provided in response to investor inquiries might subject an issuer

to liability on the theory that supplying such information, however limited in scope, might create an

obligation to provide the full range of disclosure appropriate for a primary offering of municipal

securities. Such a result would of course lead obligors to conclude that the potential risks outweigh

any potential benefits to be achieved by responding to investor inquiries. There have also been

concerns that any new delivery of information that had been previously supplied might constitute

S-2 Appendix C Page 2

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 78

Page 83: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

-3-

a new publication of the information and therefore require that the information be examined to

determine whether it was still accurate and not misleading in light of subsequent developments.

The federal securities laws generally do not require obligors on municipal securities to

provide ongoing information about themselves. There are, of course, exceptions to the general rule.

For example, obligors on municipal securities that are subject to the periodic reporting requirements

of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (so called “public companies” such as investor-owned utility

companies and airlines) are required to disclose information under that Act, and obligors may be

bound by undertakings entered into under Rule 15c2-12. State law may also impose disclosure

requirements or disclosure may be required under indentures or other contracts related to municipal

securities. In addition, most obligors utilize an official statement or other offering document when

initially issuing municipal securities and when attempting to repurchase securities through a tender

offer, or when soliciting a consent to amend or waive the provisions of instruments governing

outstanding municipal securities. Finally, under certain circumstances, there may be an obligation

to correct statements that were made in connection with municipal securities that are discovered to

have been inaccurate when made, and to supplement statements that were misleading when made

because of the omission of other information, if persons are continuing to reasonably rely upon such

statements in investment decisions. Outside these exceptions, silence is a permissible response to

the market.

Additional secondary market disclosure beyond what is mandated by the exceptions

mentioned above is not required, nor is it prohibited under the federal securities laws. The decision

to voluntarily provide such disclosure cannot be decided as a a matter of law. Accordingly, bond

lawyers can provide counsel regarding a decision whether or not to provide additional disclosure,

but it is not appropriate to tell obligors on municipal securities that, as a matter of federal securities

law, they must provide additional information or, alternatively, that they must not provide additional

information. Bond lawyers can, based upon experience and knowledge, help obligors to identify

some of the legal and nonlegal issues that they should consider. Such counseling, however, does not

relieve the obligor itself of the ultimate responsibility for making the decision to voluntarily provide

information.

S-2 Appendix C Page 3

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 79

Page 84: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

-4-

If an obligor does choose to provide information that can be expected to reach the securities

market, then the information that is provided must be accurate and not misleading in the context in

which it is provided. For example, if questioned about a default, an issuer of securities may answer

“no comment,” but may not deny the existence of a default that has in fact occurred. Also, providing

or filing an annual report under Rule 15c2-12 with a cover letter that includes additional information

regarding events after the close of the period covered by the annual report requires that the additional

information also be accurate, complete and not misleading as of the date that it is provided.

Thus, when an obligor chooses to provide information, it becomes responsible for assuring

that the information is accurate and complete in all material respects. If the obligor determines to

proceed with a voluntary disclosure program, neither the voluntary nature of the program nor its

overall good intent will excuse an obligor for knowingly or recklessly providing false or misleading

information. For this reason, obligors should not undertake voluntary disclosure or commit to make

additional disclosure without planning to have adequate resources available to assure that the

information provided can be properly prepared and reviewed before disclosure. The voluntary

disclosure program of an obligor with complex operations and substantial resources may

appropriately be far more detailed than the voluntary disclosure program of an obligor with limited

staff and operations that is an infrequent issuer of municipal securities.

There has been a substantial amount of discussion in the municipal market about the risk of

“insider trading” liability for providing informal responses to inquiries from investors or potential

investors. The law related to insider trading has developed in the last forty years from a series of

court cases, so it is not possible to state with precision the outlines of this area of the securities laws.

It is possible, however, to make some general statements about the area.

In general, an insider trading violation requires a use of material nonpublic information in

breach of a duty with motive to benefit personally from the use of the inside information. Thus, it

is unlikely that a disclosure of nonpublic information by an employee of an entity will result in a

violation if (i) the entity is subject to freedom of information or open record laws, (ii) the employee

S-2 Appendix C Page 4

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 80

Page 85: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

-5-

is not receiving financial or other benefits in exchange for the information, or (iii) the entity

authorized the disclosure.

It is not a violation of the securities laws to provide clarifying information directly related

to information already generally available. Thus, an obligor who receives a telephone call requesting

clarification of information that has just been filed as a part of its Rule 15c2-12 annual disclosure

can, and perhaps should, provide it. The clarifying information is not nonpublic because it elucidates

information that has already been made public. If it becomes clear from the telephone call that the

filed information was ambiguous, and therefore potentially misleading, the obligor should consider

making the clarifying information generally available. In some cases, this may involve a delay in

providing the information to the inquiring party until the information can be provided to the market

generally.

At one time there was a question as to whether Regulation FD (Fair Disclosure), recently

promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission and scheduled to take effect on October

23, 2000, might be amended to extend to municipal securities or whether the legal concepts

underlying Regulation FD might extend to municipal securities. It is now clear that the regulation

will not apply to municipal securities, and it is apparent from the preamble to the Proposing Release

that the legal concepts used to justify promulgation of Regulation FD do not apply to municipal

securities.

Some information should receive special handling. This is information that can reasonably

be expected to have a significant effect on the trading in municipal securities that are affected by the

information. Some examples would include information about potential changes in the tax-exempt

status of the securities, substantial deterioration in the financial condition of the obligor with respect

to the securities, and information about advance refundings of the securities that would result in

changes in the rating and expected retirement date of the securities. Again, although Regulation FD

does not apply, and there is only a small likelihood of any insider trading violation resulting from

uneven disclosure of the information in the absence of any personal benefit, the potential impact on

the price of the municipal securities strongly suggests that the fairer and prudent course of action

S-2 Appendix C Page 5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 81

Page 86: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

-6-

would be to take steps to assure uniform dissemination of the information to the maximum extent

possible.

Even if information may be disclosed without complying with Regulation FD and without

violation of the insider trading law, considerations of fundamental fairness indicate that a clearly

demarcated process for disclosure of information that reduces or eliminates the possibility of uneven

access to the information is good policy. Furthermore, it seems that a commitment to fairness in the

dissemination of information would help to create a broader market for the obligor’s municipal

securities, thereby producing better pricing. Finally, to the extent that investors may also be

constituents, there may be other reasons to provide the information on an equitable basis.

There has been substantial discussion on the use of internet web sites for disclosure. Under

the currently understood law in the area, there are two areas of concern. The first is the degree to

which information not intended for investors or not prepared by the obligor may become the

responsibility of the obligor, and the second is the question of “republication” of the information on

the obligor’s web site. The first issue involves either information contained on the obligor’s web

site, but intended to serve a marketing or general public relations purpose rather than intended for

investors, or information on the web sites of others that can be reached by hypertext links from the

obligor’s web site. The Securities and Exchange Commission has provided some relief on this issue

for purposes of Rule 15c2-12 by allowing underwriters to rely upon certifications from obligors

identifying specific information on the web site that is intended to constitute the official statement.

Accordingly, obligors should take steps to make clear what portion of the information on their web

site is intended for investor relations, should segregate that information from other information on

their web sites, and should make certain that the information on their web site is not materially

inaccurate or misleading. However, under Rule 10b-5 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, an

obligor may still find itself subject to liability in connection with a securities offering for statements

on its web site or reached by hypertext links from its web site, despite the fact that those statements

were not specifically identified as information intended as part of the official statement. The test is

whether the information appears to be a part of the material intended to encourage purchases of the

obligor's securities.

S-2 Appendix C Page 6

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 82

Page 87: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

-7-

The second issue involves the question of responsibility for updating information on the

obligor’s web site. The Securities and Exchange Commission has raised a question whether

information on a web site may be considered to be “republished” every day that it remains on the

web site, or every time that a potential investor accesses the information. Its accuracy and

completeness is reconsidered each time that it is considered to be republished. As many including

NABL have noted, this result would significantly burden the use of the internet to disseminate

information. Obligors may provide themselves with some protection by making certain that posted

information is clearly dated and accompanied by a statement that it speaks only as of its date.

Obligors should also consider removing information after a time or else have explicit procedures

for updating the information. While it is more desirable to update information than to remove it

completely, in the absence of formal guidance from the SEC on the republication issue, obligors with

limited resources should remove potentially stale information.

There are a number of anecdotes circulating in the municipal market that indicate that even

borrowers of high credit quality are being required to agree to provide quarterly financial and

operational information as a condition to receiving offers to purchase their municipal securities.

There are indications that either no buyers, or only a small number of buyers, will accept as sufficient

the minimal disclosure complying with Rule 15c2-12. If this is the case, there would be clear

financial advantages to agreeing to additional disclosure. Obligors should consult with their

financial advisors and investment bankers to determine whether this is true for them. If it is true,

market access is likely to become a compelling reason for agreeing to provide additional disclosure

beyond the disclosure mandated by Rule 15c2-12.

It seems likely, although there is no published study that supports the assumption, that

providing information more frequently, providing it directly to investors and potential investors, and

responding to investor inquiries will improve investor relationships. These improved investor

relationships might produce a larger group of potential investors in future municipal securities

offerings and thus lower interest rates, might increase investor cooperation with waiver or consent

requests, and might facilitate communication with investors in the case of tender offers.

S-2 Appendix C Page 7

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 83

Page 88: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

3The Government Finance Officers Association has prepared a 1996 “RecommendedPractices” paper entitled “Debt Management–Maintaining an Investor Relations Program,” whichprovides additional guidance and is available on the internet at www.gfoa.org.

-8-

Undertaking a well considered voluntary disclosure program could offer some benefits in

legal matters as well. A fact is material only if it significantly alters the total mix of information

available to investors. A program that makes accurate and complete information available to the

public might enable an obligor to establish that an inadvertent misstatement issued in another context

was not material. Of course, if the misstatement was made by the chief financial officer in a room

full of securities analysts, even if it was made contrary to the clearly defined voluntary program, the

defense is unlikely to be available. On the other hand, if the statement was made in the heat of the

moment and overheard and reported by a local newspaper reporter, it is possible that the existence

of correct information in the marketplace would provide an adequate defense.

A program involving disclosure of frequently updated information certainly will reduce the

risk that stale information will be provided to the markets. The process of preparing updated

information should enable the obligor to identify statements that should be updated, and it could help

to establish that any inadvertently provided outdated information that has been superceded by other

information that is publicly available is not material in light of the total mix of information available.

Prompt disclosure of material information should also reduce the risk of claims that anyone

associated with the obligor on the municipal securities derived improper personal benefit from the

information before it was made available to the public.

If an obligor determines to proceed with a program of voluntary periodic disclosure, these

are some steps that the obligor should consider to manage the risks associated with the program3:

1. Appoint an investor relations person who is responsible for responding to inquiries,

and direct all inquiries from investors to that person. This is the first step in establishing control over

the information that is provided to the financial markets. Make certain that the investor relations

person understands the entity’s responsibilities under the securities laws. The investor relations

S-2 Appendix C Page 8

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 84

Page 89: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

-9-

person should be given access to responsible personnel, not only to obtain answers to questions, but

also to assure that other information is disclosed when necessary to avoid incomplete or misleading

responses. Consider making the investor relations person the person responsible for the release to

the markets of all additional information as well, so that the investor relations person is fully aware

of all market directed communications from your organization. Identify the investor relations person

by name or title in disclosure documents and on the web site, and provide contact information that

includes a phone number.

2. Maintain a record of contacts with investors. The record should include both the

identity of the investor and the person handling the inquiry. It should also include a summary of the

question and the information provided. Good practice would suggest that the contact information

for the investor needs to be included so that any information that was erroneous or misleading when

provided by the obligor can be corrected in a follow-up contact.

3. Do not undertake more than the available resources will permit to be done properly.

As noted above, obligors have no obligation to provide information except in limited circumstances,

but if they do provide information they have an obligation to speak accurately and not to mislead.

For this reason, a limited amount of information that is properly prepared and reviewed, and is

provided on a consistent basis over time, is far better than large amounts of information that is not

reviewed and formatted consistently for each period.

4. Establish a process for preparing and releasing information. The process should allow

for review of the information by appropriate officials, such as the chief executive officer, chief

financial officer, chief legal officer and others having similar responsibilities to assure that the

information is not only accurate, but also complete and not misleading in context. The information

should be prepared, reviewed and released in a consistent manner each time.

5. The manner of releasing information should assure that it is evenly disseminated on

a timely basis. Obligors should consider filing with nationally recognized municipal securities

information repositories, distribution to known beneficial owners, posting on an issuer web page

S-2 Appendix C Page 9

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 85

Page 90: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

-10-

devoted to information intended for investor relations, and use of press releases in order to obtain

the widest possible dissemination.

6. Until the Securities and Exchange Commission provides more guidance related to the

republication issue, information posted on internet web sites should be updated or removed after a

period of time so that it does not become a misleading implied representation concerning current

facts. Updating information is preferable to removing it. In all cases, information should clearly

state the date as of which it speaks.

7. At the same time that information is prepared for release, other sources of information

that are provided by the obligor should be reviewed to determine whether inconsistent information

is also being provided through governing body meeting packages, marketing materials, press kits or

internet sites. Proper reconciliation of statements being made is an important step in the process.

8. Where appropriate, seek the advice of competent consultants. If quarterly or monthly

financial information is being provided, consider having it reviewed by the obligor’s independent

public accountants. If material estimates are involved in preparation of financial statements, such

as the collectible amount of accounts receivable, input from outside accountants can be vital to

avoiding substantial adjustments from quarterly or monthly financial results at the time the audit is

prepared. Experienced lawyers should be engaged if necessary to assist in development of the

disclosure program and to address difficult questions regarding materiality in particular cases.

9. Fairly worded disclaimers should be used to negate any claims of implied state law

contractual guaranties of the accuracy or completeness of obligor-provided information, to make

reliance on disclaimed information less responsible, to limit responsibility for third party

information, and to make clear that the issuer may not be updating the information in the future or

undertaking to report regularly on financial or other developments. Disclaimers, however, will not

eliminate the obligor’s responsibility under the federal securities laws for information provided or

endorsed by the obligor. Fair disclaimers also can be used to alert readers of limitations on the

information gathering and reporting process.

S-2 Appendix C Page 10

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 86

Page 91: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

-11-

In summary, there may be valid nonlegal reasons for obligors to undertake voluntary periodic

disclosure in addition to the periodic disclosure undertaking required by Rule 15c2-12. In the

absence of a motive to obtain personal benefit, disclosure of information to investors is unlikely to

result in insider trading liability, and undertaking a carefully considered and properly structured and

administered program of periodic disclosure may provide both legal and nonlegal benefits. Obligors

should understand, however, that information provided to investors voluntarily and with good

intentions nevertheless must be materially accurate and not misleading.

Dallas_405234.v4

S-2 Appendix C Page 11

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 87

Page 92: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

Appendix D

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 88

Page 93: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

CONSIDERATIONS REGARDING VOLUNTARY SECONDARY MARKET DISCLOSURE

ABOUT BANK LOANS

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

Since 2009, state and local governmental issuers and conduit borrowers (collectively, “issuers”) have increasingly used private bank loans (“bank loans”) as an alternative to publicly-offered municipal securities (collectively, “bonds”).

Because incurrence of additional debt, including bank loans, is not one of the material events for which disclosure is required under Rule 15c2-12, holders of an issuer’s outstanding bonds may not become aware of a bank loan or its impact on the issuer’s creditworthiness until the issuer’s next financial audit is released or new bonds are sold.

Facts relating to incurrence of a bank loan may be important to bondholders for a number of reasons, such as:

• The bank loan may increase the issuer’s debt outstanding; • The covenants and events of default for the bank loan may be different than those for

the bonds, potentially allowing the bank to assert remedies before the outstanding bondholders;

• Certain assets previously available to secure bonds may be pledged to the bank as security for the bank loan; and

• The bank loan may be structured with a balloon payment at the end of its term and create refinancing risks that may impact the issuer’s ability to pay outstanding bonds.

As a result, bondholders and their representatives began encouraging issuers to voluntarily post information about bank loans to the Electronic Municipal Market Access (“EMMA”) website maintained by the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board (the “MSRB”).In April 2012, the MSRB published MSRB Notice 2012-18, in which it encouraged issuers to voluntarily post information about bank loans to EMMA.

These calls for voluntary disclosure about bank loans led to the formation of the Bank Loan Disclosure Task Force in March 2012. The Bank Loan Disclosure Task Force has prepared this document (“Considerations”) to assist issuers and their financial advisors and legal counsel in determining whether to disclose the incurrence of a bank loan on a voluntary basis and the extent of any such disclosure.

If an issuer concludes that it will make voluntary disclosure about a bank loan, the issuer could file appropriate documents relating to the bank loan, such as the loan or financing agreement, with EMMA. Another alternative is for the issuer to file a summary of some or all of the features relating to the bank loan with EMMA. If an issuer elects to prepare a summary, the Bank Loan Disclosure Task Force recommends that the issuer consider including the following information:

S-2 Appendix D Page 1

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 89

Page 94: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

ii

• Date of incurrence, principal amount, maturity and amortization • Interest rate, if fixed, or method of computation, if variable (and any default rates) • Information on interest rate swaps, caps and other interest rate management products

that hedge the bank loan • Purpose/use of proceeds • Collateral/security pledge (e.g., general obligation, specified revenues, real property,

personal property), and whether the pledge is on parity with or subordinate to bonds• Demonstration of compliance with applicable additional debt tests • Covenants, events of default and remedies, if different from outstanding bonds • Term-out provisions if the bank loan allows the bank to seek repayment earlier than

the stated maturity date (e.g., a demand or put date) • Terms under which the bank loan can be sold or transferred by the bank to other

investors• Disclosure of “most-favored nation” or similar clause • Ratings, if assigned

This list is nonexclusive, and the issuer is free to add or delete features. MSRB Notice 2012-18 also contains a nonexclusive list of possible features to be included in a summary.

Voluntary disclosure about a bank loan is most useful if it is timely. Issuers who are willing to make voluntary disclosure about a bank loan could do so in the same time frame as mandatory disclosure of material events under Rule 15c2-12 (i.e., within 10 business days).

Because voluntary disclosure about a bank loan posted on EMMA would be reasonably expected to reach investors and the trading markets, such disclosure is subject to the antifraud provisions of the federal securities laws and the information that is provided must not be materially inaccurate or misleading in the context in which it is provided. In preparing a summary of the features of a bank loan (or if any information is redacted from documents being filed), issuers should consider whether the omission of any features of the bank loan (or redaction of information from the bank loan documents) would result in the information provided being materially misleading in the context in which it is provided.

An issuer may wish to use terms of usage or disclaimers in connection with voluntary disclosure of information about a bank loan.

The Bank Loan Disclosure Task Force included representatives of issuers, lenders, bond counsel, underwriters, financial advisors, securities analysts, institutional investors and other interested parties. The particular groups that comprised the Task Force are listed in Appendix A.

These Considerations are not intended to create legal standards or describe existing legal standards in any detail, nor establish a template for all issuers regarding disclosure concerning their bank loans. This document represents a consensus of the Task Force participants, but does not necessarily reflect the individual views of, or formal approval by, any particular participating organization.

May 1, 2013

S-2 Appendix D Page 2

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 90

Page 95: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

INTRODUCTION

The increasing use by state and local governmental issuers and conduit borrowers (collectively, “issuers”)1 of bank loans (as defined below), particularly tax-exempt bank loans,2since 2009 has caused many participants in the municipal market to consider, or reconsider, disclosure about such arrangements to existing holders and prospective purchasers (collectively, “bondholders”) of the issuer’s publicly-offered municipal securities (collectively, “bonds”). This document (“Considerations”) provides analysis of considerations in making voluntary secondary market disclosure about a bank loan after such indebtedness is incurred.

These Considerations do not attempt to analyze whether a bank loan should be treated as a “loan” or a “security” under the federal securities laws,3 because these Considerations are equally applicable to voluntary disclosure about bank loans whether they are treated as “loans” or as “securities.”

For purposes of these Considerations, a “bank loan” will be assumed to be made by a bank in one of two ways:

• a direct purchase – by purchasing a bond directly from the issuer,4 or

• a direct loan – by entering into a loan agreement or other type of financing agreement with the issuer.5

The term “bank loan,” as used in these Considerations, does not include purchases of bonds by banks in a primary public offering or in the secondary market.6

1 Bonds issued by a state or a political subdivision thereof for its own benefit are usually referred to as “governmental bonds.” When a state or a political subdivision issues bonds for the benefit of a third party, usually a 501(c)(3) organization (e.g., hospitals, universities) or a for-profit entity for certain types of facilities (e.g., manufacturing facilities, qualified residential rental projects, solid waste disposal projects, etc.), such bonds are usually referred to as “conduit bonds” and the governmental issuer is also referred to as a “conduit issuer.” Because the proceeds of conduit bonds are usually loaned to the beneficiary of the financing, such beneficiary is usually referred to as a “conduit borrower.”

2 Although banks have long made tax-exempt and taxable bank loans to issuers, it is the willingness of banks since 2009 to make an increasing amount of tax-exempt bank loans to issuers as an alternative to publicly-offered tax-exempt bond issues that has led to the disclosure considerations addressed in this document.

3 On September 21, 2011, the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board (the “MSRB”) issued Notice 2011-52, to alert municipal market participants that, under existing legal principles described in the Notice, certain financings that are called “bank loans” may, in fact, be municipal securities. If that is the case, and parties regulated by the MSRB play a role in such financings, those parties may inadvertently violate MSRB rules, as well as other federal securities laws. As the Notice acknowledges, determining whether a bank loan made to a state or local government (for its own benefit or the benefit of a conduit borrower) is a security “can be a difficult question.” That question is beyond the scope of these Considerations.

4 The use of the term “bank loan” in these Considerations to describe direct purchases is not intended to imply that such transactions will constitute “loans,” as opposed to “securities,” under the federal securities laws.

5 In some states, e.g., North Carolina, governmental issuers do not have constitutional and statutory authority to enter into a general unsecured bank loan. These issuers may be required to obtain bank loans through the bank’s direct purchase of a general obligation bond or revenue bond or by entering into a nonrecourse, secured installment purchase agreement with the bank.

S-2 Appendix D Page 3

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 91

Page 96: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

2

Diligent market participants typically are alerted to the incurrence of additional debt by an issuer by reviewing annual financial information made available by the issuer pursuant to a continuing disclosure agreement that satisfies Rule 15c2-12 under the Securities Act of 1934 (“Rule 15c2-12”) or by reviewing an official statement for a new bond issue. Issuers, however, generally are not required to prepare, and do not prepare, an official statement or other offering document for a bank loan financing (including direct purchases), nor is the incurrence of a bank loan a material event required to be disclosed to existing bondholders pursuant to Rule 15c2-12.As a result, the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board (the “MSRB”) and certain bondholders or their representatives have encouraged issuers to voluntarily post information about bank loans to the MSRB’s Electronic Municipal Market Access (“EMMA”) website.7

The Bank Loan Disclosure Task Force has prepared these Considerations to assist issuers and their financial advisors and legal counsel in determining whether to disclose the incurrence of a bank loan on a voluntary basis and the extent of any such disclosure.

Readers are encouraged to keep in mind the following regarding the scope of these Considerations:

• These Considerations assume that an issuer has outstanding publicly-offered bonds. If an issuer is only a party to a series of private financing transactions, none of which are disclosed on EMMA, voluntary disclosure of information regarding incurrence of a bank loan on EMMA would serve no purpose.

• While these Considerations only address voluntary disclosure about incurrence of a bank loan, they may be equally applicable to issuers who are considering voluntary disclosure about incurrence of other additional debt (e.g., financing provided by non-banks, lease financings, etc.).

The Bank Loan Disclosure Task Force included representatives of issuers, lenders, bond counsel, underwriters, financial advisors, securities analysts, institutional investors and other interested parties. The particular groups that comprised the Task Force are listed in Appendix A.

These Considerations are not intended to create legal standards or describe existing legal standards in any detail, nor establish a template for all issuers regarding disclosure concerning their bank loans. This document represents a consensus of the Task Force participants, but does not necessarily reflect the individual views of, or formal approval by, any particular participating organization.

6 Banks who purchase bonds in a primary public offering also are providing financing (i.e., making a “loan”) to the issuer; however, as discussed in more detail below, a principal concern of bondholders regarding bank loans is the possibility they are made on terms and conditions different from those that apply to the issuer’s bonds. When a bank purchases bonds in a primary public offering or in the secondary market, it presumably is doing so on the same terms and conditions as other bondholders (the other “lenders”).

7 See MSRB Notice 2012-18 (April 3, 2012), available at http://msrb.org/Rules-and-Interpretations/Regulatory-Notices/2012/2012-18.aspx, which is discussed in more detail below.

S-2 Appendix D Page 4

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 92

Page 97: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

3

BRIEF HISTORY OF BANK PURCHASES AND BANK LOANS IN THE MUNICIPAL MARKET

Appendix B contains a brief history of bank purchases and bank loans in the municipal market. This history recounts that:

• By the early 1980s, banks were the biggest buyers of municipal bonds. For example, in 1980, the banking sector was the largest investor in the market, holding 39% of outstanding issues.

• The Tax Reform Act of 1986 added Section 265(b) to the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, which had the effect of eliminating the tax benefit for banks of owning most municipal bonds by preventing banks from deducting the carrying cost of such bonds. As a result, the banking sector became a net seller of municipal bonds beginning in the middle of 1986, and by mid-1992, banks held only 9% of all municipal bonds.

• Section 265(b)(3) of the Code provides an exception from the general rule of Section 265(b) for “qualified tax-exempt obligations,” which are usually referred to as “bank-qualified” obligations. After the 1986 Tax Act, bank loans generally were limited to bank-qualified obligations. From 1986 through 2008, bank-qualified obligations constituted a relatively small percentage of the new issuances of municipal bonds and attracted little attention in the marketplace.

• From 1986 through 2008, banks continued to play an important role in the municipal market by providing liquidity facilities and letters of credit to support variable rate demand obligations (“VRDOs”) purchased by tax-exempt money market funds.

• To encourage banks to extend credit in the municipal market during 2009 and 2010, the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (“ARRA”) amended Section 265(b) to expand the scope of bank-qualification. The changes made by ARRA had the desired effect: issuance of bank-qualified obligations doubled in 2009 and 2010.

• The ARRA amendments to Section 265(b) expired on December 31, 2010. As a result, during 2011 the issuance of bank-qualified obligations fell back to a level consistent with issuance from 2000 to 2008. Contrary to the expectations of many participants in the municipal market, however, banks have continued to make a substantial amount of bank loans on a non-bank-qualified basis since January 1, 2011.

• Many bank loans made since 2009 have been conversions by banks of existing liquidity facilities and letters of credit into funded bank loans, often on terms that are the same or substantially similar.

S-2 Appendix D Page 5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 93

Page 98: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

4

CURRENT DISCLOSURE REQUIREMENTS FOR BANK LOANS

As the MSRB noted in Notice 2012-18 described below, “because . . . bank loans generally do not require the same level of disclosure as public offerings for municipal securities, holders of an issuer’s outstanding debt, as well as potential investors and other market participants, may not become aware of such bank loans or their impact on the issuer’s outstanding debt until the release of an issuer’s audited financial statements.” Issuers generally are not required to prepare, and do not prepare, an official statement or other offering document for a bank loan financing, including direct purchases.8

Issuers also are not generally obligated to provide disclosure to the secondary market about the incurrence of a bank loan. A municipal securities issuer, in general, has no obligation under the federal securities laws to provide ongoing or periodic disclosure to the secondary market even if such information would be considered “material” within the meaning of the federal securities laws.9 Although issuers of publicly-traded corporate securities generally are required to file continuing information or reports under the federal securities laws,10 most municipal securities are exempt from the registration and reporting requirements under the federal securities laws.11

In 1994, the SEC amended Rule 15c2-12 to require underwriters to obtain agreements from municipal issuers to provide certain disclosure on a continuing basis.12 Rule 15c2-12 lists certain specific events for which continuing disclosure is required to be provided within 10 business days of their occurrence; however, incurrence by the obligor of additional debt, such as a bank loan, is not one of the events listed in the rule. As a result, issuers must determine whether to voluntarily provide disclosure about incurrence of a bank loan.13

8 If a bank loan is not a security, existing securities law requirements with respect to disclosure, including Rule 15c2-12, do not apply. Even if a bank loan is a municipal security, the transaction is likely to be a “limited offering” exempt from Rule 15c2-12.

9 ABA Section of State and Local Government Law, ABA Section of Business Law Committee on Federal Regulation of Securities, and National Association of Bond Lawyers, Disclosure Roles of Counsel in State and Local Government Securities Offerings (3d Ed. 2009) (“Disclosure Roles”), at 221.

10 A company subject to the periodic reporting requirements of Sections 13(a) and 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (a “public company”) is required to file SEC Forms 10-K, 10-Q and 8-K.

11 Most municipal securities are (1) exempt from the registration requirement of the Securities Act of 1933 (the “Securities Act”) pursuant to Section 3(a)(2) of the Securities Act and (2) exempt from the registration requirement of Section 12(g)(1) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Exchange Act”) and, therefore, also are exempt from the periodic and annual reporting requirements of Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. Disclosure Roles at 222. Section 15B(d) of the Exchange Act, enacted in 1975 (the “Tower Amendment”), also prohibits the SEC or the MSRB from requiring, directly or indirectly, the filing with the SEC or the MSRB of any document before the sale of a municipal security, and prohibits the MSRB from requiring any secondary market disclosure from issuers.

12 Rule 15c2-12 prohibits underwriters from purchasing or selling municipal securities unless the obligor (e.g., the governmental issuer in a governmental bond issue or the conduit borrower in a conduit bond issue) on such securities has contracted to provide continuing disclosure as described in the rule, including annual financial information and operating data and notice of certain specified material events, subject to certain exemptions.

S-2 Appendix D Page 6

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 94

Page 99: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

5

The SEC in its 1994 Interpretative Release14 cautioned that “when [a municipal securities issuer] releases information to the public that is reasonably expected to reach investors and the trading markets, those disclosures are subject to the antifraud provisions [of the federal securities laws].”15 Thus, if an issuer chooses to voluntarily provide disclosure about the incurrence of a bank loan, the information that is provided must not be materially inaccurate or misleading in the context in which it is provided.16

The question whether to provide voluntary disclosure about incurrence of a bank loan cannot be decided as a matter of law. Each issuer, after weighing relevant considerations, will have the ultimate responsibility for deciding whether to voluntarily provide such information.17

MSRB NOTICE 2012-18

In MSRB Notice 2012-18, the MSRB encouraged issuers to voluntarily post information about their bank loan financings to the EMMA website in a timely manner and described a recommended procedure for posting this type of information to EMMA.

The MSRB observed that “[t]he increased use by state and local governments of bank loans to meet funding needs has raised concerns among market participants about the level of such disclosure about such loans.” In encouraging voluntary submissions to EMMA, the MSRB stated that:

13 Under certain facts and circumstances, however, an issuer could be obligated to provide disclosure about incurrence of a bank loan. For example, if an issuer incurs a bank loan after the end of a fiscal year, but before it files its annual continuing disclosure for that fiscal year, an issuer should consider whether the failure to disclose information regarding the incurrence of the bank loan would cause its annual continuing disclosure to be materially misleading. See Robert A. Fippinger, The Securities Law of Public Finance (3d Ed. 2012) (“Fippinger”), § 9:4.4 at 9-51.

14 SEC Release Nos. 33-7049, 34-33741 (Mar. 9, 1994) (the “1994 Interpretative Release”).

15 1994 Interpretative Release at nn.85-87 and accompanying text.

16 Disclosure Roles at 232.

17 A white paper prepared under the auspices of the National Association of Bond Lawyers (“NABL”) for use by its members in counseling clients regarding voluntary secondary market disclosure concludes that:

The decision to voluntarily provide . . . disclosure cannot be decided as a matter of law. Accordingly, bond lawyers can provide counsel regarding a decision whether or not to provide additional disclosure, but it is not appropriate to tell obligors on municipal securities that, as a matter of federal securities law, they must provide additional information or, alternatively, that they must not provide additional information. Bond lawyers can, based upon experience and knowledge, help obligors to identify some of the legal and nonlegal issues that they should consider. Such counseling, however, does not relieve the obligor itself of the ultimate responsibility for making the decision to voluntarily provide information.

See “Providing Information to the Secondary Market Regarding Municipal Securities,” approved by the NABL Board of Directors on September 20, 2000. This white paper is restated, with modest revisions, in Disclosure Rolesat 231-38.

S-2 Appendix D Page 7

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 95

Page 100: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

6

The MSRB believes that the availability of timely information about bank loan financings is important for market transparency and promoting a fair and efficient market. Voluntary submission of information concerning bank loan financings through EMMA . . . would provide timely access for bondholders, potential investors and other market participants to key information useful in assessing their current holdings of municipal securities or in making investment decisions regarding potential transactions in municipal securities.

MSRB Notice 2012-18 contemplates that issuers would submit (1) an appropriate document relating to the bank loan financing, such as the loan or financing agreement, or (2) in the alternative, a summary of some or all of the features relating to the bank loan financing, including:

Lender Payment dates

Borrower Maturity and amortization of loan

Purpose of loan/financing Optional, mandatory and extraordinary prepayment provisions

Security for repayment Tax status of interest

3rd party guarantees Events of default/remedies

Source of repayment Current credit rating of borrower (if applicable)

Dated date/closing date Governing law

Par amount CUSIP number, if applicable

Interest rates (or index if variable), including method of computation, if applicable

Redistribution rights, if applicable

In footnote 5, the MSRB pointed out that: “This list is not inclusive, and issuers are free to add or delete factors.”

DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF CONSIDERATIONS IN MAKINGVOLUNTARY SECONDARY MARKET DISCLOSURE ABOUT BANK LOANS

In light of the possible importance to investors and MSRB Notice 2012-18, the Bank Loan Disclosure Task Force recommends that, when incurring a bank loan, issuers consider:

• whether to make voluntary disclosure through EMMA of a bank loan in a timely manner after the loan is incurred, and

S-2 Appendix D Page 8

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 96

Page 101: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

7

• if disclosure will be made, what information regarding the bank loan should be disclosed.

Determining Whether to Make Voluntary Disclosure about a Bank Loan

Bank loans provide issuers with access to capital, supply needed cash flow, reduce some of the structural risks associated with bank-supported VRDOs (e.g., remarketing risk, bank downgrade risk), and can be easier and less costly to obtain for an issuer than a public debt issuance. An issuer is likely to be required to disclose certain facts about the incurrence of a bank loan (to the extent they are material) in its annual continuing disclosure (e.g., in the footnote regarding debt in their financial statements) for the fiscal year when the bank loan was incurred or in the official statement for its next publicly-offered bond issue. As mentioned above, however, issuers typically do not prepare official statements or other offering documents for bank loans. This may leave diligent secondary market participants without current information that is relevant to a timely assessment of a bank loan’s impact on the issuer’s credit position and any additional risks (e.g., liquidity, refinancing) the bank loan may pose.

Depending upon its terms, the incurrence of a bank loan can affect outstanding bondholder security or introduce potential risks that may impact a bondholder’s willingness to continue to hold the issuer’s bonds, affect bond ratings or impact pricing in the secondary market. These factors may have an impact on the valuation of the issuer’s outstanding bonds (which is important to mutual funds because they are required to “mark-to-market” their holdings and declare net asset values of their shares daily). As a result, bondholders and their representatives recently have been encouraging issuers to voluntarily post information about bank loans to EMMA after they are incurred.18

For an issuer who is considering whether to voluntarily disclose information about a bank loan after incurrence, it may be helpful to understand some of the reasons why incurrence of a bank loan may be important to bondholders. For example:

• The incurrence of a bank loan (e.g., a new money financing) can result in an increase in the aggregate outstanding amount of the issuer’s debt, which may cause bondholders to reassess the issuer’s credit position (e.g., if incurrence of the bank loan causes the ratio of net available revenues to projected debt service to fall to levels near or below what is necessary to meet the rate covenant or additional bonds test of outstanding bonds).

• Bank loan covenants and events of default can be different from or set at higher levels than those applicable to outstanding bonds, thereby enabling the bank to assert remedies prior to other bondholders (which may effectively prioritize repayment of the bank loan).

18 Reasoning by analogy, bondholders and their representatives can point to the fact that a public company is required to file a Form 8-K if “the company becomes obligated on a direct financial obligation that is material to the company.”

S-2 Appendix D Page 9

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 97

Page 102: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

8

• Assets or revenues that previously had been available to secure or pay debt service on outstanding bonds may be pledged to the bank as security for a bank loan.

• Instead of having a fully amortizing debt service schedule, a bank loan may be structured with a large, “balloon” payment of principal or purchase price due at the end of the term of the loan (e.g., the maturity date or a mandatory tender date), creating a refinancing risk that could compromise an issuer’s ability to repay outstanding bonds.

While bondholders and their representatives would encourage issuers who are considering whether to voluntarily disclose information about a bank loan to err on the side of disclosure, it is not necessary or practical to expect that issuers will provide voluntary disclosure about every bank loan they incur.19 Because an issuer, in determining whether to voluntarily disclose information about a bank loan, must consider the facts and circumstances relating to that particular bank loan, it is not possible to establish specific guidelines regarding the appropriateness of voluntary disclosure.

It may, however, be helpful to issuers to provide examples of certain facts and circumstances under which accelerated voluntary disclosure about incurrence of a bank loan might be less important to bondholders, such as when:

• The proceeds of the bank loan are used to refinance existing debt without any adverse impact on bondholders (e.g., when an outstanding VRDO issue supported by a bank credit or liquidity facility is converted into or refinanced with a bank loan with the same or substantially similar covenants, events of default, amortization, etc.).20

• A governmental issuer whose only outstanding bonds are general obligation bonds incurs a purchase money bank loan (i.e., a bank loan secured by a lien on the asset financed with the proceeds of the bank loan).

• The principal amount of the bank loan is relatively small when compared to the aggregate outstanding principal amount of the issuer’s bonds (e.g., less than 5%) and the structure of the bank loan does not introduce additional risks (e.g., refinancing risk from a balloon payment).

Because voluntary disclosure is being encouraged primarily to address the timing of disclosure about incurrence of a bank loan, an issuer who is considering whether and what to

19 Reasoning by analogy, issuers and their representatives can point to the fact that a public company is required to file a Form 8-K only if it becomes obligated on a direct financial obligation that is “material.”

20 In this circumstance, in lieu of more detailed voluntary disclosure about the terms of the bank loan, the issuer may wish to consider a voluntary filing stating that the existing debt has been refinanced or replaced with a bank loan, which would confirm for bondholders that the existing debt was not simply retired.

S-2 Appendix D Page 10

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 98

Page 103: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

9

disclose voluntarily may want to consider what information about the bank loan will be disclosed in (a) its next audited financial statements and (b) its next bond offering.21 For example, if the disclosure about the bank loan in its next audited financial statements or official statement will be specific or extensive, then an issuer may conclude it is appropriate to voluntarily disclose that information sooner rather later. On the other hand, if little, or no, specific information about the bank loan will be included in the next audited financial statements or official statement (e.g., other than the principal amount of the bank loan and some information about the interest rate), then an issuer may conclude that voluntary disclosure about the bank loan is less likely to be important to bondholders.

Making Voluntary Disclosure about a Bank Loan: Filing Loan Documents or a Summary

If an issuer concludes that it will make voluntary disclosure about a bank loan, the issuer could file appropriate documents relating to the bank loan, such as the loan or financing agreement, with EMMA. This approach would be consistent with the requirement under MSRB Rule G-34(c) that documents relating to bank letter of credit or liquidity facilities supporting VRDOs be filed with EMMA. Many issuers, particularly governmental issuers, may prefer this approach, which is likely to be less time-consuming than preparing a summary of the relevant documents. Moreover, if an issuer concludes that it will not redact any information from the documents before filing them with EMMA, that issuer may be even more likely to use this approach because it eliminates the risk of a material omission in preparing a summary of the documents.22

Some issuers (e.g., conduit borrowers) may conclude that it is appropriate to redact certain provisions in the documents before filing them with EMMA, because they believe such provisions are confidential or competitive information.23 For example, if the interest rate on a bank loan is determined pursuant to a formula (e.g., 68% of LIBOR plus 0.75% per annum), some issuers, reasoning by analogy to guidance on MSRB Rule G-34(c), which permits the redaction of the bank’s fee for a liquidity facility, may conclude that the fixed spread can and should be redacted. As discussed above, once an issuer chooses to make voluntary disclosure about a bank loan, the disclosure must not be materially inaccurate or misleading in the context

21 Governmental issuers that have different types of outstanding bonds (e.g., general obligation bonds, water-sewer revenue bonds, airport revenue bonds, certificates of participation subject to nonappropriation clauses) may need to consider whether disclosure about a bank loan would be different with respect to each type of its outstanding bonds.

22 To the extent that certain features relating to bank loans described below are not contained in the bank loan documents, e.g., information on interest rate swaps, caps and other interest rate management products that hedge the bank loan, demonstration of compliance with applicable additional debt tests, or ratings, if assigned, issuers may wish to consider providing disclosure about those features in addition to filing appropriate documents.

23 MSRB Notice 2012-18 is silent on the question of redaction; however, the MSRB’s guidance in Notice 2011-17 (February 23, 2011) (Notice on Upcoming Changes to Rule G-34(c) to Require Dealer Submission of ARS and VRDO Documents to the Short System) and Notice 2012-20 (April 11, 2012) (MSRB Reminds Dealers of Limits on Redactions of Short System Documents), provides insights into what the MSRB views as appropriate information to redact in a similar context. Because the provider of the bank loan also may believe it is appropriate to redact certain information, an issuer may wish to review its proposed disclosure with the lender before filing the disclosure with EMMA.

S-2 Appendix D Page 11

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 99

Page 104: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

10

in which it is provided; therefore, an issuer should not redact any information which would cause the disclosure to be materially misleading.

Instead of filing bank loan documents, an issuer could file a summary of some or all of the features relating to the bank loan with EMMA.24 In preparing a summary, an issuer may wish to consider including all or some of the following features relating to the bank loan in a summary:

• Date of incurrence • Original principal amount • Maturity and amortization • Interest rate, if fixed, or method of computation, if variable (and any default rates) • Information on interest rate swaps, caps and other interest rate management

products that hedge the bank loan • Purpose/use of proceeds • Collateral/security pledge (e.g. general obligation specified revenues, real

property, personal property, etc.), and whether the pledge is on parity with or subordinate to bonds

• Covenants that are more restrictive or have higher threshold levels than or are in addition to those provided to bondholders

• Events of default, if different from bonds • Remedies upon an event of default, if different than bonds • Term out provisions if the bank loan allows the bank to seek repayment earlier

than the stated maturity date (e.g., demand or put date) • Terms under which the bank loan can be sold or transferred by the bank to other

investors• Disclosure of “most-favored nation”25 or similar clause • Demonstration of compliance with applicable additional debt tests • Ratings, if assigned

Like the list contained in MSRB Notice 2012-18, the foregoing list is nonexclusive, and an issuer is free to add or delete features (e.g., other features listed in MSRB Notice 2012-18). In

24 These Considerations assume an issuer will file the bank loan documents or a summary of some or all of the features relating to the bank loan; however, as footnote 22 explains, an issuer might choose to file the bank loan documents and file a summary of certain other features relating to the bank loan.

25 In a bank loan agreement, a “most-favored nation” clause would entitle the lender to any additional or more restrictive covenants, additional or different events of default and/or greater rights or remedies that the issuer gives to any other lender or bondholder. The strongest versions of such clauses provide that the covenants, events of default and/or rights and remedies are automatically deemed to be incorporated into the bank loan agreement, without the need for a formal amendment.

S-2 Appendix D Page 12

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 100

Page 105: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

11

determining whether to add features to a summary, issuers may wish to consider adding any feature that has an impact on the security of holders of outstanding bonds.

In preparing a summary of features relating to a bank loan, and determining whether to include any of the factors listed above, an issuer is faced with the same issue presented by redaction: the information that is provided must be accurate and not misleading in the context in which it is provided. In determining whether or not to include any particular feature of a bank loan in a summary, the issuer should consider whether the failure to include such information will result in the summary being materially misleading in the context in which it is provided.

Timing of Voluntary Disclosure/Identifying Affected CUSIPs

If an issuer concludes that it will voluntarily disclose information about a bank loan through EMMA, the issuer should make such disclosure in a timely manner. For example, such disclosure could be made in the same time frame as mandatory disclosure of material events under Rule 15c2-12 (i.e., within 10 business days).

Voluntary disclosures that are made by issuers are most useful when they are associated with the CUSIP numbers that are affected by the information disclosed. Therefore, issuers should consider adhering to the practice of identifying affected CUSIPs of their outstanding bonds as is currently followed for required continuing disclosure.

Terms of Usage/Disclaimers

In determining whether to make voluntary disclosure about a bank loan, issuers and their counsel may consider whether such voluntary disclosure:

• Creates a duty to disclose all material developments since any previously disseminated public disclosure, e.g., the issuer’s most recent annual continuing disclosure;26

• Creates a duty to disclose information about the incurrence of other bank loans;27

or

26 In his treatise, Robert Fippinger concludes that: “Generally, the issuer is not required to disclose all material information at the time of making annual [continuing] disclosure and may limit statements to specific responses to the contractual undertakings, but the statements may not be misleading.” Fippinger § 9:4.4 at 9-47. An issuer could presumably reach the same general conclusion with respect to voluntary disclosure about a bank loan, which is analogous to a more limited material event notice under Rule 15c2-12; however, if voluntary disclosure about a bank loan is accurate, but misleading in light of the circumstances in which it is made, the disclosure must be amplified in order not to be misleading. See Fippinger § 9:4.4 at 9-47. For example, if an issuer obtains a bank loan to address a liquidity problem, e.g., to pay operating expenses such as payroll, additional disclosure regarding the issuer’s financial condition may be necessary.

27 This concern might arise from cases such as Minneapolis Firefighters’ Relief Assoc. v. MEMC Elec. Materials,Inc., 641 F.3d 1023 (8th Cir. 2011), in which the plaintiff alleged that the defendants had a duty to disclose certain information because they had a “pattern” of disclosing similar information. In that case, the Eighth Circuit rejected the plaintiff’s argument.

S-2 Appendix D Page 13

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 101

Page 106: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

12

• Creates a duty to disclose information about amendments or modifications to such bank loan.28

To address these issues, an issuer should consider use of terms of usage or disclaimers in connection with disclosure of information about a bank loan.29 Such terms of usage or disclaimers should clearly provide:

• That the information is being made available on a voluntary basis,

• The date as of which the information speaks,

• That the issuer, by such filing, is not undertaking to update the information in the future or to report regularly on financial or other developments,

• That no representation is being made that there has not been a change in the affairs of the issuer since the date as of which the information speaks,

• Any limitations on the information gathering and reporting process,

• Limits on responsibility for third-party information, and

• Language negating any claims of implied state law contractual guaranties of the accuracy or completeness of the information.

Further, if forward-looking statements are contained in the information about a bank loan (for example, debt service schedules based on assumptions about obligations bearing a variable rate of interest), the terms of usage or disclaimers could include appropriate cautionary language about the forward-looking statements. Finally, if summaries of bank loan documents are provided and the bank loan documents are being filed (or will otherwise be made available), the issuer could make clear in the terms of usage or disclaimers that the summaries do not purport to be complete and that reference is made to the documents for full and complete statements of their provisions.

A sample of terms of usage/disclaimers is attached as Appendix C.

28 This concern might arise from cases regarding the so-called “duty to update,” where subsequent disclosure is necessary “if a prior disclosure ‘becomes materially misleading in light of subsequent events.’” Backman v. Polaroid Corporation, 910 F.2d 10, 17 (1st Cir. 1990) (en banc).

29 Terms of usage or disclaimers may limit a disclaiming party’s liability under the federal securities laws. For example, terms of usage or disclaimers may be used to appropriately limit a disclaiming party’s liability with respect to information provided by third parties, provided that the disclaimer is specific and appropriately tailored as to the information disclaimed, and the disclaiming party does not know, and is not reckless in not knowing, that the statements disclaimed are materially false or misleading. Similarly, the federal courts of appeals have been developing the “bespeaks-caution” doctrine that economic projections, estimates of future performance and similar forward-looking statements in a disclosure document are not actionable when meaningful cautionary language elsewhere in the document adequately discloses the risks involved.

S-2 Appendix D Page 14

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 102

Page 107: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

A-1

APPENDIX A

Bank Loan Disclosure Task Force

Participating Organizations

American Bankers Association (ABA) Bond Dealers of America (BDA) Government Finance Officers Association (GFOA) Investment Company Institute (ICI) National Association of Bond Lawyers (NABL) National Association of Health and Educational Facilities Finance Authorities (NAHEFFA) National Association of Independent Public Finance Advisors (NAIPFA) National Federation of Municipal Analysts (NFMA) Securities Industry and Financial Markets Association (SIMFA)

S-2 Appendix D Page 15

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 103

Page 108: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

APPENDIX B

Brief History of Bank Purchases and Bank Loans in the Municipal Market

Bank Purchases of Municipal Bonds Prior to the Tax Reform Act of 1986

Historically, banks were major purchasers of municipal bonds through public offerings. In 1958 the Treasury Department estimated that of the $56.7 billion of outstanding municipal bonds, 27.9% were owned by banks.30 Through much of the early 1970s, commercial banks held more than 15% of their assets in municipal securities.31 By the early 1980s, banks were the biggest buyers of municipal bonds. For example, in 1980, the banking sector was the largest investor in the market, holding 39% of outstanding issues.32

Section 265(b) of the Code; Bank-Qualified Obligations

The Tax Reform Act of 1986 (the “1986 Tax Act”) changed the tax consequences to banks of holding municipal bonds by adding Section 265(b) to the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (the “Code”). Section 265(b) had the effect of eliminating the tax benefit for banks of owning most municipal bonds by preventing banks from deducting the carrying cost of such bonds.

Section 265(b)(3) of the Code, however, provides an exception from the general rule of Section 265(b) for “qualified tax-exempt obligations,” which are usually referred to as “bank-qualified” or “BQ” obligations. Only governmental bonds and qualified 501(c)(3) bonds can be bank-qualified obligations. Bonds issued for the benefit of for-profit conduit borrowers (e.g., exempt facility bonds and qualified small issue bonds) cannot be bank-qualified.

“Traditional bank-qualified” or “traditional BQ” obligations are tax-exempt obligations that qualify for the original exception in Section 265(b)(3) of the Code. That exception was in effect from the adoption of the 1986 Tax Act until the adoption of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (“ARRA”) and became effective again on January 1, 2011 after the ARRA amendments to that exception expired. Traditional BQ obligations must be issued by a “qualified small issuer,” i.e., an issuer which reasonably anticipates to issue, together with subordinate entities, not more than $10 million of tax-exempt obligations during the calendar year; therefore, an issue of traditional BQ obligations cannot under any circumstances exceed $10 million in principal amount. Additionally, because obligations issued by a governmental issuer for itself and any 501(c)(3) conduit borrowers count against such issuer’s $10 million annual limit, it has been difficult for most 501(c)(3) organizations to find a qualified small issuer and obtain traditional BQ financing.

30 Investment Bankers Association of America, Fundamentals of Municipal Bonds (1959), at 20-21. 31The Bond Buyer, “Banks Return to Munis” (September 27, 2010). By way of comparison, as of September 2010, commercial banks held only about 2.2% of their assets in municipal securities. Id. 32 Matthew R. Marlin, “Did Tax Reform Kill Segmentation in the Municipal Bond Market,” 54 Public Administration Review 387 (Jul. – Aug. 1994).

S-2 Appendix D Page 16

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 104

Page 109: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

B-2

Bank-Qualified Issuance from 1986 through 2008

After the 1986 Tax Act, bank direct purchases of municipal bonds generally were limited to traditional bank-qualified obligations. The banking sector became a net seller of municipal bonds beginning in the middle of 1986, and by mid-1992, banks held only 9% of all municipal bonds.33

Traditional bank-qualified obligations are typically issued by smaller, less frequent governmental issuers for their own benefit (i.e., not as a conduit for a 501(c)(3) organization).

From 1986 through 2008, traditional bank-qualified obligations typically would be fixed rate obligations structured to fully amortize during their stated term (5-10 years for equipment and 15-20 years for construction).

During this period, traditional bank-qualified obligations constituted a relatively small percentage of the new issuances of municipal bonds and attracted little attention in the marketplace. For example, from 2000 through 2008, traditional bank-qualified issuance was fairly consistent from year to year, ranging from approximately $13-17 billion per year.34

ARRA Expansion of Bank-Qualification in 2009 and 2010

To encourage banks to extend credit in the municipal market during 2009 and 2010, ARRA amended Section 265(b) to expand the scope of bank-qualification in two ways:

• $30 million bank-qualified obligations: During 2009 and 2010, the $10 million limit for qualified small issuers was increased to $30 million, and 501(c)(3) organizations were treated as qualified small issuers entitled to their own $30 million limit, and

• 2% de minimis bank-qualified obligations: Financial institutions are permitted to exclude new money tax-exempt bonds (regardless of otherwise non-BQ status) issued in 2009 and 2010 (and bonds issued to refund such new money bonds) up to an amount equal to 2% of the adjusted basis of the bank’s assets in determining the bank’s deduction for interest expenses.35

33 Id. During this same period, tax-exempt mutual funds and tax-exempt money market funds increased their holdings from near zero to over 20% of all outstanding issues. Id. The purchases of VRDOs by tax-exempt money market funds, however, provided banks with an opportunity to continue to play an important role in the municipal market by providing liquidity facilities or letters of credit to support such obligations. And, coming full circle, since 2009 many VRDOs have been converted into bank loans. 34 Janney Capital Markets, “Municipal Bond Market Note” (September 14, 2011).

35 Although some 2% de minimis bank-qualified obligations were structured as direct purchases/loans, banks also could obtain the benefit of these obligations by purchasing them in primary public offerings or the secondary market.

S-2 Appendix D Page 17

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 105

Page 110: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

B-3

The changes made by ARRA had the desired effect: issuance of bank-qualified obligations doubled in 2009 and 2010. About 9% of municipal bonds sold in 2010, and 8% in 2009, were bank-qualified, compared with 4% in 2007 and 2008.36

The ARRA provisions enabled 501(c)(3) organizations, particularly health care organizations and educational institutions, to obtain substantial access to the bank-qualified market during 2009 and 2010. For many of these organizations, this was the first time they had access to this type of private, tax-exempt financing. This was also happening at a time when the ratings of many banks were downgraded, making the VRDO structure less attractive to issuers.Bank loans for 501(c)(3) organizations and larger governmental issuers immediately became an alternative to VRDOs supported by bank liquidity facilities or letters of credit. In fact, many of the bank loans in 2009 and 2010 were conversions by banks of existing liquidity facilities and letters of credit into funded loans.

The ARRA provisions also made bank loans to larger, more frequent governmental issuers possible.

Bank loans for 501(c)(3) organizations and larger governmental issuers under the ARRA provisions differed from most traditional bank-qualified deals for governmental units in two important ways:

(1) they were usually variable rate, often a percentage of one-month LIBOR plus a fixed credit spread, and

(2) the commitment of the bank to purchase the bonds or make the loan was often for a term (e.g., 3 years, 5 years, etc.) that was substantially shorter than the final maturity of the obligation.

Bank loans for 501(c)(3) organizations and larger governmental issuers under the ARRA provisions typically have been structured with terms and conditions (e.g., representations and warranties, covenants, events of default and remedies) that are identical or substantially similar to bank facilities for VRDOs.

Bank Loans after Expiration of ARRA

The ARRA amendments to Section 265(b) expired on December 31, 2010. As a result, during 2011 the issuance of bank-qualified obligations fell back to a level consistent with issuance from 2000 to 2008.37 Traditional bank-qualified obligations continued to be issued primarily by governmental issuers for their own benefit, at fixed rates and held to maturity by the purchasing banks.

36 The Bond Buyer, “Banks Return to Munis” (September 27, 2010). By September 2010, issuers had sold $57 billion of bank-qualified debt since the beginning of 2009, more than the four previous years combined.

37 Janney Capital Markets, “Municipal Bond Market Note” (September 14, 2011).

S-2 Appendix D Page 18

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 106

Page 111: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-2AP

PEND

IX S

-2 A

APPE

NDIX

S-2

BAP

PEND

IX S

-2 C

APPE

NDIX

S-2

D

B-4

Contrary to the expectations of many participants in the municipal market, however, some banks (including some of the country’s largest banks or their non-bank affiliates) have continued to make bank loans to 501(c)(3) organizations and larger governmental issuers on a non-BQ basis since January 1, 2011. These non-BQ bank loans are generally being done on the same terms (variable rate, generally a percentage of LIBOR plus a fixed spread, with a limited holding period) as the BQ transactions done in 2009 and 2010.

S-2 Appendix D Page 19

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 107

Page 112: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-2

APPENDIX S-2 A

APPENDIX S-2 B

APPENDIX S-2 C

APPENDIX S-2 D

C-1

APPENDIX C

Sample Terms of Usage/Disclaimers for Voluntary Disclosure Regarding Bank Loans

On ____, ___, [Full Name of Issuer] (the “Issuer”) entered into a [loan agreement] with [identify lender] (the “Transaction”). [A copy of the [loan agreement] is attached hereto. Portions of the [loan agreement] have been redacted] [A summary of the [loan agreement] is attached hereto; the summary does not purport to be complete] [and reference is made to the [loan agreement] for full and complete statements of its provisions].

The Issuer is filing this information as a voluntary filing on the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board’s Electronic Municipal Market Access (“EMMA”) system. The Issuer is not required pursuant to any continuing disclosure undertaking to file this information and makes no commitment to update this information.

This information is only accurate as of its date. The Issuer makes no commitment to provide any notice (advance or otherwise) of any amendment, modification, redemption, cancellation, or other event or circumstance with respect to the Transaction.

The provision of this information to EMMA is not intended as an offer to sell any security and the Issuer does not intend that the Transaction involve the offering to the public of any security of the Issuer. No representation is made as to whether this information is material or important with respect to any particular outstanding debt issue of the Issuer or whether other events have occurred with respect the Issuer or its outstanding debt that might be material or important to owners of the Issuer’s outstanding debt.

[Note to drafter: If forward-looking statements are contained in the information about a bank loan (for example, debt service schedules based on assumptions about obligations bearing a variable rate of interest), consider including appropriate cautionary language about the forward-looking statements.]

S-2 Appendix D Page 20

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 108

Page 113: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 109

Page 114: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-3

S-3: SECURITIES REGULATORY UPDATE

Chair:

Joseph (Jodie) E. Smith Maynard, Cooper & Gale, P.C. - Birmingham, AL

Panelists:

Rebecca J. Olsen U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission - Washington, DCRobert A. Fippinger Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board - Washington, DCLeslie M. Norwood Securities Industry and Financial Markets Assoc.- New York, NYMark R. Zehner U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission - Philadelphia, PA

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 110

Page 115: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-3

Regulatory Update

1. Regulatory Developments Relating to Municipal Securities Market Structure

a. Unique Attributes of the Municipal Securities Market

i. Number and variety of municipal securities market issuances makes it more difficult for investors to locate willing counterparties for the customized bonds they hold or wish to acquire.

ii. Trades in the market occur in a decentralized, over-the-counter dealer market, rather than on exchanges.

iii. Do these above factors make it difficult for investors to trade municipal bonds? If so, do these factors create a market that is more illiquid, opaque, and costly for investors? If so, must issuers compensate investors through higher interest rates for the risks associated with holding illiquid investments?

iv. Do these above factors compromise municipal securities issuers’ ability to comply with the arbitrage and other tax rules for tax-exempt bonds?

b. Market Structure Regulatory Initiatives

i. Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board (MSRB) and Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) companion rule re-proposals on mark-ups

1. Rule requires dealers to disclose the mark-up or mark-down on retail customer confirmations for specified principal transactions in corporate, agency, and municipal securities.

2. Regulators appear to want to enhance bond market price transparency in a way that provides retail investors with useful, clear, and consistent insight into their transactions.

3. Rule is at proposal stage.

ii. MSRB and FINRA companion rule proposal on new academic data product for Electronic Municipal Market Access (EMMA) system and Trade Reporting and Compliance Engine (TRACE) system

1. Rule would create a new academic data product which would be made available solely to institutions of higher education and would include masked dealer identities.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 111

Page 116: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-3

2. Rule would allow academic researchers to anonymously track activity of individual dealers or groups of dealers and observe their behaviors in studying the impact of various events on measures such as intermediation costs, dealer participation, and liquidity.

3. Rule is at proposal stage.

iii. Post Trade/TRACE flag for trades that do not reflect a commission, markup/down, or other fee

1. FINRA rule would require member firms to identify, and enable FINRA to disseminate a flag identifying, transactions for which a commission or mark-up/down is not reflected in the TRACE trade report.

2. Regulators appear to want to be better able to distinguish between trades from a managed or wrap account where the broker dealer compensation is not reflected in individual transactions and trades through a standard brokerage account where each trade includes some form of compensation. This will allow for more accurate surveillance by regulators and more accurate best execution analysis by dealers.

3. Rule is at proposal stage.

iv. Pre-trade transparency-regulatory collection of bid and offer prices on alternative trading systems (ATSs)

1. FINRA has proposed a rule to require ATSs to submit pre-trade quotation information to FINRA for regulatory purposes only - and not for public dissemination. Only corporate and agency debt are in scope at present and RFQ prices are excluded. It is believed that the MSRB is considering a similar proposal.

2. This additional market data will enhance market surveillance by regulators.

3. Rule is at proposal stage.

v. Best execution rule

1. MSRB Rule G-18, approved by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) in December 2014, requires dealers to seek the most favorable terms reasonably available for their retail customers’ transactions.

2. The MSRB issued guidance that is intended to assist municipal securities dealers in complying with the MSRB’s new rule on “best

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 112

Page 117: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-3

execution” for municipal securities transactions, going into effect on March 21, 2016. The MSRB’s guidance addresses how best-execution concepts, including the standard of “reasonable diligence,” applies to municipal securities transactions. The guidance also addresses the exemption from the new obligation for transactions with sophisticated municipal market professionals (SMMPs).

3. FINRA issued guidance to remind firms of their best execution obligations to regularly and rigorously examine execution quality likely to be obtained from the different markets trading a security.

4. Rule is effective.

vi. FINRA proposal to exempt certain transactions by a member ATS from reporting obligations

1. FINRA has proposed a rule to exempt from trade reporting obligation for certain transaction on an ATS.

2. The proposed rule change would provide FINRA with the authority to exempt ATSs from TRACE trade reporting obligation under certain circumstances. Specifically, if the conditions for the exemption are met, an ATS may delegate reporting obligation to its subscribers. Additionally, trades on the ATS must be between subscribers that are both FINRA members to be eligible for the exemption.

3. Rule is at proposal stage.

vii. SEC request for comment on regulation and disclosures for ATSs

1. On November 18, 2015, the SEC issued a request for comment branded as and largely focusing on regulatory requirements in Regulation ATS under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 applicable to alternative trading systems that transact in National Market System (NMS) equity securities. Embedded in the request for comment are questions related to fixed-income ATS transparency, disclosures, and whether there should be a tailored fixed income Form ATS.

2. Regulators appear to want to provide greater operational transparency and disclosure for ATSs.

3. Rule is at proposal stage.

c. Related Market Structure Developments

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 113

Page 118: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-3

i. Will recent SEC proposals designed to bolster liquidity risk management among open-end mutual funds reduce the funds’ appetite for municipal securities and deter infrastructure projects?

ii. Will bank regulators’ exclusion of municipal securities from the definition of high-quality liquid assets (HQLAs) in connection with banks’ compliance with liquidity coverage ratio (LCR) requirements decrease liquidity and increase volatility in the municipal securities market and, hence, raise borrowing costs for issuers? Any chance there will be Congressional action on this issue (for example, H.R. 2209 authored by Rep. Luke Messer (R-IN) and Rep. Carolyn B. Maloney (D-NY))?

d. SEC Market Structure Enforcement Actions

i. Can we expect more enforcement actions charging violations of MSRB Rule G-15(f)’s prohibition on broker-dealers’ execution of trades in sizes below the minimum denomination set by issuers in light of the recent Puerto Rico junk bonds action?

ii. Can we expect more enforcement actions against underwriters for price-related fraud in the primary market for municipal securities in light of the Edward D. Jones & Co. action?

iii. Are there other market structure areas of concern for the SEC?

2. Regulatory Developments Relating to Municipal Securities Market Participants

a. Issuers

i. Can we expect more “control person” enforcement actions in connection with municipal bond offerings in light of the recent City of Allen Park action?

ii. Can we expect more injunctions against issuers to halt municipal bond offerings in light of the recent City of Harvey action?

b. Broker-Dealers and Municipal Advisors

i. Can we expect future enforcement/regulatory initiatives related to arrangement of bank loans by municipal advisors? Will any such initiatives necessitate clear SEC guidance on the distinctions between loans and securities?

ii. Can we expect future enforcement actions growing out of recent examinations by the SEC Office of Compliance Inspections and Examinations (OCIE) into municipal advisor registration, fiduciary duty, disclosure, fair dealing, supervision, books/records, and

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 114

Page 119: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-3

training/qualifications issues? Can we expect an SEC risk alert or similar guidance instead?

iii. Can we expect future enforcement actions against inappropriate engagement in municipal advisory services? If so, against whom? Broker-dealers? Attorneys? Others?

3. Regulatory Developments Relating to Municipal Securities Market Disclosure

a. EMMA System

i. Recent enhancements to EMMA (for example, addition of Moody’s ratings)

ii. Potential improvements to EMMA (for example, implementation of a decision tree that enables issuers (especially small and infrequent issuers) to input information onto EMMA in a manner that allows them to be sure they are putting data in the correct boxes)

b. Municipalities Continuing Disclosure Cooperation (MCDC) Initiative

i. Background on MCDC

ii. Implementation of first two rounds of underwriter settlement orders

iii. Future MCDC underwriter settlements—when and how many?

iv. Future MCDC issuer settlements—when and how many?

v. Future SEC enforcement initiatives against non-self-reporting or non-settling underwriters and issuers?

vi. Future SEC enforcement initiatives against officials and professionals named in MCDC questionnaires?

vii. Is Rule 15c2-12 broken? If so, how can it be fixed? Market initiatives (for example, education efforts with small and infrequent issuers)? Regulation (for example, expansion of Rule 15c2-12’s issue and issuer exemptions to aid small and infrequent issuers)? Legislation?

c. Disclosure Policies and Procedures

i. Why the recent focus on disclosure policies and procedures by the SEC’s Enforcement Division?

ii. Can the SEC affirmatively provide guidance (perhaps in an update to the 1994 Interpretive Release) that issuers that adopt and follow an appropriate policy for primary and secondary market disclosure, absent a showing of actual knowledge or reckless disregard of a material

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 115

Page 120: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-3

misstatement or omission, have met the standard of care under the antifraud provisions of the federal securities laws?

iii. Any core components of disclosure policies and procedures?

iv. Does NABL’s Crafting Disclosure Policies (2015) hit the mark? Miss the mark?

d. Future of Municipal Disclosure Regulation

i. Can the MSRB and SEC improve disclosure through regulation of municipal advisors?

ii. Can we expect the SEC to seek additional legislative powers to regulate municipal disclosure? If so, under what circumstances?

iii. Can we expect the SEC to promulgate additional municipal disclosure regulations?

1. Primary offering disclosure? Continuing disclosure? Both?

2. What areas would be targeted?

3. What principles would guide promulgation of regulations?

4. Has the SEC reached the end of its regulatory rope on municipal disclosure?

5. Is additional interpretive guidance from the SEC not preferable to additional regulations? What form should the interpretive guidance take? An update to the 1994 Interpretive Release? No-action letters? A publication similar to the telephone interpretations manual published by the SEC’s Division of Corporation Finance?

iv. Can market participants address disclosure deficiencies through voluntary initiatives?

1. The SEC outlined in its 2012 Report on the Municipal Securities Market the following areas where it would like municipal securities market participants to develop voluntary disclosure guidelines and best practices: (1) disclosure policies and procedures for primary offering and ongoing disclosures, including issuer disclosure committees and training programs; (2) timeliness of financial information in primary offerings and on an annual basis; (3) availability of quarterly or other interim financial information; (4) use of issuer websites; (5) presentation of and access to information in municipal securities offerings and on an

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 116

Page 121: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-3

ongoing basis; (6) use of derivatives in connection with municipal securities; and (7) education efforts for investors, issuer officials, and financial intermediaries. Where does the SEC still see problems?

2. The SEC indicated in the 2012 Report that it would consider hosting an annual conference among municipal securities market participants in an effort to foster cooperation through open and continuous dialogue. Does the SEC plan to follow through with this idea? How would the SEC foster cooperation at the annual conference? Would the SEC be able provide written comments and guidance on ongoing market initiatives at the annual conference?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 117

Page 122: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-4

S-4: WHAT TO DO IF THE SEC CALLS

Chair:

Mitchell E. Herr Holland & Knight – Miami, FL

Panelists:

LeeAnn Gaunt U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission – Boston, MA Peter K.M. Chan Morgan Lewis – Chicago, IL Kenneth R. Artin Bryant Miller & Olive – Orlando, FL

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 118

Page 123: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-4

SEC Enforcement Investigations

The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC or Commission) is the law enforcement agency specifically charged by Congress with civil enforcement of the federal securities laws. The SEC has authority to investigate all violations of the securities laws by any person or entity it believes may have committed a violation.

Overview of SEC Investigations

The SEC will initiate an enforcement investigation when it has reason to suspect that the federal securities laws have been violated.

An SEC investigation typically involves scrutiny of all persons involved in the conduct in question. For instance, in an investigation concerning a municipal issuance, the SEC will typically investigate the issuer, its officers and key employees, the underwriters, the financial advisor, and bond counsel.

The SEC’s Division of Enforcement

SEC investigations are conducted by its Division of Enforcement. The Enforcement Division has over 1,200 professional personnel (attorneys, accountants, and other staff) in its Washington, D.C. headquarters and eleven regional offices across the country.

In early 2010, former SEC Enforcement Director Robert Khuzami created five specialized units to focus the SEC’s enforcement efforts in particular areas of the securities laws, including municipal securities and public pensions.

Informal versus Formal Investigations

The SEC may gather facts and make a charging decision either through an informal or formal investigation. Both are serious. Indeed, informal investigations that never reach the formal stage still often result in SEC enforcement charges.

At the informal stage, requests for documents or witness testimony are voluntary. When the staff wants authority to subpoena documents or compel witness testimony, it obtains a Formal Order of Investigation. The Commission has delegated authority to issue Formal Orders of Investigation to the Director of the Division of Enforcement; this authority was sub-delegated to senior officers. Under this delegated authority, the enforcement staff can obtain a Formal Order of Investigation within as little as one day. The Director of Enforcement also has delegated authority to file an action in federal district court to enforce the SEC’s subpoenas.

Under the Commission’s Rules Relating to Investigations, a person who is compelled to produce documents or testify has the right to be shown the Formal Order of Investigation; however, furnishing a copy of the formal order rests in the discretion of senior enforcement personnel.

SEC Investigations are Not Public

Regardless of whether they are informal or formal, all SEC investigations are “non-public,”

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 119

Page 124: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-4

meaning that neither the Commission nor the staff should acknowledge or comment on the investigation unless and until charges are brought.

However, parties under investigation may, and are sometimes obligated to, disclose the pendency of the investigation. Bond disclosure counsel may advise disclosing the investigation in the official statement or elsewhere.

Cooperation in Investigations

The SEC has stressed repeatedly the need for cooperation with its investigations. In its October 23, 2001, “Report of Investigation Pursuant to Section 21(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and Commission Statement on the Relationship of Cooperation to Agency Enforcement Decisions” (the “Seaboard Report”), the SEC stressed that it would look to the following four factors to assess an issuer’s cooperation:

self-policing;

self-reporting;

remediation; and

cooperation with its investigations.

In order to give proper consideration to an investigatory subject’s cooperation or lack thereof, senior enforcement staff have publicly stated that the division keeps a running “scorecard” of cooperation during an investigation.

In an April 29, 2004 speech, the SEC’s Director of Enforcement explained how cooperation can lead to more favorable outcomes for companies:

The . . . core factor, which will often prove decisive in our analysis [regarding what, if any, penalty to seek], is the extent of a violator’s cooperation, as measured by the standards set forth in the [Seaboard] Report. . . . [T]he provision of extraordinary cooperation . . . including self-reporting a violation, being forthcoming during the investigation, and implementing appropriate remedial measures (including, in the case of an entity, appropriate disciplinary action against culpable individuals), can contribute significantly to a conclusion by the staff that a penalty recommendation should be more moderate in size or reduced to zero.

Similarly, in a January 4, 2006, statement concerning financial penalties, the SEC reiterated that “[t]he degree to which a corporation has . . . cooperated with the investigation and remediation of the offense, is a factor that the Commission will consider in determining the propriety of a corporate penalty.”

The Potential Benefits of Cooperation with the SEC

In many instances, cooperation with an SEC investigation has mitigated what otherwise would have been a harsher outcome. However, the SEC has made clear that only the most

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 120

Page 125: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-4

complete cooperation will warrant a pass from any enforcement action. Of course, when the SEC believes that an actor has been affirmatively uncooperative, it will mete out even harsher penalties than might otherwise be warranted by the underlying conduct.

The Potential Benefits to an Individual of Cooperation with the SEC

Although the SEC articulated standards for corporate cooperation in its October 2001 Seaboard Report, the SEC had not systematically addressed the question of individual cooperation. This led many practitioners to question whether the SEC would give cooperating individuals appropriate credit. In January 2010, the Commission issued a formal policy statement on individual cooperation that set forth the analytical framework the Commission will use to balance the tension between the objectives of holding individuals fully accountable for their misconduct and providing incentives for individuals to cooperate with law enforcement.

The framework sets forth four considerations that the SEC will examine:

the assistance provided, including the quality of the information provided and the amount of time and resources saved;

the nature of the individual’s cooperation, including whether it was voluntary and whether the information was requested or might not have been otherwise discovered;

the importance of the underlying matter, including the character and importance of the investigation and the dangers to investors from the violations; and

the societal interest in holding the individual accountable, including the severity of the individual’s misconduct and the culpability of the individual.

This framework signals the Commission’s clear intent to appropriately reward individuals who cooperate with its enforcement investigations. The Enforcement Division is implementing the Commission’s cooperation policy through a cooperation initiative that former Director Khuzami has stated “has the potential to be a game-changer for the Enforcement Division.”

Related Investigations and Coordination with Other Agencies

The SEC can share investigative information and coordinate its efforts with any number of foreign, federal, state, and local criminal, civil, or regulatory agencies. In the municipal arena, it has been common for the SEC to share information bearing on the tax-exempt status of a bond with the IRS. The SEC also frequently coordinates its investigations with other law enforcement authorities, both civil and criminal. In recent years, there has been approximately a 400% increase in the number of SEC investigations (in general, i.e., not limited to the municipal arena) that are coordinated with criminal authorities.

A striking example of such coordination in the municipal arena are the highly coordinated investigations into bid rigging for Guaranteed Investment Contracts (GIC). In 2007, the SEC, DOJ, FBI, IRS, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, and a coalition of state Attorneys General launched a sweeping, coordinated investigation into anticompetitive GIC bidding practices. To date, the investigative

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 121

Page 126: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-4

team has collected $743 million from several settlements, including with UBS Financial Services, Inc.; J.P. Morgan Securities, LLC; Banc of America Securities, LLC; Wachovia Bank, N.A.; and GE Funding Capital Market Services. Eighteen individuals have also been indicted, twelve of whom have pled guilty to criminal charges.

The SEC continues to increase its coordination with criminal authorities, having former federal criminal prosecutors as the Commission’s chair and in key positions in the Enforcement Division, including the Director of Enforcement. With the Enforcement Division now staffed at key levels by former federal criminal prosecutors, there continues to be increased coordination with criminal authorities and other regulators in approximately 75% of the SEC’s highest-priority cases.

Parallel Civil and Criminal Investigations

The prospect of coordination between the SEC and other prosecutorial or regulatory authorities substantially increases the complexity of and risks attendant to an SEC investigation. The risks are often difficult to assess because, as a policy matter, the SEC will not confirm or deny whether parallel investigations are being conducted, but will direct counsel to inquire with whatever other prosecutorial authority she may be concerned about. Additionally, in many cases the SEC will conclude its investigation and resulting enforcement action before the first sign of any criminal interest in the matter becomes visible.

As a practical matter, if the circumstances might be attractive to a criminal prosecutor (for example, if there is intentionally fraudulent conduct and significant investor losses), the safest course is to assume that there is or will be a parallel criminal investigation. In these circumstances, SEC defense counsel will often bring white-collar criminal defense counsel into the matter to help navigate the many difficult issues raised by parallel civil and criminal investigations.

The Process of an SEC Investigation

Typically, SEC investigations follow a predictable course:

document requests;

witness testimony;

Wells Notice and Wells Submission; and

settlement negotiations.

Document requests. Most SEC investigations begin with a request for documents. In an investigation of any consequence, the SEC likely will make several sets of document requests.

Witness testimony. If the SEC, after reviewing the document productions, continues to have an investigatory interest, it will request sworn witness testimony.

Wells Notice and Wells Submission. After witness testimony has been completed, the SEC’s investigative staff will review the evidentiary record to determine whether to recommend that the

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 122

Page 127: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-4

Commission institute charges. If the staff tentatively decides to make an enforcement recommendation to the Commission, in non-emergency cases it issues a so-called Wells Notice to the proposed defendant (typically by telephone and follow-up letter). The proposed defendant is given an opportunity (normally about three weeks) to respond with a Wells Submission—a detailed legal memorandum or videotape explaining its position.

Settlement negotiations. If defense counsel does not succeed in convincing SEC staff that no enforcement action is warranted, counsel will routinely engage the staff in settlement discussions to determine whether the matter can be resolved on mutually agreeable terms.

The SEC’s Enforcement Manual

On June 4, 2015, the SEC’s Division of Enforcement publicly released a revised version of its Enforcement Manual. The Enforcement Manual provides valuable insight into the SEC’s investigatory process and is required reading for any attorney dealing with an SEC enforcement investigation. Among other things, the Enforcement Manual explains how the Enforcement Division:

ranks investigations and allocates scarce enforcement resources;

reviews the status of pending investigations;

handles referrals from the public, the PCAOB, state regulators, Congress, and the SROs;

opens and closes investigations; and

obtains formal orders of investigations.

The Enforcement Manual also explains:

the Wells Process;

how the Commission considers enforcement recommendations; and

various investigative practices, including:

o communications with senior SEC staff;

o tolling agreements;

o handling of parallel investigations;

o document requests and subpoenas;

o the requirement that settling parties confirm the completeness of document production;

o procedures for taking testimony;

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 123

Page 128: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-4

o witness assurance letters, immunity orders, and proffer agreements;

o attorney-client, work-product, and Fifth Amendment assertions;

o inadvertent production or productions without privilege review;

o requests for waiver of the attorney-client privilege;

o confidentiality agreements; and

o informal referrals to federal or state criminal agencies or others including state bars.

Finally, the Enforcement Manual contains a detailed explanation of how the Enforcement Division employs its analytic framework for individual cooperation and its cooperation tools.

SEC Document Requests

After learning of a potential SEC investigation, the subject’s foremost obligation is to preserve, without alteration, all potentially relevant documents, in both hard copy and electronic formats. The subject (and its employees) must ensure that no copies of relevant electronic files, including emails, word-processing and spreadsheet files, and backups, are destroyed or overwritten, even inadvertently. This often includes suspending automatic email or document purging programs during the pendency of the investigation. The investigatory subject must preserve all documents within its custody or control including, for instance, documents in the custody of its outside professionals, such as bond counsel.

Electronic Documents

Electronic documents are particularly problematic because they are easily altered or deleted, often through routine electronic data policies. For example, an issuer might regularly delete emails of a certain age or recycle backup media, both of which destroy potentially relevant data. Moreover, often it is not obvious where relevant electronic documents may reside.

The Consequences of Inadequate Document Preservation

The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (“SOX”) provides for serious criminal penalties for document destruction intended to interfere with a governmental investigation. Section 802 of SOX provides for criminal penalties of up to twenty years’ imprisonment for anyone who:

knowingly alters, destroys, mutilates, conceals, covers up, falsifies, or makes a false entry in any record, document, or tangible object with the intent to impede, obstruct, or influence the investigation . . . of any matter within the jurisdiction of any department or agency of the United States.

Importantly, section 802 does not require that there be a pending investigation at the time of the conduct; a person can violate this section simply by being aware of a potential governmental investigation. This prohibition applies to all persons, including municipal issuers, their officers,

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 124

Page 129: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-4

their employees, their legal counsel, their accountants, and other representatives. SOX section 802 also provides for fines of up to $10 million.

Additionally, the SEC can impose significant monetary penalties on issuers that do not preserve and timely produce relevant documents.

Document Preservation

A senior official of the issuer (preferably its attorney) should instruct its information technology department to ensure that no potentially relevant electronic files, including backup media, are overwritten. These preservation efforts might well require alteration of routine electronic data policies. Similarly, employees should be instructed to preserve all relevant electronic files, regardless of whether they reside on their desktop or laptop computers, home computers, personal digital assistants, or temporary storage devices.

Document preservation efforts should be broad and inclusive. However, just because potentially relevant documents are being preserved does not mean they necessarily will be produced to the SEC. SEC defense counsel will negotiate the scope of production with SEC staff and will review the issuer’s and its employees’ documents for responsiveness and privilege before producing them to the SEC.

The SEC’s Document Requests

In SEC investigations, the staff routinely asks for the production of a broad range of documents. The SEC typically requests production of electronic data, such as documents from file and email servers, hard drives, and other storage media. It may even request the restoration of certain backup media. It is often possible to negotiate the scope and sequence of a document production with the SEC staff. It is vital that SEC staff regard the producing party as making a timely and complete production of all non-privileged, responsive documents.

The SEC frequently will follow up its initial document requests with additional document requests directed to individual officers, employees, and third parties, as well as with supplemental requests to the issuer. The SEC staff frequently requires producing parties to certify the adequacy of their searches for documents and the completeness of their productions.

The Role of an Outside e-Discovery Vendor

Because electronic data productions are complex, expensive, and time-consuming, an outside expert in electronic discovery can provide valuable assistance. The vendor can help the issuer identify and preserve relevant data sources, copy electronic data in a forensically sound manner (with no alteration of metadata), eliminate duplicates, search the remaining document collection by key words, run preliminary privilege screens, host the electronic document collection online, provide a web-based review tool to facilitate attorney review, and, finally, properly format the documents for production to the SEC.

Additionally, many e-discovery vendors now provide some form of predictive coding, which is a preliminary processing tool endorsed by an increasing number of courts to find key documents electronically without requiring manual review, thus potentially saving the often

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 125

Page 130: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-4

significant expenses associated with attorney document review.

Selective Disclosure of Information to the SEC

The question of whether an issuer can “selectively disclose” privileged information to governmental authorities without waiving the privilege with respect to all others has come to the fore in recent years largely because: (1) SOX has put pressure on issuers to uncover potential wrongdoing, resulting in an unprecedented number of internal investigations; and (2) government enforcement authorities (such as DOJ and the SEC) have rewarded issuers that “cooperate” by sharing their internal investigative findings. Indeed, in cases where the SEC has spared an issuer from any enforcement action, the issuer’s cooperation included sharing the results of its internal investigation with SEC staff. Issuers have tried to maintain that they can “selectively disclose” such privileged information to governmental authorities, but not waive their privileges with respect to the rest of the world.

The DOJ and SEC have supported selective disclosure through various means, including entering into confidentiality agreements that purport to maintain the privilege with respect to third parties, accepting disclosures in forms that do not leave paper trails (such as oral disclosures or opportunities to review but not retain copies of documents), and supporting the principle of selective disclosure in amicus briefs filed in private litigation.

However, given the current state of the law, issuers should assume that any disclosure of privileged information to the government—regardless of whether a confidentiality agreement is in place and regardless of the form of the disclosure—runs a severe risk of waiving the attorney-client privilege and work-product immunity.

Witness Testimony

The SEC likely will take sworn testimony from current and former officers and employees, and outside professionals, such as bond counsel, underwriters and financial advisors. SEC staff often will begin with lower-level witnesses who can explain the organizational structure, the availability and location of documents, and basic information concerning the bond issuances or other matters under investigation. The staff will then proceed up the hierarchy to those witnesses whose actions can be imputed to the issuer and who themselves might be the subject of an enforcement action.

Preparing a witness for testimony is perhaps the most important aspect of defending an SEC investigation. Sworn testimony is often a witness’s best opportunity to explain her (and the issuer’s) side of the story to SEC enforcement staff. The testimony will be a strong consideration in the staff’s formulation of a charging decision and will lock in the witness’s testimony in the event that charges eventually are brought.

Before holding preparation sessions with the witness, defense counsel will review all relevant documents that were written or received by the witness or which might help refresh the witness’s memory. Experienced SEC defense counsel can anticipate the staff’s lines of inquiry and can help the witness put herself and the company in the best possible light, offering testimony that is both inherently credible and consistent with the documents and other testimony the staff is likely to hear.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 126

Page 131: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-4

Typically, several SEC enforcement staff participate in examining a witness. A staff attorney (the line-level investigator) usually leads the examination, with a supervisor and other enforcement staff (such as accountants) asking follow-up questions to ensure that a thorough record has been made. SEC investigative testimony is under oath and on the record.

Witnesses have the right to refuse, under the Fifth Amendment to the U.S. Constitution, to give any information that may tend to incriminate her or subject her to a fine, penalty, or forfeiture. Witnesses should be aware, however, that the government will draw an “adverse inference” of wrongdoing from a refusal to testify, which can prejudice the witness’s ability to defend against SEC civil charges.

SEC defense counsel may:

advise the witness before, during, and after the conclusion of such examination;

briefly ask clarifying questions of the witness at the conclusion of the examination; and

make summary notes during the examination.

Joint Representations

An issuer will often want the same counsel to represent both it and its current and former officers and employees.

In an investigation of any complexity, it is expensive for counsel to become sufficiently familiar with the issues, relevant documents, and witness testimony to be able to competently represent a single employee in SEC testimony. It would be unduly costly if the issuer were required to obtain separate counsel for each of its present or former officer or employee witnesses. For this reason, the issuer typically will offer, at its expense, to have its defense counsel represent each of its officer and employee witnesses at their SEC testimony.

Multiple representations also have the advantage of making the issuer’s counsel privy to the testimony of all commonly represented employees. Because SEC investigations are confidential, only the counsel who represented the witness in testimony can order a copy of the witness’s transcript. Indeed, if the issuer’s counsel did not represent an employee during testimony, the staff usually will not allow that counsel to review the witness’s testimony unless and until a Wells Notice has been issued.

SEC defense counsel may represent multiple witnesses in testimony provided that there are no actual or potential conflicts of interest amongst the issuer and each commonly represented officer or employee witness. That said, the SEC’s cooperation tools may have an impact on multiple-representation scenarios. With the SEC’s cooperation policies in effect, regardless of whether there are conflicts between witnesses, it may be in the interest of one witness to be the first to report the misconduct to the SEC and offer cooperation. For this reason, the SEC’s cooperation program is bound to heighten the ethical concerns of defense counsel and may lead to fewer multiple representations.

While the SEC will permit defense counsel to represent multiple witnesses during their

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 127

Page 132: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-4

investigative testimony, the SEC typically advises witnesses on the record that they have a right to be represented during their testimony by their own personal counsel.

Joint Defense Agreements

In the event that a present or former officer or employee retains personal counsel, the issuer might partly secure the economic and informational advantages of a multiple representation through a joint defense agreement (JDA). Provided that the parties have a common interest in defending an SEC investigation, a JDA allows parties—even those who have potential or actual conflicting interests—to share privileged communications and work product without fear of waiver. Thus, through a JDA, issuer’s counsel can help a separately represented witness more efficiently prepare for her SEC testimony by sharing work product with her counsel; the issuer’s counsel can even participate in the preparation sessions. Likewise, through a JDA, the issuer’s counsel may learn the substance of the testimony of a separately represented witness.

Because the SEC may ask about the existence of a JDA, SEC defense counsel will not want to enter such an agreement with any witness whom the issuer likely will want to portray as a rogue whose actions were unauthorized.

Opportunities for Advocacy During the Investigation

During the investigation, SEC enforcement staff usually will not share its concerns with counsel. Nevertheless, there are numerous opportunities for advocacy during the course of the investigation.

Near the outset of the investigation, the issuer may ask its SEC defense counsel to give the staff an overview of the matter, possibly even providing the staff with key documents. Such a presentation must be accurate and balanced if the issuer and counsel are to have credibility with the staff. Such a presentation can demonstrate an issuer’s cooperation and, at the same time, present the issuer’s views at an early date to SEC decision-makers who are more senior than those who will be involved in the day-to-day conduct of the investigation.

As the investigation unfolds, counsel may find that the staff is laboring under a misapprehension of law, fact, or expert knowledge. Counsel might find it advantageous to correct this misapprehension.

If, at the conclusion of the testimonial phase of the investigation, SEC staff makes a preliminary determination to recommend charges to the Commission, it will issue a Wells Notice (discussed below) to the proposed subject of such charges.

On the other hand, if the staff does not issue a Wells Notice, a potential subject may hear nothing about the status of the investigation for a long time, and can only guess the staff’s intentions. In such instances, SEC defense counsel normally will simply await further contact from the staff. However, in cases where counsel believes that her client has an especially strong position or where she is concerned that lower-level staff might not accurately summarize the investigatory record to their superiors, defense counsel may consider providing more senior staff with her views on what the investigative record has established. This kind of “pre-Wells” submission must be approached cautiously, because the staff could re-open the record to fill any

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 128

Page 133: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-4

holes that the submission identifies in the investigatory record.

Wells Notice and Wells Submission

The Wells Notice outlines the legal charges that the staff is prepared to recommend to the Commission and, sometimes, the factual basis for those charges; Wells Notices are usually given telephonically, followed by a written confirmation. Although not required by the SEC’s rules, the staff will usually give the proposed subject of enforcement charges an opportunity to review all relevant testimony and exhibits. Under the Dodd-Frank Act, not later than 180 days after the SEC staff provides a written Wells Notice to any person, the staff must either file an action against the person or provide notice to the Director of Enforcement of its intent not to file an action.

The subject of a Wells Notice may make a Wells Submission, which is an opportunity for the proposed defendant to explain its position via a memorandum or (less commonly) videotape. A Wells Submission may argue that no enforcement action is warranted or that lower-level charges and less severe relief are appropriate; it may also argue in favor of a proposed settlement.

While Wells Submissions can be effective defense tools, they must be approached with care. The SEC warns that “[t]he staff of the Commission routinely seeks to introduce [Wells] submissions . . . as evidence in Commission enforcement proceedings.” Additionally, they may be discoverable in civil litigation with third parties. The SEC generally refuses to accept Wells Submissions that have been submitted under claims of privilege or as settlement materials.

The Charges and Remedies Available to the SEC

The SEC may proceed against an issuer and its officers and employees in federal court or in its in-house administrative tribunals.

The SEC is authorized to seek several forms of relief, including:

An order against future violations—in the form of an injunction when the SEC proceeds in federal court, and a cease-and-desist order when it proceeds administratively;

A censure—when the SEC proceeds administratively;

Financial penalties; and/or

A temporary or permanent bar from the securities industry.

Additionally, as a condition of settlement, the SEC often seeks other forms of relief such as undertakings to improve relevant policies and procedures, and appointing and adopting the recommendations of an independent consultant.

Historically, the SEC had not sought financial penalties against municipal issuers. However, the Commission has gotten over that historical reluctance. In 2013, the SEC required a $20,000 penalty as a condition of settlement from the issuer in In the Matter of The Greater Wenatchee Regional Events Center Public Facilities District, Allison Williams, Global Entertainment Corporation, and Richard Kozuback, Sec. Act. Rel. No. 9471 (Nov. 5, 2013). And,

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 129

Page 134: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-4

the SEC has a history of requiring financial penalties from municipal officers and employees. See, e.g., S.E.C. v. Gary J. Burtka, No. 14-cv-14278, Litig. Rel. No. 23229 (E.D. Mich. Apr. 6, 2015) (imposing $10,000 penalty on former mayor).

There are three tiers to the SEC’s penalty authority. For entities, the SEC may impose a penalty not to exceed (1) the greater of defendant’s gain1 or $80,000 for any violation, (2) the greater of defendant’s gain or $400,000 for violations involving fraud, deceit, manipulation or deliberate or reckless disregard of a regulatory requirement, and (3) the greater of defendant’s gain or $775,000 when such violation directly or indirectly resulted in substantial losses or created a significant risk of substantial losses. The penalty scheme for individuals follows the same pattern, with the amount of the tiers being (1) $7,500; (2) $80,000; and (3) $160,000. In applying this penalty scheme, the SEC has considerable discretion in determining the number violations that occurred.

Under the Municipal Continuing Disclosure Cooperation (MCDC) initiative, the Enforcement Division will recommend standardized, favorable settlement terms to municipal issuers and underwriters who self-report that they have made inaccurate statements in bond offerings about their prior compliance with the continuing disclosure obligations specified in Exchange Act Rule 15c2-12. The settlements will be achieved through administrative proceedings in which the respondent (1) neither admits nor denies the SEC’s findings, (2) is censured, (3) is ordered to cease-and-desist from future violations, and (4) is ordered enhance its continuing disclosure compliance (underwriters will have to retain and adopt the recommendations of an independent consultant and issuers will have to enhance their policies and procedures and conduct training). Additionally, for underwriters, the Enforcement Division will recommend a monetary penalty not to exceed $500,000, and for municipal issuers it will recommend that no monetary penalty be imposed. Under MCDC, the Enforcement Division is not providing any assurances with regard to individual liability, and has warned that it will likely seek greater sanctions (including financial penalties) for underwriters and issuers who did not participate in the program.

Settlement Negotiations

At appropriate points in the enforcement process (during the fact gathering stage, in connection with or following a Wells Submission, and even after an enforcement action has been commenced), a party can discuss settlement with the SEC staff.

The staff does not have independent authority to accept a settlement. That said, settlement offers that do not have staff support are rarely accepted by the Commission.

A settlement reached prior to the commencement of an enforcement action often results in a reduction of the charges or relief that the staff would otherwise seek, whereas the range of compromise available post-commencement is usually more circumscribed.

The SEC routinely issues press releases when it brings and settles enforcement actions. Thus, when a matter is settled before an enforcement action is commenced, there is a single press event. When a matter is settled post-commencement, there are two press events: first, when the

1 The gain measure only applies when the SEC proceeds in federal court.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 130

Page 135: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-4

matter is brought; and second, when it is settled.

Admissions of Liability

Historically, the SEC’s policy has been to allow a party to settle with the SEC without admitting or denying the SEC’s allegations. Under this long-standing policy, when a party settles a federal injunctive action, neither the court nor the SEC makes any factual finding. The SEC files a complaint making its allegations, and the court enters a final judgment that enjoins the defendant and may order other relief, but includes no findings of fact. However, when a party settles an SEC administrative action, the settling party (albeit without admitting or denying the SEC’s charges) allows the SEC to make certain factual findings and conclusions of law. In such “no admit/no deny” settlements, the settling party is prohibited from publicly denying the SEC’s charges, but is permitted to defend itself in litigation with parties other than the SEC.

Faced with recent criticisms that the SEC’s “no admit/no deny” policy was too lenient and failed to impose accountability on settling parties, the SEC has changed its policy going forward to require certain settling parties to admit liability in order to settle with the SEC. In January 2012, former Director of Enforcement Khuzami announced that a party that admits guilt in order to resolve a parallel criminal prosecution, including non-prosecution agreements or deferred prosecution agreements that include admissions or acknowledgments of criminal conduct, must admit liability in any SEC settlement. SEC Chair Mary Jo White announced a further change in the SEC’s settlement policy in June 2013 to require certain settling parties to admit wrongdoing even if there has been no admission of guilt in a related criminal proceeding. The types of cases that might require such an admission of wrongdoing include those where:

a large number of investors were harmed, or the market or investors were placed at risk of serious harm;

obtaining an admission of wrongdoing would serve a protective purpose, such as where the settling party engaged in egregious intentional misconduct; or

the settling party unlawfully obstructed the SEC’s investigative process.

While the SEC has demanded and obtained acknowledgements of wrongdoing under the new admissions policy in certain cases, this policy has not yet been applied in the municipal arena.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 131

Page 136: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

S-5: THE UNDERWRITER DUE DILIGENCE PROCESS

CHAIR:

Daniel M. Deaton Nixon Peabody LLP – Los Angeles, CA

Panelists:

Christine Walsh Bank of America Merrill Lynch – New York, NY Stephen E. Heaney Stifel, Nicolaus & Company, Incorporated – Los Angeles, CA John M. McNally Hawkins Delafield & Wood LLP – Washington, DC

1. Recent events that have informed underwriter due diligence

a. Risk Alert (March 2012)

i. What was the risk alert?

ii. What did it teach us?

1. Importance of documentation

2. In context of continuing disclosure due diligence, reliance on representations by issuers is not sufficient; this also raises a larger question of investigating representations by issuers

3. Highlighted importance of documentation in order to establish appropriate supervisorial procedures under MSRB Rule G-27

4. Introduction of examinations as significant business risk concern

b. Wenatchee Order (November 2013)

i. What happened in Wenatchee?

ii. Why is it important?

1. Negligence-based enforcement action against underwriter and banker

iii. What did this teach us?

1. Importance of taking a fresh look at due diligence each transaction

c. MCDC Initiative (March 2014-December 2014)

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 132

Page 137: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

i. What did dealers uncover about underwriter due diligence during the MCDC Initiative?

1. Revealed numerous instances where continuing disclosure was not conducted

2. Revealed a lot of communication concerns between bankers and underwriter’s counsel

ii. What did this teach us?

2. How have these events informed proper roles in underwriter due diligence?

a. Process of communication and planning

b. How should these recent events inform and shape the role of bankers in due diligence?

i. What did the recent events reveal about where improvements can be made in what bankers are doing in due diligence?

1. Understanding due diligence

2. Consistency

3. Documentation

ii. What are some areas for bankers to focus their due diligence efforts?

c. How should these events inform and shape the role of underwriter’s counsel?

i. Knowledge of law

1. How have these events informed the importance of underwriter’s counsel in maintaining its knowledge of law?

2. What steps should underwriter’s counsel take to maintain its knowledge of law?

ii. Scope of services

1. Appropriate scope of due diligence

2. Challenges

a. Fee Pressures

b. Responding to Underwriter Counsel Memoranda from Underwriters

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 133

Page 138: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

iii. Loyalty concerns

d. Role of internal counsel

i. Policies and procedures

1. Creation of baselines of documentation of due diligence (including checklists)

ii. Training

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 134

Page 139: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 135

Page 140: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 136

Page 141: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 137

Page 142: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 138

Page 143: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 139

Page 144: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 140

Page 145: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 141

Page 146: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 142

Page 147: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 143

Page 148: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 144

Page 149: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 145

Page 150: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 146

Page 151: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 147

Page 152: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 148

Page 153: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 149

Page 154: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 150

Page 155: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 151

Page 156: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 152

Page 157: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 153

Page 158: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 154

Page 159: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 155

Page 160: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECURITIES LAW: S-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 156

Page 161: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

SECU

RITI

ES L

AW: S

-5

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 157

Page 162: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 158

Page 163: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 159

Page 164: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Tax Outlines

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 160

Page 165: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 161

Page 166: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-1

T-1: THE NEW MONEY BOND ISSUE

Chair:

Vicky Tsilas Ballard Spahr, LLP - Washington DC

Panelists:

Marybeth E. Frantz Harris Beach PLLC – Pittsford, NYEdwin G. Oswald Orrick Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP – Washington, DC Darren C. McHugh Stradling Yocca Carlson & Rauth, P.C. - Denver, CO

New Money Issues: General University Hypothetical

University of State A (“University”) is a private university and 501(c)(3) organization that is not a private foundation. University is constructing a new residence hall and dining facility to be named the Residence Hall (the “Project”). The Project will be housed within a single building that will be newly constructed, with the dining facility on the first floor and dormitory rooms and university housing services offices on the remaining floors. The board of the University has determined to construct the Project under a “design-build-manage” contract with Dorm Builders Inc., a for-profit construction, engineering and project management firm (the “Contractor/Manager”). University and Contractor/Manager have entered into a guaranteed maximum price design-build contract (the “Design-Build Contract”), pursuant to which Contractor/Manager will design and build the Project at a price that will not exceed $30,000,000. The price of $30,000,000 is a fair market value cost for the Project, and the Design-Build Contract was negotiated at arm’s length. None of the members of the University Board serve as members of the Contractor/Manager Board, and none of the members of governing body of the Contractor/Manager serve as members of the University Board.

Contractor/Manager will enter into a management contract (the “Management Contract”) with University pursuant to which Contractor/Manager will manage the Project. The Management Contract is proposed to be for a term of 20 years, and Contractor/Manager will be paid a fixed fee that increases every year in an amount equal to the percentage change in the applicable consumer price index. The Management Contract is terminable by University upon 180 days’ notice to the Contractor/Manager.

University has incurred $3,000,000 of costs relating to the Project to date (the “Prior Costs”), summarized below:

Purpose Amount Date Capital

Land Acquisition $1,500,000 01/01/2015 Yes Engineering 500,000 04/01/2015 Yes Architecture 500,000 03/15/2015 Yes Permitting 250,000 08/01/2014 Yes

Feasibility/Environmental 500,000 07/01/2015 Yes

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 162

Page 167: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-1

Of the Prior Costs, the land acquisition was financed with proceeds of a draw made on a taxable line of credit (the “Taxable Loan”) that the University has with Local Bank, Inc. (the “Bank”). The University did not adopt a reimbursement resolution in anticipation of the issuance of the Bonds.

University would like to borrow proceeds of a tax-exempt bond issue (the “Bonds”) to be issued by the State Health and Educational Facilities Authority (the “Issuer”). University’s application to the Issuer has been approved. The Bonds would be issued to (a) repay the Taxable Loan, (b) reimburse the University for the Prior Costs other than the land acquisition, (c) finance the remaining capital costs of the Project, (d) fund a debt service reserve fund for the Bonds, and (e) pay costs of issuing the Bonds. The Bonds are scheduled to be issued on July 1, 2016.

Upon acquisition of the Land, University began a formal capital campaign to solicit donations to help finance the Project. To date, the University has received $2,000,000 of contributions, and expects to receive an additional $1,000,000 before the Project is complete. The donation form that donors fill out relating to the capital campaign states that “donor’s donation will be used to construct and equip the Residence Hall.” The University accounts for amounts allocable to donations as donor restricted funds, and the CFO of the University advises you that the donated funds can only be used to pay costs of constructing or equipping the Project or paying debt service on debt incurred to construct or equip the Project.

The University is a borrower of proceeds of five other tax-exempt bond issues (the “Other Issues” and, together with the Bonds, the “Parity Bonds”). None of the Other Issues were pool financings (i.e., the University’s loans were the only loans made with proceeds of the Other Issues). The Other Issues were issued pursuant to a single master indenture (the “Master Indenture”) and related supplemental indentures (the “Supplemental Indentures”) of the Issuer, and proceeds were loaned to the University pursuant to related loan agreements (the “Loan Agreements”). The Master Indenture creates a common reserve fund for all bonds issued under the Master Indenture, and has an aggregated reserve fund size requirement that is measured by reference to all of the bonds secured under the Master Indenture. The reserve requirement is equal to the least of (a) 10 percent of the principal amount of the Parity Bonds, (b) maximum annual debt service on the Parity Bonds, and (c) 125 percent of average annual debt service on the Parity Bonds.

Questions for Discussion:

In general interest on State and local governmental bonds is excludable from gross income under section 103 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”) if certain requirements are met. Interest on a private activity bond, other than qualified private activity bonds within the meaning of section 141 is not excludable under section 103. Section 141 provides that the term private activity bond means any bond issued as part of an issue which meets the private business use test and the private security or payment test or which meets the private loan financing test in section 141(c). Section 145 provides rules for qualified 501(c)(3) bonds.

(a) What sort of information do you need from University identifying the assets to be financed? See I.R.C. § 141; I.R.C. § 148; Treas. Reg. § 1.148-10; I.R.C. § 149(g).

(i) Break-down of assets to be financed by asset class for depreciation purposes, including cost of each separate component within a class.

(ii) General description of assets to be financed (i.e., “dormitory facility and dining hall”).

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 163

Page 168: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-1

(iii) Break-down of assets by “8038” categories, i.e., land acquisition, buildings and structural components, equipment with a class life of five years or less, equipment with a class life of greater than five years, or “other.”

(iv) Other.

(b) What evidence do you need to be satisfied that the anticipated bond size bears a sufficiently close relationship to the total asset costs (along with reserve fund and costs of issuance to be financed) to avoid overissuance concerns? Assume that the University does not expect to earn any meaningful amount of investment earnings from investing the project fund amounts or the reserve fund during the construction period. I.R.C. § 148; Treas. Reg. § 1.148-10; I.R.C. § 149(g).

(i) Feasibility/cost study.

(ii) Response to a diligence questionnaire specifically asking about cost of assets to be financed.

(iii) Copy of the Design-Build Contract.

(iv) All of the above.

(v) Anything else?

(c) How should Issuer and University account for the capital campaign amounts received and expected to be received in sizing the bond issue? See I.R.C. § 148; Treas. Reg. § 1.148-1(c); Treas. Reg. § 1.148-10; I.R.C. § 149(g).

(i) Issuer and University should downsize the bond issue by amounts already received ($2,000,000), and can use amounts received after the issue date under the capital campaign for (A) additional construction costs, or (B) debt service on the Bonds. [

(ii) Issuer and University should downsize the bond issue by all of the capital campaign donations received and expected to be received ($3,000,000).

(iii) Issuer and University may size the bond issue for the full cost of construction, and use the amounts received and expected to be received from the capital campaign to pay debt service on the Bonds.

(iv) Issuer and University may disregard amounts received and expected to be received from the capital campaign in sizing the bond issue.

(d) Does the Management Contract create private business use concerns? If so, how should private use be measured? See I.R.C. § 141; Treas. Reg. § 1.141-3; Rev. Proc. 97-13; Notice 2014-67.

Management contracts: Revenue Procedure 97-13 and Notice 2014-67. Under the tax rules, compensation to the manager may not be based in whole or in part on a share of net profits from the operation of the bond financed facility. Rev. Proc. 97-13 sets forth certain safe harbors with certain terms and compensation arrangements that if met, will not result in private business use. Moreover, the revenue procedure states that a productivity award based on increases or decreases in gross revenues (or adjusted gross revenues) or reductions

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 164

Page 169: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-1

in total expenses (but not both) in any annual period, generally does not cause compensation to be based on a share of net profits.

In 2014, the IRS amplified Rev. Proc. 97-13 but providing an additional safe harbor from private business use. Notice 2014-67 provides a new five year safe harbor where the compensation can be based on a stated amount, a periodic fixed fee, a capitation fee, a per-unit fee, or a combination of the proceeding. The safe harbor also permits compensation for services to be based on a percentage of gross revenues, adjusted gross revenues or expenses of the facility (but not both revenue and expenses). Under the new safe harbor provided, contracts do not have to be terminable by the qualified users before the end of the five year term. Notice 2014-67 also provide new rules which state that a productivity reward for services in any annual period during the term of the contract generally also does not cause the compensation to be based on a share of net profits of the bond financed facility if:

(a) the eligibility for the productivity award is based on the quality of the services provided under the management contract (for example, the achievement of Medical Shared Savings Program quality performance standards or meeting data reporting requirements), rather than increases or decreases in expenses of the facility; and

(b) the amount of the productivity award is a stated dollar amount, a periodic fixed fee, or a tiered system of stated dollar amounts or periodic fixed fees based solely on the level of performance achieved with respect to the applicable measure.

(i) In light of the recent guidance and the existing rules, does the Management Contract create private business use?

(A) Yes, the Management Contract is a not covered by one of the safe harbors of Rev. Proc. 97-13 or Notice 2014-67, so potentially creates private business use.

(B) No, the termination provision makes the term of the Management Contract 180 days, and therefore the contract is within a safe harbor under Rev. Proc. 97-13 and Notice 2014-67.

(C) Yes, the Management Contract is, in substance, a lease for federal tax purposes.

(D) No. Although not covered by a safe harbor based on facts and circumstances, the Management Contract does not create private business use.

(ii) How should private business use be measured? See Treas. Reg. 1.141-3.

(A) Amount of square footage used by the Contractor/Manager.

(B) Present value of the gross payments made to the Contractor/Manager under the Management Contract, discounted to the issue date or the placed in service date of the Project and using the arbitrage yield as the discount rate.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 165

Page 170: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-1

(C) The ratio of the payments made under the Management Contract to the value of the Project.

(D) Other method.

(iii) Assume that the management contract creates private business use. Does the University have any options in allocating different sources of funds to different components of the Project in order to eliminate or minimize the amount of private use allocated to the Bonds? See Treas. Reg. § 1.141-6.

(e) Assume that in the course of preparing the site for construction, the University learns that there is an environmental issue that requires remediation. Remediation will take approximately 8 months from the anticipated closing date of the bond issue. University will have entered into the Design/Build Contract by that time. University would like to proceed with issuing the Bonds under the timing originally contemplated. How would you handle the remediation issue? See I.R.C. § 148, Treas. Reg. § 1.148-2(e)(2); Treas. Reg. §1.148-10; I.R.C. § 149(g).

(i) No change required to the financing plan.

(ii) Issuer and University need to delay the issuance of the Bonds.

(iii) Issuer and University should consider structuring the financing as a draw-down issue.

(iv) Issuer and University should not issue the Bonds until the environmental issue is remediated.

(v) Other.

(f) How should each of the separate reimbursement items be analyzed?

(i) Land acquisition/Taxable Loan.

(ii) Engineering

(iii) Architecture

(iv) Permitting

(v) Feasibility/Environmental

Hypothetical - Treatment of summer camps

University is nationally known for its collegiate basketball program, with its team having won several national championships under the guidance of Coach Wally Winner. In order to entice potential future basketball talent to University and to enable Coach Winner to capitalize on his celebrity, University contracts with Coach Winner to run an overnight basketball camp each summer. Coach Winner has run the camp for each of the past ten summers through his own company, Winners, Inc. Pursuant to the contracts, University gets a negotiated fixed amount per camper, which is at fair market value. The camp uses the auxiliary basketball courts in the athletic center, dining facilities in the student center, and beds in various dormitories.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 166

Page 171: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-1

Although in the first summer the camp ran for only four days, the camp’s duration has steadily increased over the years, with last summer’s camp having run for ten weeks, comprised of six days and five nights each (for a total of 60 days and 50 nights). University expects the camp’s duration to maintain its popularity in future years, such that the camp would not last for less than 60 days for the foreseeable future.

Once the Project is completed, University intends to house the basketball campers there.

Questions for Discussion:

Short-term arrangements under tax rules. Under Treas. Reg. §1.141-3(d)(3)(i) use pursuant to certain short-term arrangements is not private business use as long as the arrangement does not result in ownership of the financed property by a nongovernmental person and certain requirements are met:

(1) the term of the use under the arrangement (including renewal options) is not more than 100 days;

(2) the arrangement would be treated as general public use except that the property is not available to nonbusiness members of the general public because generally applicable and uniformly applied rates are not available for such persons and

(3) the financing is not for the principal purpose of providing property to the nongovernmental person.

(a) If the camp duration continues at its current level, would you consider the camp’s use of the Project to create private business use?

(i) Yes.

(ii) No – it qualifies for the short-term exception in Treas. Reg. § 1.141-3(d)(3).

(iii) Not sure. Need more information.

(b) If the camp duration increases to 12 weeks (72 days and 60 nights), would you consider the camp’s use of the Project to create private business use?

(i) Yes.

(ii) No.

(iii) Not sure. Need more information.

(c) Assuming there is a private business use concern, how would you measure the camp’s use of the Project if there are no other users of the Project while the camp is in session?

(i) Number of days Project is used – counting entire Project as used in a private business use.

(ii) Number of days Project is used – counting only those beds/rooms used by campers.

(iii) Amount of revenue received from the camp compared to the total revenue received from the Project.

(iv) Other method.

Hypothetical - Financing Athletic Center through a Partnership.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 167

Page 172: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-1

Final regulations under section 141 of the Code were published providing guidance on the allocation and accounting rules that are to be used for purposes of apply the private activity bond tests under section 141 of the Code. The final regulations are generally effective January 25, 2016.

Partnerships and Final Allocation and Accounting Rules. The final regulations provide a rule for measuring the private business use of financed property resulting from the use of property by a partnership that includes a private partner. The amount of private business use by a private partner is the private partner’s largest share of any partnership item of income, gain, loss, deduction or credit attributable to the time the partnership uses the property during the measurement period. Ownership by a partnership does not violate the section 501(c)(3) bond requirement that all bond financed property must be owned by a section 501(c)(3) entity. The preamble to the Final Regulations provide that the rules serve to accommodate public-private partnerships.

In light of these final regulations, assume the University will construct a new athletic center and intends to enter into a partnership with a for-profit entity to own the athletic center. The partnership will own the athletic center building.

Questions for discussion:

(a) Can any portion of the building be financed with tax-exempt bonds? If so, how?

(b) Suppose the University decides to add solar panels on the roof of the new athletic center. Does the addition of those solar panels create private business use?

Developer Bond Deals: Chief Counsel Advice Memorandum 201537022

In May 2015, the IRS Office of Chief Counsel released Chief Counsel Advice Memorandum 201537022 (CCA). The developer in the CCA was an S corporation in the business of acquiring unimproved real property, subdividing the land, and selling the improved parcels to third-party home builders or commercial developers. In anticipation of purchasing and developing a parcel of land (the "Parcel") the developer began working with the local township with the goal of turning the Parcel into a mixed-use development. The local township approved the mixed-use development subject to the provision that the developer provide the public infrastructure, such as water, wastewater, streets, that was necessary for the development.

Two interconnected governmental special districts, a financing district and a service district were formed under state law. The township authorized the formation of the special districts. The CCA states that the special districts purported to be political subdivisions. The developer entered into an agreement with the special districts which was reflected in a service plan. According to the service plan the special districts were formed to finance and construct necessary common improvements (such as roads, sewers and water service) for the developer’s project.

Under the service plan between the districts and the developer, the developer paid for certain of the improvements and advanced funds to the Financing District. The developer provided all of the funding that the special districts needed in order to fulfill obligations under the service plan. The financing district issued promissory notes to the developer in principal amounts equal to the payments and advances, and eventually delivered to the developer a bond anticipation note (BAN) in exchange for its outstanding promissory notes. The BAN had a stated interest rate and a fixed term. During this time, the financing district also issued promissory notes to outside investors, which notes had priority over the financing district notes held by the developer.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 168

Page 173: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-1

The developer sells lots in the Parcel to builders. The developer elected to use the "alternative cost method" described in Rev. Proc. 92-29, 1992-1 CB 748 to account for the common improvement costs of its development. Under the alternative cost method, a developer may include in the basis of property sold their allocable share of the estimated cost of common improvements without regard to whether the costs are incurred under section 461(h) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "Code").

The developer treated amounts advanced to and on behalf of special districts as amounts incurred for common improvement costs. Under Rev. Proc. 92-29, the amounts were reflected in the bases of lots sold by the developer to the extent of each lot's allocable share of estimated common improvement costs. The developer treated principal repayments on the notes or BAN as a reduction of common improvement costs and so as a reduction in the cost basis for the lots. By reducing the basis, the developer would have an increase in the income it realized when he sold the lots.

Developer took the position that interest on the promissory notes and the BAN was tax-exempt under section 103 of the Code. In its analysis of the facts, the CCA noted:

While Taxpayer disregarded the form of the transaction [i.e., as the purchase of a debt instrument] and treated the transaction according to its substance in treating advances to and on behalf of the special districts as common improvement cost expenditures, it took a different approach when it accrued “interest” on the notes and bonds and reported these amounts as tax exempt interest under § 103. Repayments received from the Financing District are properly treated as a reduction in Taxpayer's estimated common improvement costs under Rev. Proc. 92-29. Accordingly, Taxpayer's estimated common improvement costs are reduced in the year of repayment. Under section 2.02()1) of Rev. Proc. 92-29, this will result in reduced allocations to the bases of lots sold in the year of repayment and succeeding tax years. Any repayments made after Taxpayer has completed lot sales must be reported as ordinary income.

The CCA agreed that the developer properly treated amounts advanced to the special districts for the construction of infrastructure as costs of developing the developer's real estate. Therefore the developer correctly treated payments in respect of the notes or the BAN as a reduction in the cost of common improvements and as resulting in a reduction in cost basis of the lots. However, the CCA concluded that that no portion of the payments constituted tax-exempt interest under section 103 of the Code.

It appears that the conclusion in the CCA is based on the inconsistency between the developer’s treatment of payments in respect of the notes or BANs (treating payments from the special district as payments of common improvement costs, and not repayments of a loan from the developer) and then treating interest payments as payments in respect of the debt.

Questions for Discussion:

1. Does the holding of the CCA preclude treating as tax-exempt the interest on special district notes held by Developers of projects financed in part by tax increment financings?

(a) If yes, what is the reasoning for not doing such deals?

(b) Does it matter who holds the debt (for example, if the developer sells the notes or BAN to an unrelated 3rd party?)

(c) If not, what are some of the items bond counsel should look to from the developer? Are further assurances required? If so, what would those be?

2. The CCA was prepared by the branch within the Office of Chief Counsel responsible for issues relating to tax accounting, and reviewed by the branch responsible for tax-exempt bond matters.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 169

Page 174: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-1

[The CCA was written by John Aramburu, Senior Counsel (Income Tax & Accounting) to the Associate Area Counsel (Denver) rather than Financial Institutions and Productions (Tax-Exempt Bond Branch)].

(a) Does it make a difference that this was an income tax and accounting CCA?

(b) Is further clarification from the IRS needed?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 170

Page 175: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 171

Page 176: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-2

T-2 THE REFUNDING BOND ISSUE

Chair:

Matthias M. Edrich Kutak Rock LLP – Denver, CO

Panelists:

R. Todd Greenwalt Bracewell & Giuliani LLP – Houston, TX Carol L. Lew Stradling Yocca Carlson & Rauth, P.C. – Newport Beach, CA Scott E. Schickli Orrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP – Portland, OR

With the help of case studies and a series of hypothetical questions, this session will include discussions to consider tax issues that arise in connection with refunding bond issues.

Outline:

A. Background Facts

B. Specific Issues

I. Allocation and Accounting Regulations and Refundings

II. Proposed Issue Price Regulations and Refundings

III. Discovering Tax Issues with the Refunded Bonds

1. Deliberate Action Was Not Remediated

2. Rebate Payments Were Not Made

3. Refunded Bonds Are Subject to Ongoing VCAP

4. Reserve Fund Moneys Allocable to the Refunding Bonds

5. Other Moneys Become Available in Refunding

6. How Should Tax Issues Be Disclosed?

IV. Investing or Not Investing Escrow Funds

V. Explaining the Multipurpose Issue Allocation Rules

VI. Whistleblowers

C. Regulatory References

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 172

Page 177: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-2

A. BACKGROUND FACTS

A local hospital has asked you to serve as bond counsel for the issuance of tax-exempt bonds to be issued later this year (the “Series 2016 Bonds”). The proceeds of the Series 2016 Bonds are to be used to (a) advance refund tax-exempt bonds issued in 2000 (the “Series 2000 Bonds”) and 2007 (the “Series 2007 Bonds”) and (b) refinance a taxable bank loan made to the hospital in 2012 (the “Taxable 2012 Loan”).

The hospital used the proceeds of the Series 2000 Bonds to pay the costs of newly constructing several hospital buildings, including the hospital’s blood testing lab within one of the buildings (the “Testing Lab”). The hospital used the proceeds of the Series 2007 Bonds to pay the costs of newly constructing a birth center (the “Birth Center”) and to advance refund certain new money bonds issued in 1997 (the “Series 1997 Bonds”). The hospital used the proceeds of the Taxable 2012 Loan to pay a portion of the costs of newly constructing a medical office building (the “MOB”). The hospital contributed land for the MOB and paid the remaining costs of the MOB with other available moneys.

The Series 2000 Bonds and Series 2007 Bonds are secured by a common reserve fund that also secures all of the hospital’s other bond issues. The Series 2016 Bonds, however, will not be secured by this reserve fund. A significant portion of the common reserve fund was funded with proceeds of the Series 2000 Bonds and Series 2007 Bonds.

B. SPECIFIC ISSUES

I. Allocation and Accounting Regulations and Refundings

The MOB is a two-story office building. The first floor and half of the second floor is leased to private physician groups. The leases with these groups give rise to private business use and private payments. The remaining half of the second floor is used by the hospital for administrative offices that do not give rise to private business use. The MOB was placed in service in 2013.

You have heard about the new allocation and accounting regulations that were published by the Treasury Department in October 2015 (T.D. 9741), and you understand that the regulations will affect how much of the Taxable 2012 Loan can be refinanced with proceeds of the Series 2016 Bonds. During your general review of the regulations, you note the following matters:

A. General structure of the new mixed use provisions of Treas. Reg. §§ 1.141-1, 1.141-6 and 1.141-12:

i. What is treated as having been financed by the Taxable 2012 Loan? Apply the new definition of “project” to help with this determination.

ii. What equity is allocable to any private business use within the MOB? Consider the concept of “qualified equity” and the associated time limits, any documentation requirements, and the restrictions relating to equity resulting from real or tangible property or redemptions.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 173

Page 178: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-2

iii. Consider the new provisions regarding anticipatory remedial action, though perhaps you will conclude that the facts relating to the MOB do not give rise to any such issues.

iv. Was, or will, the MOB be used by a partnership? Consider the new partnership rules.

B. The new regulations may be applied in whole but not in part to bonds issued before January 25, 2016. Consider effective date matters contained in the regulations.

C. You note that there are no transition rules for refundings.

D. Consider how to address a refunding of bonds for an old mixed use project that does not precisely comply with the new mixed use restrictions?

i. What if the qualified equity was allocated outside of the correct timeframe?

ii. What if the refunded bonds were issued in different series over several years for a project with a long construction schedule?

iii. Does computing private business use separately for the refunding issue solve the problem?

E. Can you take advantage of more favorable aspects of the new mixed use regulations upon issuance of refunding bonds? By electing usage of the new regulations for any refunded bonds? How do you practically do this for older allocations?

F. If you don’t elect, given that there is no transition rule for refundings, will the new allocation rules automatically replace the old ones on a going-forward basis and, if they do, will the project cease to be an eligible mixed-use project because of timing rules in the common plan of financing requirement?

II. Proposed Issue Price Regulations and Refundings

Issue Price of the Series 2016 Bonds. To avoid “excess gross proceeds” issues under Treas. Reg. § 1.148-10(c) with respect to the sizing of the Series 2016 Bonds, you are intent on conclusively establishing the issue price of the bonds on the sale date. Your associate spends hours combing through EMMA trade data and reports to you that several maturities of the Series 2016 Bonds apparently did not sell to the public on the sale date.

Will you rely on the reasonable expectations test of the existing regulations in Treas. Reg. § 1.148-1(b) to determine the issue price of the Series 2016 Bonds? Would you prefer to ask the hospital (and the issuer, assuming the bonds are conduit bonds) and the underwriters to make the representations and certifications required by the “alternative method” for determining issue price set forth in the proposed issue price regulations (REG-138526-14)?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 174

Page 179: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-2

Under the alternative method, you may treat the initial offering price to the public as the issue price of the bonds (even though the bonds were not actually sold at such price) if all of the following requirements are met:

(A) The underwriters fill all orders at the initial offering price placed by the public and received by the underwriters on or before the sale date (to the extent the orders do not exceed the amount of bonds to be sold), and no underwriter fills an order placed by the public and received by the underwriters on or before the sale date at a price higher than the initial offering price.

(B) The issuer obtains from the lead underwriter in the underwriting syndicate or selling group (or, if applicable, the sole underwriter) certification of the following:

(1) The initial offering price;

(2) That the underwriters met the requirements of paragraph (A) above;

(3) That no underwriter will fill an order placed by the public and received after the sale date and before the issue date at a price higher than the initial offering price, except if the higher price is the result of a market change (such as a decline in interest rates) for those bonds after the sale date; and

(4) That the lead (or sole) underwriter will provide the issuer supporting documentation for the matters covered by the certifications in paragraphs (f)(2)(ii)(B)(1) and (2) of this section and, with regard to paragraph (f)(2)(ii)(B)(3) of this section, either documentation regarding any bonds for which an underwriter filled an order placed by the public and received after the sale date and before the issue date at a price higher than the initial offering price and the corresponding market change for those bonds, or a certification that no underwriter filled such orders at a price higher than the initial offering price.

(C) The issuer does not know or have reason to know, after exercising due diligence, that the certifications described in paragraph (B) above are false.

Would it have been better to require the underwriters, in the bond purchase agreement, to adhere to the requirements of the “alternative method” in the event not all of the Series 2016 Bonds are actually sold?

Issue Price of Refunded Bonds. Would you be concerned if only half of the Series 2000 Bonds or Series 2007 Bonds was sold to the public at the prices shown in the sale documents for such bonds (the prices that were reasonably expected by the underwriters when such bonds were offered to the public), and the other half was actually sold to the public at prices that were materially higher? Are there imputed unspent proceeds?

III. Discovering Tax Issues with the Refunded Bonds

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 175

Page 180: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-2

1. Deliberate Action Was Not Remediated

Over cocktails one evening, the hospital CFO mentions to you that the hospital sold the Testing Lab six years ago to a for profit operator. You recall that the Testing Lab was financed with a portion of the proceeds of the Series 2000 Bonds. Unfortunately, the hospital did not have effective policies and procedures in place to recognize that the sale of the Testing Lab gave rise to tax issues and, accordingly, the hospital did not timely take a remedial action. What do you do now? (See Treas. Reg. § 1.141-12 and IRM 7.2.3)

Consider whether the private business use associated with the sale of the Testing Lab will cause the applicable private business use limitation to be exceeded.

May proceeds of the Series 2016 Bonds be used to refund the Series 2000 Bonds notwithstanding the sale and resulting private activity to which the Testing Lab has been converted?

Consider whether the hospital may request a VCAP under the resolution standards in I.R.M. 7.2.3 (e.g., relating to excessive nonqualified use or ownership of qualified 501(c)(3) bond-financed property) to “clean up” the Series 2000 Bonds before the bonds are refunded.

2. Rebate Payments Were Not Made

The hospital’s clever investment officer was able to achieve significant investment returns with proceeds of the Series 2000 Bonds on deposit in the project fund that was established to pay the costs of constructing hospital buildings. Due to project delays, the project fund moneys languished (well invested above the bond yield) in the project fund until 2015, but were eventually spent. The hospital did not care to make any applicable rebate and yield reduction payments, though such payments should have been made. It turns out that rebate payments should also have been made with respect to investments in the reserve fund for the Series 2000 Bonds. May the Series 2000 Bonds be refunded given the outstanding rebate and yield reduction payment liabilities?

3. Refunded Bonds Are Subject to Ongoing VCAP

You had too many cocktails and, under the fact pattern described in 1. above (Deliberate Action Was Not Remediated), you misunderstood the CFO concerning the sale of the Testing Lab. (Remember, the Testing Lab was financed with proceeds of the Series 2000 Bonds.) While the Testing Lab was, indeed, sold and the hospital did not take a remedial action, the hospital did commence a VCAP negotiation to settle the nonqualified use of the Testing Lab. Negotiations with CPM (the IRS “Compliance Program Management” group responsible for overseeing VCAP) are ongoing. Is it a good idea to complete the refunding of the Series 2000 Bonds with proceeds of the Series 2016 Bonds while VCAP negotiations are still underway?

4. Reserve Fund Moneys Allocable to the Refunding Bonds

A portion of the common reserve fund will be released and transferred to the defeasance escrow fund to accomplish the refunding of the Series 2000 Bonds and Series 2007 Bonds. The

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 176

Page 181: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-2

balance of the reserve fund will continue to secure other outstanding bonds. You find out that the released portion is less than the portion of the common reserve fund allocable to the Series 2000 Bonds and Series 2007 Bonds under the general ordering rules of Treas. Reg. § 1.148-6(b) and the commingled fund allocation rules of Treas. Reg. § 1.148-6(e). You recognize, however, that the bond documents for the other remaining outstanding bonds will not permit a release of additional reserve fund moneys (a release of additional moneys would cause the reserve fund to fall below the reserve requirement for such bonds).

Even though a portion of the remaining common reserve fund moneys is allocable to the Series 2000 Bonds and Series 2007 Bonds (and, eventually, to the Series 2016 Bonds as transferred proceeds), may that portion be retained in the reserve fund? Will the hospital need to contribute other available funds to the refunding to account for such portion of the common reserve fund moneys? Do these proceeds constitute “excess gross proceeds” under Treas. Reg. § 1.148-10(c)?

5. Other Moneys Become Available in Refunding

After the Series 2016 Bonds are priced, you discover that (a) the hospital has set aside other moneys to pay debt service on the Series 2000 Bonds and Series 2007 Bonds, and (b) there are remaining proceeds on deposit in the project accounts created for the refunded bonds. What should the hospital do with these moneys?

Assume that the hospital is a political subdivision and the hospital’s bonds are general obligation bonds. The Series 2000 Bonds and Series 2007 Bonds are being refunded mid-year, and levied moneys that were to be used to pay debt service remain in the bond fund. How do those proceeds need to be used?

6. How Should Tax Issues Be Disclosed?

As the Series 2016 Bond transaction progresses, the underwriter asks whether any of the identified tax issues should be disclosed. How do you answer, given that bond counsel is generally responsible for the “TAX MATTERS” discussion in the official statement?

The primary authority regarding municipal securities disclosure is 17 CFR 240.15c2-12 covering both initial offerings and continuing disclosure. Initial offerings in excess of certain minimum amounts must be accompanied by an official statement, and underwriters must not participate in an offering without a written agreement binding the issuer or other appropriate party to provide ongoing disclosure of, among other things, “adverse tax opinions, the issuance by the Internal Revenue Service of proposed or final determinations of taxability, Notices of Proposed Issue (IRS Form 5707-TEB) or other material notices or determinations with respect to the tax status of the security, or other material events affecting the tax status of tax security.”

Do all/any of the identified issues constitute “material events affecting the tax status” of the Series 2016 Bonds? If you believe that available corrective action allows the issuance of an unqualified opinion, have you then concluded that no material event exists? Conversely, if a material event exists with respect to the Series 2016 Bonds, can you opine? What about disclosure obligations with respect to the Series 2000 and Series 2007 Bonds?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 177

Page 182: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-2

IV. Investing or Not Investing Escrow Fund

The bond indentures for the Series 2000 Bonds and Series 2007 Bonds permit the legal defeasance of such bonds either by (1) gross funding the escrow account or (2) “net refunding” by investing the escrow account in accordance with a verification report. It turns out that, given the relatively short defeasance periods, open market securities and SLGS have negative returns after paying for the verification report. Though the economic impact of such negative returns is minimal, the financial advisor tells the hospital to gross fund the escrow account. Do you have any concerns?

The anti-abuse rules contained in Treas. Reg. § 1.148-10 generally come to mind, but do these facts suggest any type of abuse? Bonds of an issue are arbitrage bonds under these regulations if an “abusive arbitrage device” is used in connection with the issue. An abusive arbitrage device is, among other things, an action that has the effect of overburdening the market by, for example, causing the issuance of more bonds than otherwise reasonably necessary, or issuing bonds earlier than otherwise reasonably necessary. Further, an advance refunding issue is an abusive transaction if the issue has “excess gross proceeds,” as described in Treas. Reg. § 1.148-10(c). In an environment with high interest rates, the issuer’s decision to forgo investment earnings by gross funding may suggest that the refunding bonds have been issued in a larger amount to cover the principal and interest payments on the refunded bonds, or that the refunding bonds were issued earlier than necessary. Imputed earnings resulting from the forgone investments may also be viewed as excess gross proceeds that exceed the regulatory threshold. Are any of these concerns particularly relevant when the escrow period is short and when no realistic returns are available in the market?

V. Explaining the Multipurpose Issue Allocation Rules

You note that the Series 2007 Bonds were a “multipurpose issue” that was sold in two series. The Series 2007A Bonds purported to finance the construction of the Birth Center. The Series 2007B Bonds purported to refund, on an advance refunding basis, the Series 1997 Bonds. The official statement for the Series 2007 Bonds identified separate maturity schedules for the two series of bonds. The Series 2016 Bonds are to advance refund only the Series 2007A Bonds (i.e.,the new money portion of the Series 2007 Bonds).

After careful sleuthing, you discover that the allocation of bond maturities of each series of the Series 2007 Bonds shown in the official statement for the bonds does not comply with any of the multipurpose issue allocation methods set forth in Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(h). An allocation that is in compliance with one of these methods would cause a substantially smaller portion of the outstanding Series 2007A Bonds to be eligible for an advance refunding, notwithstanding the purported designation in the official statement of such bonds as new money bonds. How do you explain this issue to the hospital and its irritable financial advisor? Consider the following statutory and regulatory framework when you discuss the issue. (See attached Treas. Reg. §§ 1.141-13(d), 1.148-9(h), 1.148-9(i) and 1.150-1(c))

A. The Internal Revenue Code restrictions generally apply to an issue, but under certain circumstances one may divide a multipurpose issue into pieces that are tested, for various tax law purposes, separately.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 178

Page 183: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-2

B. Treas. Reg. § 1.150-1(c) defines an “issue,” and Treas. Reg. § 1.150-1(c)(3) allows separate issue treatment for bonds that finance separate “purposes.”

i. However, separate issue treatment does not apply for purposes of the advance refunding restrictions of I.R.C. § 149(d), the private activity bond limits of I.R.C. § 141, the arbitrage restrictions of I.R.C. § 148, and the hedge bonds tests of I.R.C. § 149(g).

ii. Separate purposes under Treas. Reg. § 1.150-1 include refunding a separate prior issue or financing integrated or functionally related capital projects, or discrete purposes.

C. Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(h) allows multipurpose allocations among certain “purposes” under I.R.C. § 148.

i. However, these multipurpose allocations do not apply to arbitrage yield matters, rebate restrictions and reserve fund sizing determinations.

ii. Allocations must be based on separate “purposes,” including, among others, a discrete governmental purpose of refunding a separate issue.

iii. Specific rules direct how one must allocate bonds of multipurpose issues with refunding components. See Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(h)(4)(v). Safe harbor methods of allocating bonds include the following methods:

1. Pro rata method of Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(h)(4)(v)(A)

2. Savings method (or “less then, equal to, or proportionate” method) of Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(h)(4)(v)(B) (consider issued with maturity extensions)

3. Weighted economic life test of Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(h)(4)(v)(C) (though this method can be difficult to apply)

D. Treas. Reg. § 1.141-13(d) allows one to allocate multipurpose issues for purposes under I.R.C. § 141. The methods in Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(h) must be used.

E. New mixed-use Treas. Reg. § 1.141-6 corrects Treas. Reg. § 1.141-13(d), making clear that each of the prior issue components must independently be a tax-exempt bonds, but not necessarily the entire multipurpose issue tested in the aggregate.

i. New regulations allow combination of a series of private activity bonds with a series of governmental bonds, such as for facilities at airports.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 179

Page 184: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-2

ii. Consider the definition of “project” under these new mixed use rules, which may differ from the “purpose” definitions in Treas. Reg. §§ 1.148-9(h) and 1.141-13(d).

VI. Whistleblowers

Assume a remedial action was not taken in connection with a deliberate action for the refunded bonds. Your client decides not to correct the issue. What do you advise your client regarding potential whistleblowers?

Pursuant to I.R.C. § 7623, whistleblowers may be entitled to up to 30 percent of the amount (including penalties, interest, additions to tax and other amounts) recovered by the Internal Revenue Service in an action brought to the Internal Revenue Service’s attention by the whistleblower. As far back as 2011, The Bond Buyer reported that the Internal Revenue Service was evaluating upwards of 30 whistleblower claims. See “IRS Hears 30 Charges of Abuse,” TheBond Buyer, May 9, 2011 (online at http://bondbuyer.com/issues/120_89/irs_whistle_blower-1026476-1.html). In addition, whistleblower representation has been offered by many law firms with some practitioners now focused on municipal securities.

As you talk with your client, topics to discuss include effect of foregone remediation and any potential violation, available defenses, isolating impact to the prior bonds, and presence of potentially disgruntled or opportunistic employees.

C. REGULATORY REFERENCES

Attached on the following pages are full versions or excerpts of the following regulations and resources discussed in sections A and B above:

Treas. Reg. § 1.141-6 (T.D. 9741) (Final Allocation and Accounting Regulations) Treas. Reg. § 1.141-13(d) (“Refunding Issues”) Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(h) (“Arbitrage Rules for Refunding Issues”) Treas. Reg. § 1.148-9(i) (“Arbitrage Rules for Refunding Issues”) Treas. Reg. § 1.150-1(c) (“Definition of Issue”) I.R.M. 7.2.3

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 180

Page 185: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 181

Page 186: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-3

T-3 APPLYING THE ALLOCATION AND ACCOUNTING REGULATIONS

Chair:

Bruce M. Serchuk Nixon Peabody, LLP – Washington, DC

Panelists:

Linda B.Schakel Ballard Spahr LLP – Washington, DC John J. Cross III Department of the Treasury - Washington, DCJohanna L. Som de Cerff Internal Revenue Service - Washington, DCClifford M. Gerber Sidley Austin LLP – San Francisco, CA George G. Wolf Orrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP – San Francisco, CA

I. Private Activity Bond Tests. In general, interest on State and local governmental bonds is excludable from gross income under Section 103 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986 (the “Code”) upon satisfaction of certain requirements. Interest on a private activity bond, other than a qualified private activity bond within the meaning of Section 141, is not excludable under Section 103. Section 141 provides certain tests that are used to determine whether a State or local bond is a private activity bond. These tests include the private business use test and the private security or payment test in Section 141(b), and the private loan financing test in Section 141(c). Section 145 provides similar tests that apply in modified form to qualified 501(c)(3) bonds.

II. History. Final regulations under Section 141 of the Code were published in the Federal Register on January 16, 1997 (the “1997 Regulations”), to provide guidance on the private activity bond restrictions. The 1997 Regulations reserved most of the general allocation and accounting rules for purposes of Section 141.

An advance notice of proposed rulemaking was published in the Federal Register on September 23, 2002, setting forth allocation and accounting rules for tax-exempt bond proceeds used to finance mixed-use output facilities (the “Output ANPRM”). A notice of proposed rulemaking was published in the Federal Register on September 26, 2006 (71 FR 56072), regarding allocation and accounting rules for tax-exempt bond proceeds, including special rules for mixed-use projects, and rules regarding the treatment of partnerships for purposes of Section 141 (the “Proposed Regulations”). A notice of proposed rulemaking and was published in the Federal Register on July 21, 2003 setting forth rules regarding the amount and allocation of nonqualified bonds for purposes of certain remedial actions under Sections 141 and 142 (the “2003 Proposed Regulations”). The portion of the 2003 Proposed Regulations relating to Section 142 was finalized in 2004.

On October 26, 2015, final regulations (the “Final Regulations”) were released providing guidance on the allocation and accounting rules that are to be used for purposes of applying the private activity bond tests under Section 141 of the Code.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 182

Page 187: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-3

The Final Regulations finalize Output ANPRM, the Proposed Regulations and the portion of the 2003 Proposed Regulations relating to Section 141 of the Code. As described below, the focus of the Final Regulations is to permit governmental entities and 501(c)(3) organizations to use tax-exempt bonds to finance the governmental or 501(c)(3) portions of a project when the project is used both for those purposes and for private business use in excess of the amounts permitted under the private activity bond tests. The Final Regulations generally apply to bonds sold on or after January 25, 2016, but the rules regarding remedial actions apply to deliberate actions that occur on or after January 25, 2016 regardless of the sale date of the applicable bonds.

III. Proposed Rules.

A. Proposed Regulations. The Proposed Regulations provided several allocation rules. The Proposed Regulations provided that proceeds and other funds generally may be allocated to expenditures using any reasonable, consistently applied accounting method, and that the allocation of proceeds and other funds to expenditures must be consistent with the allocation of proceeds and other funds for purposes of the arbitrage investment restrictions under section 148. The Proposed Regulations provided generally that proceeds and other funds allocated to capital expenditures for a capital project are treated as allocated ratably throughout the project in proportion to the relative amounts of proceeds and other funds spent on that project. The Proposed Regulations further provided that generally proceeds and other funds are allocated to both governmental use and private business use of the project in proportion to the relative amounts of each source of funding spent on the project.

The Proposed Regulations defined a project to include functionally related or integrated facilities located on the same site, or on geographically proximate sites, that are reasonably expected to be placed in service within the same 12-month period. The Proposed Regulations provided certain special rules for the treatment of subsequent improvements to, and replacements of, a project. These proposed special rules treated subsequent improvements and replacements made more than 12 months after the original project was placed in service as part of the same project if the improvements and replacements were within the size, function, and usable space or the original design of the project.

The Proposed Regulations contained elective allocation rules for mixed-use projects. The Proposed Regulations defined a mixed-use project as a project that is reasonably expected to be used for more than the de minimis amount of private business use permitted under the private activity bond tests. The Proposed Regulations provided two alternative elective allocation methods for a mixed-use project, the discrete physical portion allocation method and the undivided portion allocation method. The Proposed Regulations required the issuer to make a timely, written election, including preliminary and final allocations of proceeds and other funds, to use one of these alternative methods.

The discrete portion method allowed for dividing a mixed-use project into physically discrete portions and allocating the different sources of funds to the various discrete portions using a reasonable, consistently applied method that reflects the proportionate benefit to be derived by the various users of the project. Under the undivided portion allocation method,

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 183

Page 188: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-3

projects were divided into governmental use and private business use portions on a notional, rather than physical, basis with tax-exempt proceeds allocated to the governmental use portion and the other funds allocated to the private business use portion. The availability of the proposed undivided portion allocation method was limited to circumstances in which the issuer reasonably expected that governmental use and private business use of the project would occur simultaneously on the same basis, or at different times.

Under the Proposed Regulations, the undivided portion allocation method limited the targeting of qualified equity to private business use of the project to that percentage of the private business use equal to the percentage of capital expenditures of the project financed by the qualified equity, and similarly limited the targeting of proceeds to government use of the project to that percentage of the government use equal to the percentage of capital expenditures of the project financed by the proceeds. For projects other than output facilities, these limits applied to each one-year period of the measurement period. The Proposed Regulations defined qualified equity to mean proceeds of taxable bonds and funds not derived from a borrowing that are spent on the same project as proceeds of the purported governmental bonds to which the private activity bond tests will be applied. The Proposed Regulations further provided that qualified equity does not include equity interests in real property or tangible personal property.

The Proposed Regulations permitted proceeds of taxable bonds and funds not derived from borrowing that are used to retire tax-exempt governmental bonds to be treated as qualified equity under certain circumstances. This allowed the use of funds other than tax-exempt bond proceeds to finance portions of projects that are expected to be used for private business use in the future.

The Proposed Regulations provided that if proceeds of more than one issue are allocated to capital expenditures of a mixed-use project to which the issuer elects to apply the discrete physical portion or undivided portion allocation method, then proceeds of those issues are allocated ratably to a discrete portion or undivided portion to which any proceeds are allocated in proportion to their relative shares of the total proceeds of such issues used for the project (the multiple issue rule).

The Proposed Regulations generally treated a partnership as an entity that is a nongovernmental person for purposes of the private activity bond tests. However, if all of the partners in a partnership were governmental persons, the Proposed Regulations provided a limited exception that would treat the partnership as an aggregate of its partners (that is, as governmental persons) for these purposes.

B. 2003 Proposed Regulations. The 2003 Proposed Regulations included amendments relating to the amount and allocation of nonqualified bonds to be remediated as a result of a deliberate action causing the private business tests or the private loan financing test to be met. The 2003 Proposed Regulations provided that the amount of the nonqualified bonds is that portion of the outstanding bonds in an amount that, if the remaining bonds were issued on the date on which the deliberate action occurs, the remaining bonds would not meet the private business use test or private loan financing test, as applicable. For this purpose, the amount of

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 184

Page 189: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-3

private business use is the greatest percentage of private business use in any one-year period commencing with the one-year period in which the deliberate action occurs.

IV. Final Regulations. The Final Regulations simplify the rules by providing a general allocation rule applicable to all projects, and a special allocation rule—the “undivided portion” allocation method—that is applied to “eligible mixed-use” projects. The Final Regulations further provide revised and expanded definitions of a “project” and an “eligible mixed-use project”.

A. General Allocation Rules. The Final Regulations provide that allocations of proceeds and other sources of funds to expenditures under Section 1.148–6(d) apply for purposes of Sections 1.141–1 through 1.141–15.

Except for eligible mixed-use projects, bond proceeds and other sources of funds (including two or more tax-exempt issues) are allocated throughout a project to the governmental use and private business use in proportion to the relative amounts of those sources of funding spent on the project.

A “project” is defined as one or more facilities or capital projects, including land, buildings, equipment or other property, financed in whole or in part with proceeds of the issue. This definition permits issuers in its bond documents to identify as a single project all of the properties to be financed by proceeds of a single bond issue, and to identify specific properties or portions of properties regardless of the location or placed-in-service date of the properties. This expanded definition of project further allows issuers to identify the different projects financed by separate issues of governmental bonds and qualified private activity bonds, such as exempt facility bonds issued for airport facilities. The Final Regulations clarify through an example that improvements to a project financed with a subsequent bond issue are treated as a separate project.

B. Undivided Portion Allocation Rule for Mixed-Use Projects. The sources of funding allocated to capital expenditures for an eligible mixed-use project are allocated to undivided portions of the eligible mixed-use project and the governmental use and private business use of the eligible mixed-use project. Qualified equity is allocated first to the private business use of the eligible mixed-use project and then to governmental use, and proceeds are allocated first to the governmental use and then to private business use, using the percentages of the eligible mixed-use project financed with the respective sources and the percentages of the respective uses. Thus, if the percentage of the eligible mixed-use project financed with qualified equity is less than the percentage of private business use of the project, all of the qualified equity is allocated to the private business use. Proceeds are allocated to the balance of the private business use of the project. Similarly, if the percentage of the eligible mixed-use project financed with proceeds is less than the percentage of governmental use of the project, all of the proceeds are allocated to the governmental use, and qualified equity is allocated to the balance of the governmental use of the project. Further, if proceeds of more than one issue finance the eligible mixed-use project, proceeds of each issue are allocated ratably to the uses to which proceeds are allocated in proportion to the relative amounts of the proceeds of such issues allocated to the eligible mixed-use project. For private business use measured under

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 185

Page 190: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-3

Section 1.141–3(g), qualified equity and proceeds are allocated to the uses of the eligible mixed-use project in each one-year period under Section 1.141–3(g)(4).

Under the foregoing rule, the Final Regulations eliminate the “discrete portion” method and the election requirement. Instead, the IRS has expanded the “undivided portion” allocation method to include all measureable use and has made it the exclusive allocation method for eligible mixed-use projects. In order to expand the undivided portion method for allocating proceeds, the IRS has removed the requirement contained in the Proposed Regulations that governmental use and private use occur simultaneously. The IRS believes that the use of the undivided portion method for all projects will be simpler and more administrable than the two allocation methods provided in the Proposed Regulations and will cover all circumstances that would have otherwise been covered by the discrete portion method.

The Final Regulations include special rules for applying the undivided portion allocation method to public power and other output facilities. In particular, if undivided ownership interests in a facility are owned by governmental persons or private businesses, all owners must share ownership, output, and operating expenses in proportion to their contributions to the costs of the facility in order to finance the governmental portion of the facility. These changes finalize the rules provided in the 2002 ANPRM.

C. Definitions of Eligible Mixed-Use Project and Qualified Equity. The Final Regulations define an “eligible mixed-use project” as a project that is financed with proceeds of bonds that, when issued, purported to be governmental bonds (as defined in Section 1.150–1(b)) and with qualified equity pursuant to the same plan of financing (within the meaning of Section 1.150–1(c)(1)(ii)). An eligible mixed-use project must be wholly owned by one or more governmental persons or by a partnership in which at least one governmental person is a partner.

Qualified equity for this purpose includes proceeds of taxable bonds (excluding build America bonds and other tax-advantaged bonds) and funds of the issuer that are spent on the same eligible mixed-use project as the proceeds of the applicable bonds. Qualified equity does not include equity interests in property or funds used to redeem or repay governmental bonds.

Qualified equity finances a project under the same plan of financing that includes the applicable bonds if the qualified equity pays for capital expenditures of the project on a date that is no earlier than a date on which such expenditures would be eligible for reimbursement by proceeds of the applicable bonds under Section 1.150–2(d)(2) (regardless of whether the applicable bonds are reimbursement bonds) and, except for a reasonable retainage (within the meaning of Section 1.148–7(h)), no later than the date on which the measurement period begins.

D. Other Allocation Rules. Private payments for a project are allocated in accordance with Section 1.141–4. Payments under an output contract that result in private business use of an eligible mixed-use project are allocated to the same source of funding (notwithstanding Section 1.141–4(c)(3)(v) (regarding certain allocations of private payments to equity)) allocated to the private business use from such contract.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 186

Page 191: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-3

Proceeds used for expenditures for common costs (for example, issuance costs, qualified guarantee fees, or reasonably required reserve or replacement funds) are allocated in accordance with Section 1.141–3(g)(6). Proceeds, as allocated under Section 1.141–3(g)(6) to an eligible mixed-use project, are allocated to the uses of the project in the same proportions as the proceeds allocated to the uses under the special allocation rules for eligible mixed-use projects described above.

In general, proceeds are allocated to bonds in accordance with the rules for allocations of proceeds to bonds for separate purposes of multipurpose issues in Section 1.141–13(d). For an issue that is not a multipurpose issue (or is a multipurpose issue for which the issuer has not made a multipurpose allocation), proceeds are allocated to bonds ratably in a manner similar to the allocation of proceeds to projects under the general rule described above

E. Partnerships. The Final Regulations make significant changes to the rules contained in the Proposed Regulations regarding the treatment of partnerships. The preamble to the Final Regulations indicates that these changes are made in recognition of the development of various financing and management structures for governmental and nonprofit facilities that involve the participation of private business, and to remove barriers to tax-exempt financing of the government’s or nonprofit’s portion of the benefit of property used in joint ventures. Accordingly, the Final Regulations reverse the rules in the Proposed Regulations which treated partnerships as a separate entity that is a nongovernmental person (unless each of the partners was a governmental person or a qualified 501(c)(3) entity) and instead provide that all partnerships should be treated as an aggregate of its partners. In addition, the Final Regulations provide that this rule applies for purposes of the requirement that facilities financed with qualified 501(c)(3) bonds be owned by either a governmental person or section 501(c)(3) organization.

The Final Regulations provide a rule for measuring the private business use of financed property resulting from the use of property by a partnership that includes a private partner. The amount of this use is the private partner’s share of the amount of the use of the property by the partnership that is based on the private partner’s largest share of any partnership item of income, gain, loss, deduction or credit attributable to the time the partnership uses the property during the measurement period. The Final Regulations also provide that an issuer may determine a private partner’s share under guidance published in the Internal Revenue Bulletin.

F. Remedial Actions. The Final Regulations expand the anticipatory redemption rules contained in the Proposed Regulations that permit issuers to redeem bonds in advance of a deliberate action that would cause the private business tests or the private loan financing test to be met. By contrast, the existing regulations only provide for remedial actions after the deliberate action has occurred. Thus, for example, this rule would allow a governmental owner of a hospital to redeem its tax-exempt bonds that financed the facility at a time when it was considering the sale of the facility, but has not yet taken any action to do so. To utilize the provision in the Final Regulations, the issuer must declare its official intent on or before the date on which it redeems or defeases such bonds, and the declaration of intent must identify the financed property or loan with respect to which the anticipatory remedial action is being taken

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 187

Page 192: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-3

and describe the deliberate action that potentially may result in the private business tests being met (for example, sale of financed property that the buyer may then lease to a nongovernmental person). Rules similar to those in Section 1.150–2(e) (regarding official intent for reimbursement bonds) apply to these declarations of intent, including the rules relating to deviations in the descriptions of the project or loan and deliberate action and the reasonableness of the official intent. While the Final Regulations simplify and eliminate many of the limitations contained in the Proposed Regulations, they permit anticipatory remedial actions to be taken only when the action in question would be a deliberate action (i.e., the private activity bond limits are expected to be exceeded), which may limit the ability of issuers who want to redeem bonds as a “best practice” regardless of whether the deliberate action in fact results in exceeding the limits.

The Final Regulations adopt the rules in the 2003 Proposed Regulations which provide that “nonqualified bonds” for purposes of the remedial action rules are the portion of the outstanding bonds in an amount that, if the remaining bonds were issued on the date on which the deliberate action occurs, the remaining bonds would not meet the private activity bond tests. For this purpose, the amount of private business use is the greatest percentage of private business use in any one-year period beginning with the one-year period in which the deliberate action occurs. The allocations of nonqualified bonds must be made on a pro rata basis or an issuer may treat any bonds as the nonqualified bonds so long as the remaining weighted average maturity of the issue is not extended.

G. Multipurpose Issue Allocations. The Final Regulations amend the existing private activity bond regulations for refunding issues to clarify that issuers may issue bonds that are intended to be tax-exempt private activity bonds in part and governmental bonds in part, an issue which often arises in airport financings.

H. Effective Dates. The Final Regulations generally apply to bonds sold on or after January 25, 2016, provided, that for bonds subject to the 1997 Regulations, the rules regarding remedial actions apply to deliberate actions (regardless of the date the bonds were issued) that occur on or after January 25, 2016. The Final Regulations allow permissive application of (1) the partnership provisions and the allocation and accounting rules in whole, but not in part, to bonds to which the 1997 Final Regulations apply; and (2) the multipurpose rule to bonds to which the refunding rules in Section 1.141-13 apply.

V. Hypotheticals.

A. Annual Measurement and Carryover Tenants. County Y wants to purchase a building from Company A for $100x on Date 1. Following the sale, Company A wants to lease back the entire building from County Y for 2 years, ending on Date 3. This lease results in 100% private business use in each year during its term. Assume the use by Company A is use that is unrelated to the use by County Y. Assume further that County Y has a policy of issuing 20 year bonds for building acquisition or construction, and proposes to issue 20 year bonds for the acquisition.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 188

Page 193: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-3

Assuming a 20 year measurement period, the amount of private business use is 10%, but because the use by Company A is unrelated, it is subject to a 5% limitation on private business use.

Can County Y issue $95x of 20-year tax-exempt bonds on Date 1 to purchase the building? Can County Y issue any amount of 20-year tax-exempt bonds to purchase the building? Under Section 1.141-6(b)(1) of the Final Regulations, qualified equity and proceeds are allocated to the uses of an eligible mixed-use project in each one-year period under Section 1.141-3(g)(4). Does this rule mean there is no way to issue any 20-year tax-exempt bonds for the building acquisition? What solutions are there to this problem? Do those solutions make policy sense? Why doesn’t qualified equity get measured over the measurement period just like private business use is measured over the measurement period?

B. Project and Qualified Equity definitions.

1. Part 1. City A plans to issue bonds to finance two projects, the construction of a four-story parking garage for $25x and office building improvements that are unrelated to the parking garage for $15x. The total cost of the parking garage is 35x and the total cost of the office improvements is $20x, with the difference financed with amounts that would qualify as qualified equity (total qualified equity of $15x). One of the four floors of the parking garage will be used in a manner that is expected to result in private business use.

What is the project financed with the bonds? If the City chooses, can it treat the one floor of the garage expected to be used for a private business use as not part of the project and not financed with the bonds? Is there any advantage to doing so? Can the City treat the parking garage and the road improvements as separate projects? If yes, does that require a multipurpose allocation under Section 1.141-13(d)?

2. Part 2. Assume the facts are the same as in Part 1, but that the total amount of qualified equity is $5x, rather than $15x. In addition, assume that the City was separately contemplating using $10x of its own funds to finance certain road improvements that are not expected to have any private business use.

Can the City include the road improvements in the project so that the $10x of funds that were going to be used for the road improvements counts as qualified equity for the entire project? Is there any particular amount of bond proceeds that have to be used on the road improvements in order for them to be part of the project? Do the answers change if the $10x of funds for the roads represent grants that are restricted to being used for road improvements?

3. Multiple Bond Issues. Authority M, a transit agency, issues multiple bond issues per year. Each bond issue finances multiple projects, and often there is some overlap in the projects being financed by each bond issue, but never a complete overlap.

The Final Regulations provide that if proceeds of more than one issue finance the eligible mixed-use project, proceeds of each issue are allocated ratably to the uses to

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 189

Page 194: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-3

which proceeds are allocated in proportion to the relative amounts of the proceeds of such issues allocated to the eligible mixed-use project.

How does this rule apply to Authority M? Is the Authority not permitted to allocate proceeds to the separate bond issues in a way to manage compliance with the private business tests?

C. Project and Qualified Equity definitions and Timing.

1. Part 1. State N plans to issue bonds to finance the construction of a library for $50x and the construction of a courthouse for $75x. The library will be placed in service at the end of two years and the courthouse will be placed in service at the end of three years. The State plans to invest $25x of its own funds that it intends to be treated as qualified equity and it intends for the library and the courthouse to be part of the same project.

How and when does State N have to identify the project and the qualified equity?

In order for State N’s funds to be treated as qualified equity, the Final Regulations provide that it must be expended under the same plan of finance. The Final Regulations refer to the Section 1.150–1(c)(1)(ii) rule relating to common plan of finance in the definition of issue, and then separately states that qualified equity finances a project under the same plan of financing that includes the applicable bonds if the qualified equity pays for capital expenditures of the project on a date that is no earlier than a date on which such expenditures would be eligible for reimbursement by proceeds of the applicable bonds under Section 1.150–2(d)(2) (regardless of whether the applicable bonds are reimbursement bonds) and, except for a reasonable retainage (within the meaning of Section 1.148–7(h)), no later than the date on which the measurement period begins. Under Section 1.141-3(g)(2)(i) states that the measurement period for property begins on the later of the issue date or the date the property is placed in service.

Do the library and the courthouse have separate measurement periods? If so, are there any timing limits on the expenditure of the equity given the common plan of finance rule sets the date on which the measurement period begins as the last date to count amounts as qualified equity? Does the expected timing for spending the equity limit the State’s ability to treat the entire $25x of funds as qualified equity for the combined library/courthouse project? If it does, one solution is to treat the library and the courthouse as separate projects, but doesn’t that defeat the purpose of the flexible project definition? How is the qualified equity accounted for during the year between placed in service dates? What limits does the consistency requirement of Section 1.141-6(a)(1) put on allocating proceeds and qualified equity differently for Sections 141 and 148?

2. Part 2. Assume the facts in part 1, except that the State receives a bill for the courthouse for $7.5x two months after the date it is placed in service that it wants to pay with a portion of its funds being used for the project. Can all of these amounts be treated as qualified equity? If the entire $7.5k cannot be treated as qualified equity, is there amount which

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 190

Page 195: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-3

may be treated as qualified equity? Is the timing rule that states that qualified equity must be spent by the date on which the measurement period begins a safe harbor?

3. Part 3. Assume the facts in part 1, but 10 years later State needs to expend funds for rehabilitation of the courthouse, and assume there has been private business use of the courthouse in excess of the applicable limits, but less than the qualified equity in the project.

Must State N invest additional qualified equity in order to issue any tax-exempt bonds to finance the rehabilitation? To the extent the rehabilitation is of space that does not have any private business use, is there any reason that the State cannot have a different project definition for the subsequent issue of bonds?

4. Part 4. Assume City Y is building a new subway line at a cost of $3000x, of which $2700x will be financed with bonds and the remainder with City funds. The construction period is expected to take seven years. The bonds will be issued in three tranches—the first at the beginning of the second year of construction, the second at the beginning of the fourth year of construction and the third at the beginning of the sixth year. Prior to expending any funds, the City passes a declaration of intent for the project.

Assume the City wants to expend its own funds first, and then expend the bond proceeds. Will its own funds be treated as qualified equity for the entire project? The expenditures would not be eligible for reimbursement by proceeds of the year six bonds under Section 1.150–2(d)(2) (even if the project qualified for a five year temporary period).

D. Partnerships.

1. Private Loans. Authority B enters into a partnership with Company T to operate a toll road, Partnership R. Under Section 1.141-1(e) of the Final Regulations, a partnership is treated as an aggregate of its partners, rather than an entity. Under Section 1.141-3(g)(3)(v)(A), the amount of private business use by an nongovernmental person resulting from use of property by a partnership in which that nongovernmental person is a partner is that nongovernmental partners share of the amount of use of the property by the partnership.

Under these rules, Authority B can finance a portion of its contribution to the partnership, but can Partnership R be a conduit borrower directly? While the aggregate rule is set forth in Section 1.141-1, which applies to all of Section 141, there is no provision in Section 1.141-5, relating to private loans, that is a corollary to the provision in Section 1.141-3(g)(3)(v)(A). Does this matter?

2. Management Contracts. University L is contemplating the construction of a new dining facility on its campus. It intends to enter into a management contract with Provider S to operate the facility. The contract will provide that University L will provide the dining facility and furnish the facility. The provider’s employees will prepare and serve the food, and the provider will be responsible for the acquisition of the all of the food to be

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 191

Page 196: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-3

served. Any profits from the dining facility will be split, 40% to University L and 60% to Provider S.

Under the definition of private business use in effect prior to the Final Regulations, the management contract results in 100% private business use of the dining facility. Under Section 1.141-1(e) and Section 1.141-3(g)(3)(v)(A), can this arrangement be structured as a partnership so that, for example, University L could finance 40% (or some other percentage) of the cost of the dining facility with tax-exempt bonds? How is that impacted by the parties’ responsibilities for the costs of constructing and operating the facility?

E. Anticipatory Remediation and Remedial Actions.

1. Eligibility and Application. University W, a qualified 501(c)(3) organization, previously had $200x of tax-exempt bonds issued on its behalf to build a sports arena to be used for its sports teams. A portion of the proceeds of the bonds in an amount equal to 1% of the proceeds is used to finance costs of issuance. The University wants to enter into a lease of the arena in the future, and based on its current expectation, it expects a lease that will result in 3% of the proceeds of the bonds being used for a private business use and an equivalent amount of private payments. Assume there is no other private business use of the sports arena.

May University W apply the anticipatory remedial action rules to eliminate the private business use resulting from the lease give the amount of the expected private business use? If not, what would the University need to expect in order to change the answer to this question? Is it sufficient that the University hopes to have additional leases of the arena, and based on those hopes, it estimates the amount of private business use and private payments that may occur is in excess of the permitted amounts of private business use and private payments? Or must the University have an expectation of the uses?

Section 1.141-12(d)(3) of the Final Regulations provides that rules similar to Section 1.150-2(e)(3) apply to declarations of intent under that rule. That section states that “[o]n the date of the declaration, the issuer must have a reasonable expectation (as defined in Section 1.148-1(b)) that it will reimburse the original expenditure with proceeds of an obligation. Official intents declared as a matter of course or in amounts substantially in excess of the amounts expected to be necessary for the project (e.g., blanket declarations) are not reasonable.”

Assuming University W may apply the anticipatory remedial action rules, is it sufficient that it make a declaration of official intent, or must the conduit issuer take action as well?

2. Amount of Nonqualified Bonds (1.141-12(d)(1) or (3)). Assume the facts are the same as under part 1, but that the amount of the lease that University expects to enter into is expected to result in 10% of the proceeds of the bonds being used for a private business use. With the costs of issuance, this results in 11% of the proceeds of the bonds being used for a private business use.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 192

Page 197: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-3

University W wants to eliminate all of the private business use associated with the bonds. Given the definition of nonqualified bonds in Section 1.141-12(j), may the University accomplish this? If not, is there any policy reason why this shouldn’t be permitted?

3. Deviations. Town C issued bonds to make improvements to several buildings owned and used by the County. Several years later, the Town is encountering financial difficulties, and is considering selling one or more buildings in order to provide financial relief. The Town wants to pass a declaration of official intent that simply says it may sell one or buildings that may have been improved with proceeds of the bonds, and defease a portion of the bonds in an amount that exceeds the amount of bonds allocable to some, but not all, of the buildings financed with the bonds.

Section 1.150-2(e)(2)(i) provides that “[t]he official intent generally describes the project for which the original expenditure is paid and states the maximum principal amount of obligations expected to be issued for the project. A project includes any property, project, or program (e.g., highway capital improvement program, hospital equipment acquisition, or school building renovation).” Is the Town’s declaration of intent sufficient?

Assume the Town ultimately determines not to sell any buildings financed with the bonds, but then decides that it is considering leasing out certain buildings, some of which were improved with the bonds, and some that were improved with a separate issue of bonds. Does the anticipatory remediation taken with respect to the sale of the buildings apply to the lease of the buildings financed with the bonds? If not, does the fact that the Town did not have any private business use following its initial anticipatory remediation impact its ability to pass a subsequent anticipatory remediation?

4. Amount of Nonqualified Bonds. School O, a charter school and a 501(c)(3) organization, has bonds issued on its behalf to construct a secondary school. The bonds have a term of 30 years. Five years after the bonds are issued, the School enters into a management contract with a nongovernmental person the results in private business use of the secondary school. The term of the contract is three years, and it relates to the entire school.

What is the amount of nonqualified bonds? The amount of the private business use is 10% over the term of the bonds, but the greatest amount of private business use after the deliberate action is 100%.

F. Effective Dates—Retroactive Application. University V had $200x of bonds issued on its behalf in 2008 to finance multiple projects. Some of the projects financed with the bonds were also financed in part with funds of the University. Within the time period prescribed under Section 1.148-6(d), the University did a final allocation of proceeds and other amounts to the various projects.

University V wants to utilize Section 1.141-15(l)(2) of the Final Regulations and apply the Final Regulations to the bonds. May the University do this to redefine the project and provide for qualified equity that can be applied to the entire project?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 193

Page 198: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-4

Hot Topics Tax Outline Tax and Securities Law Institute Thursday, March 10th at 8:00 am Thursday, March 10th at 4:15 pm

Panelists: Michael Larsen, Parker Poe Adams & Bernstein LLP, Charleston, SC John Cross, United States Department of the Treasury, Washington, DC Spence W. Hanemann, IRS Office of Chief Counsel, Washington, DC Richard J. Moore, Orrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP, San Francisco, CA Mitch Rapaport, Nixon Peabody LLP, Washington, DC Topics: Proposed Regulations - Political Subdivisions Long-Term Management Contracts and Private Business Use BABs Crossover Refundings

_______________________________________________________

Proposed Regulations – Political Subdivisions Background On February 23, 2016, the Treasury Department released Proposed Regulations that would provide guidance regarding the definition of a “political subdivision” under Section 1.103-1 of the Regulations. Many practitioners have expressed concerns with the Proposed Regulations, some of which are described below. Section 103(a) of the Code provides that, with certain exceptions, gross income does not include interest on any State or local bond. Section 103(c)(1) defines the term “State or local bond” to mean an obligation of a State or political subdivision thereof. “State” is defined in Code Section 103(c)(2) to include the District of Columbia and any possession of the United States. Regulations Section 1.103-1(b) defines “political subdivision” as “any division of any State or local governmental unit which is a municipal corporation or which has been designated the right to exercise part of the sovereign power of the unit.” In Shamberg, the 2nd Circuit, interpreting Section 22 of the Revenue Act of 1936 and Treasury Regulations 94, promulgated thereunder, which Regulations contained the same definition of political subdivision as the current Regulations, held that there are 3 elements of sovereign power: (1) the power of eminent domain, (2) the power to tax, and (3) the police power. Since Shamberg, other courts and the IRS have interpreted what it means to be a “political subdivision” by reference to the sovereign powers test. In August of 2013, the IRS released TAM 201334038, which called into question whether districts with a limited number of property owners, electors or taxpayers may ever qualify as a “division of a

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 194

Page 199: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-4

2

state or local government.” Both NABL and the ABA took issue with the TAM and its underlying rationale. Questions Under the Proposed Regulations 1. The Preamble to the Proposed Regulations states:

[c]ommenters have requested additional published guidance, to be applied prospectively, on which facts and circumstances are germane to an entity’s status as a political subdivision. The Treasury Department and IRS recognize the need to clarify the definition of political subdivision to provide greater certainty to prospective issuers and to promote greater consistency in how the definition is applied…

Prior to the release of the TAM, there did not seem to be much of a need for clarification regarding the definition of “political subdivision.” The last PLR on this issue came out in 2011. What changed?

Given that the regulations have been in place for a very long time, have been interpreted by the courts, and Congress has done nothing over the decades to suggest any unhappiness with the definition of political subdivision, was any consideration given to the authority to make dramatic changes to the definition of political subdivision?

2. The Preamble states the case law and administrative guidance interpreting the definition of political subdivision commonly consider whether the entity serves a public purpose and that, historically, whether an entity has a public purpose has focused on the purpose for which the entity was created, usually as set forth in the legislation authorizing the creation of the entity. Is that true?

3. Proposed Regulations Section 1.103-1(c) states that a political subdivision must have a “governmental purpose,” which is “based on, among other things, whether the entity carries out the public purposes that are set forth in the entity’s enabling legislation and whether the entity operates in a manner that provides a significant public benefit with no more than incidental private benefit.” (emphasis supplied)

a. The term “public purpose” is not defined in the Proposed Regulations. The Preamble states that, historically, the determination of whether an entity serves a public purpose has focused on the purpose for which it was created, usually as set forth in the legislation authorizing the creation of the entity, rather than its conduct after its creation. The Proposed Regulations, however, ask “whether the entity carries out the public purposes that are set forth in the entity’s enabling legislation.”

Is there an intended distinction in these two formulations? The explanation of the “historic” standard suggests that we need only to look at the purpose set forth in the authorizing legislation to determine whether it is public. The standard set forth in the Proposed Regulations requires that the entity carry out the public purposes that are set forth in the enabling legislation.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 195

Page 200: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-4

3

Why doesn’t the fact that an entity was formed pursuant to legislation render this requirement moot? The legislature provided for the creation of an entity. Isn’t that enough to demonstrate that there is a public purpose? If not, what is a public purpose? Are there examples of legislation authorizing the creation of an entity that would not perform a public purpose?

b. Where does the prohibition on “incidental private benefit” in this context come from? What does it mean for an entity to “operate in a manner that provides a significant public benefit with no more than incidental private benefit”? Neither term is defined in the Proposed Regulations, although the Preamble makes reference Revenue Ruling 90-74, which applied an “incidental private benefit” standard to determine whether income was included in gross income under Section 115 of the Code. Section 115 is aimed at entities that, by definition, are not political subdivisions. Is this an appropriate constraint in this context? Are these terms intended to have the same meanings as they do under Section 501(c)(3) of the Code? These terms aren’t defined in Code or Regulations, and the “facts and circumstances” law in this area, which doesn’t apply to governmental entities (other than those that have received 501(c)(3) status), is far from clear. The EO CPE Text, “Private Benefit Under Section 501(c)(3),” is 19 pages long and advises readers that they should consult a more comprehensive CPE text for a detailed discussion. The authorities under section 115 are very limited and we understand that the IRS personnel responsible for section 115 have applied the “incidental private benefit” test very restrictively.

The Tax Court, in American Campaign Academy v. Commissioner, 92 T.C. 1053 (1989) stated:

Prohibited private benefits may include an ‘advantage; profit; fruit; privilege; gain; [or] interest.’ Retired Teachers Legal Fund v. Commissioner, 78 T.C. 280, 286 (1982). Occasional economic benefits flowing to persons as an incidental consequence of an organization pursuing exempt charitable purposes will not generally constitute prohibited private benefits. Kentucky Bar Foundation v. Commissioner, 78 T.C. at 926. Thus, should petitioner be shown to benefit private interests, it will be deemed to further a nonexempt purpose under section 1.501(c)(3)-1(d)(1)(ii), Income Tax Regs. This nonexempt purpose will prevent petitioner from operating primarily for exempt purposes absent a showing that no more than an insubstantial part of its activities further the private interests or any other nonexempt purposes. Section 1.501(c)(3)-1(c)(1), Income Tax Regs.

So there’s that.

c. What impact does the public benefit/private benefit requirement mean for local governmental issuers? Do cities, counties and towns now have to take into account whether there may be a private benefit in connection with their financings? For example, would such a standard prevent a city from entering into arrangements

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 196

Page 201: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-4

4

giving rise to private business use? Can a political subdivision still make grants of tax-exempt proceeds to private entities?

4. The “governmental control” standard requires that (a) a State or local government has control, and (b) such control is vested in specified persons. Control is defined as:

[A]n ongoing right or power to direct significant actions of the entity. Rights or powers may establish control either individually or in the aggregate. Among rights or powers that may establish control, an ongoing ability to exercise one or more of the following significant rights or powers, on a discretionary and non-ministerial basis, constitutes control: the right or power both to approve and to remove a majority of the governing body of the entity; the right or power to elect a majority of the governing body of the entity in periodic elections of reasonable frequency; or the right or power to approve or direct the significant uses of funds or assets of the entity in advance of that use. Procedures designed to ensure the integrity of the entity but not to direct significant actions of the entity are insufficient to constitute control of an entity. Examples of such procedures include requirements for submission of audited financial statements of the entity to a higher level State or local governmental unit, open meeting requirements, and conflicts of interest limitations.

a. As a threshold matter, what’s the difference between a right and a power? This language is also in the definition of control in Treasury Regulations Section 1.150-1(e)(1).

b. The definition of control set forth above differs from the definition of “direct control” in Treasury Regulations Section 1.150-1(e)(1). Was this intended? The definition above suggests that the possession of one of the enumerated rights or powers conclusively establishes control, whereas the definition in Section 1.150-1(e)(1) is a facts and circumstances test.

c. What about indirect control, which is provided for in 1.150-1(e)(2) of the Treasury Regulations?

5. The “governmental control” standard requires that (a) a State or local government has control, and (b) such control is vested in specified persons. For these purposes, control is vested in the required persons if it resides with either or the both of:

(A) A State or local governmental unit possessing a substantial amount of each of the sovereign powers and acting through its governing body or through its duly authorized elected or appointed officials in their official capacities; or

(B) An electorate established under applicable State or local law of general application, provided the electorate is not a private faction (as defined in paragraph (c)(4)(iii) of this section).

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 197

Page 202: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-4

5

A “private faction” is defined, in general, as:

[A]ny electorate if the outcome of the exercise of control described in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section is determined solely by the votes of an unreasonably small number of private persons. The determination of whether a number of such private persons is unreasonably small depends on all of the facts and circumstances, including, without limitation, the entity's governmental purpose, the number of members in the electorate, the relationships of the members of the electorate to one another, the manner of apportionment of votes within the electorate, and the extent to which the members of the electorate adequately represent the interests of persons reasonably affected by the entity's actions. For purposes of this definition, the special rules in paragraphs (c)(4)(iii)(B) through (D) of this section apply.

The special rules referred to in the definition of “private faction” include:

(B) An electorate is a private faction if any three private persons that are members of the electorate possess, in the aggregate, a majority of the votes necessary to determine the outcome of the relevant exercise of control.

(C) An electorate is not a private faction if the smallest number of private persons who can combine votes to establish a majority of the votes necessary to determine the outcome of the relevant exercise of control is greater than 10 persons. For example, if an electorate consists of 20 private persons with equal, five-percent shares of the total votes, that electorate is not a private faction because a minimum of 11 members of that electorate is necessary to have a majority of the votes. By contrast, for example, if an electorate consists of 20 private persons with unequal voting shares in which some combination of 10 or fewer members has a majority of the votes, then that electorate does not qualify for the safe harbor from treatment as a private faction under this paragraph (c)(4)(iii)(C).

(D) The following rules apply for purposes of determining numbers of voters and voting control in paragraphs (c)(4)(iii)(B) and (C) of this section: (1) Related parties (as defined in § 1.150-1(b)) are treated as a single person; and (2) In computing the number of votes necessary to determine the outcome of the relevant exercise of control, all voters entitled to vote in an election are assumed to cast all votes to which they are entitled.

Why is this requirement necessary? If the State or local governmental unit has control, why should the federal government care about who may exercise the power? There is no similar requirement under current law, in any interpretation of the sovereign power requirement, or in the definition of “direct control” under Section 1.150-1(e)(2) of the Regulations.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 198

Page 203: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-4

6

6. The applicability date rules provide that, except for certain exceptions, the Proposed Regulations would apply to all entities for all purposes of Sections 141 through 150 beginning on the date that is 90 days after the date of publication of the Final Regulations in the Federal Register. The exceptions to this general rule include:

a. For entities with outstanding bonds as of the date of general applicability (above), for purposes of determining whether the entity is a political subdivision under Section 103, the Final Regulations shall not apply with respect to the previously-issued bonds unless the issuer elected into the Final Regulations.

b. For entities created or organized before March 24, 2016, the definition of political subdivision would not apply for purposes of Sections 103 and 141 through 150 during the 3-year period beginning on the general applicability date. Does this mean that entities with outstanding bonds as of the general date of applicability become private business users with respect to previously-issued bonds 3 years later?

7. The term “governmental person” is defined in 1.141-(b) to mean a State or local governmental unit as defined in 1.103-1 or an instrumentality thereof. The definition of “instrumentality” is focused heavily on the issue of control by a State or local government.

8. What happens to an “on behalf of” entity issuing on behalf of a political subdivision that loses its status? What happens to an “instrumentality” that uses bond proceeds if the related political subdivision loses its status?

9. The Preamble states that the revised definition of “political subdivision” would not apply for purposes of Section 414(d) of the Code. Presumably this means that the revised definition will apply to other sections of the Code, including Section 115. What impact, if any, would the definition in the Proposed Regulations have on those other Code Sections?

10. What is a municipal corporation? Should it be covered under these Regulations?

11. Could a failed “political subdivision” convert into an organization described in Section 501(c)(3) of the Code?

Long-Term Management Contracts and Private Business Use

IRS Notice 2014-67 created a new safe harbor for management and service contracts that simplified several of the short-term safe harbors under 97-13. In November of last year, NABL submitted a paper that requested, among other things, liberalization of the long-term safe harbors set forth in 97-13. Specifically, NABL requested:

(a) that the existing long-term fixed fee safe harbors be made more flexible;

(b) new safe harbors addressing situations in which the compensation structure is not based on a fixed fee; and

(c) that the IRS and Treasury reconsider the limitations on net profits arrangements found in the Treasury Regulations under Section 141 of the Code.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 199

Page 204: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

7

1. In light of the addition of the new short-term safe harbor set forth in Notice 2014-67, should it not follow that the long-term safe harbors should be liberalized, as well? The short-term safe harbors in 97-13 favor fixed fee arrangements, which are permitted to go out 5 years (subject to the early termination right held by the qualified user). The new safe harbor found in Notice 2014-67 treats fixed fees the same as variable fees, capitation fees, per-unit fees and % of revenue or expense fees.

2. What are the correct boundaries for prescribing what is private business use in the case of a third-party manager when it comes to (a) length of the contract, (b) character of property being managed, (c) compensation flexibility, and (d) sharing in profits?

3. With respect to infrastructure financing, do the private business use rules squeeze third-party vendors, particularly those from outside the United States, out of the system?

4. One of the shortcomings of the current guidance is that there is no clear overall test—essentially just a statement that management contracts can be a problem and safe harbors. Will that approach continue under the new guidance?

Crossover Refundings of Build America Bonds

In a crossover refunding, the proceeds of a refunding bond issue are invested in a manner such that the amount received from the acquired investments is sufficient to pay interest coming due on the refunding bonds through the call date of the refunded bonds. On the applicable call date, the proceeds of the refunding bonds cross over to pay debt service on the refunded bonds.

In Chief Counsel Advice Memorandum AM2014-09, the IRS concluded that a legal defeasance of a build America bond would trigger a reissuance under Section 1.1001-3 of the Treasury Regulations. In the event of a reissuance occurring after 2010, the newly-reissued bonds would not qualify for the interest subsidy provided for under Section 6431 of the Code.

In the case of a crossover refunding of a build America bond, is the build America bond to be refunded reissued for purposes of Section 1.1001-3 once the refunding bonds have been issued?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 200

Page 205: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-5

T-5: TAX ENFORCEMENT

Chair:

Richard Chirls Orrick, Herrington & Sutcliffe LLP - New York, NY

Panelists:

Bradley S. Waterman Law Offices of Bradley S. Waterman – Washington, DC Rebecca L. Harrigal Internal Revenue Service – Washington, DC J. Hobson Presley Balch & Bingham LLP – Birmingham, AL

TEB Update – Rebecca Harrigal.

1. Rebecca Harrigal will provide TEB’s “state of the state” update, including information regarding:

(a) TEB staffing—recent assignments, plans, dealing with attrition;

(b) TEB’s enforcement work plan – TEB’s strategy for “doing less with less,” including its focused market segment approach and compliance checks.

(c) TEB’s bondholder identification unit;

(d) developments in the Voluntary Closing Agreement Program (the “VCAP”), including the recent revision of provisions in the Internal Revenue Manual (the “IRM”) relating to the VCAP—detailed VACP discussion later in outline;

(e) Interim guidance for examinations of Direct Pay Bonds; and

(f) the status of guidance concerning procedural questions relating to direct pay Build America Bonds and other direct pay bonds.

Appeals Update – Brad Waterman.

2. Tax-exempt bond cases – Appeals staff.

3. The Appeals Judicial Attitude and Culture initiative.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 201

Page 206: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-5

Information Document Requests and Summonses.

4. Concerns about IDRs:

(a) Deadlines for responding to IDRs – revenue agent demands v. issuer resources and competing commitments.

(i) IDR #1.

(ii) Subsequent IDRs.

(b) “Fishing expedition” IDRs:

(i) In general.

(ii) The burden they impose on issuers.

(iii) Issuer strategy.

5. The IRS Large Business & International Division (“LB&I”) approach, set forth in a 6/18/13 memorandum to LB&I employees from the Acting Commissioner of LB&I:

The examiner must identify and state the issue that has led the examiner to request the information in the IDR. In addition, the examiner must discuss the IDR with the taxpayer in advance of issuing it, and both parties must discuss and determine a reasonable time frame for response.

Perhaps TEB should follow LB&I’s lead.

6. The use of summonses, i.e., enforceable requests:

(a) with respect to issuers;

(b) with respect to conduit borrowers; and

(c) with respect to third parties – as contrasted with IDRs or “informal” written requests for documents and information.

Examination of Cases Involving Minimal or “Dissipating” Taxpayer Exposure.

7. Minimal taxpayer exposure, e.g., low floaters that mature in the relatively near future. The concern – a waste of TEB and issuer time and resources?

(a) TEB policy.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 202

Page 207: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-5

(b) Issuer strategy.

8. Bonds that have been redeemed – the statute of limitations.

(a) TEB’s policy with regard to “short statute” cases:

(i) Attempts, if any, to secure extensions from bondholders.

(ii) Absent extensions, the justification for proceeding.

(iii) Section 25.6.22.2.4 of the IRM:

A case must not be sent to Appeals with less than 180 days remaining before the expiration of the statutory period for assessment on the day the case reaches Appeals.

(b) Appeals’ policy with regard to “short statute” cases, including the disposition of cases in which all taxable years have closed.

(c) “Short statute cases” – ethical and IRS Circular 230 considerations for practitioners:

(i) Rule 3.1 of the American Bar Association Model Rules of Professional Conduct (the “Model Rules”):

A lawyer shall not bring or defend a proceeding, or assert or controvert an issue therein, unless there is a basis in law and fact for doing so that is not frivolous, which includes a good faith argument for an extension, modification or reversal of existing law.

(ii) Rule 3.2 of the Model Rules:

A lawyer shall make reasonable efforts to expedite litigation consistent with the interests of the client.

(iii) Section 10.23 of Circular 230:

A practitioner may not unreasonably delay the prompt disposition of any matter before the Internal Revenue Service.

(iv) What constitutes “frivolity?”

(A) Suppose TEB stakes out a position and the issuer has a counter-argument – but not much of a counter-argument.

(1) TEB’s position.

(2) The practitioner’s position.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 203

Page 208: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-5

(B) Suppose TEB stakes out a position, the issuer doesn’t have a counter-argument, and the issuer’s only “card” is the statute of limitations. What are the practitioner’s obligations vis a vis the issuer and TEB?

(1) TEB’s position.

(2) The practitioner’s position.

The “New” Limited Scope of Form 8821 (Tax Information Authorization).

9. Background information:

(a) In some cases, the issuer and the conduit borrower have separate counsel. Given that the conduit borrower has undertaken to do whatever is necessary to defend and preserve the tax-exempt status of the bonds, its counsel should take the lead vis a vis TEB, i.e., the conduit borrower is the “real” party in interest.

(b) The problem – TEB doesn’t regard the conduit borrower as a taxpayer whose return is under examination. This is true even with respect to taxable conduit borrowers whose Federal income tax liability is implicated by section 150(b)(4) and section 168(g).

(c) In the past, the solution was for the issuer to execute a Form 8821 that authorizes the IRS to “inspect and/or receive confidential tax information” with the conduit borrower’s counsel.

(d) Form 8821 asks whether the IRS should send “copies of tax information, notices, and other written communications” to the conduit borrower’s counsel. Most issuers respond “yes.”

10. TEB no longer provides copies of tax information, notices, and other written communications to the conduit borrower’s counsel even if the issuer has instructed it to do so via Form 8821. As explained by a TEB revenue agent in a letter issued in connection with a recent examination:

The Service generally does not provide documents to the parties listed under Form 8821, Tax Information Authorization. The Issuer may distribute the letter/document to the person listed under Form 8821. Form 5701-TEB, Proposed Issues is a sensitive matter in that it will be listed in EMMA, thus only those with a valid Form 2848, Power of Attorney and Declaration of Representative is [sic] to receive notice.

(a) TEB’s position.

(b) The practitioner’s position.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 204

Page 209: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-5

11. Experience with assertion that TEB no longer will negotiate with the conduit borrower’s counsel.

(a) What does “negotiate” mean from TEB’s perspective? Does it refer only to settlement negotiations, or does it also encompass discussions with regard to the merits?

(b) Section 4.81.6.1.2 of the IRM:

With respect to violations applicable to tax-advantaged bonds, it is the continuing policy of the Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) and its office of Tax Exempt Bonds (“TEB”) to attempt to resolve such violations of the federal tax law at the transaction level and to obtain resolution of such violations (including payment of any settlement amounts) from the appropriate party to the transaction to ensure that interest income received by the holders of tax-exempt bonds continues to be exempt for federal income tax purposes . . . .

(Emphasis added.) How does TEB square its new policy with section 4.81.6.1.2?

12. With regard to TEB’s refusal to negotiate with the conduit borrower’s counsel, what’s the solution?

(a) TEB could negotiate with the issuer’s counsel – a person who has little or no involvement in the examination and thus would function as a messenger.

(b) Perhaps TEB could negotiate with the conduit borrower’s counsel if the issuer’s counsel participates. That would be a waste of the conduit borrower’s money if, as is likely, it is paying the issuer’s counsel’s fees and expenses. It also would be a waste of the issuer’s counsel’s time.

13. What “problem” does TEB’s new policy “fix?” Observations:

(a) The procedural rationale underlying the treatment by TEB of the issuer as the taxpayer whose return is under examination is that it is examining the Form 8038 (Information Return for Tax-Exempt Private Activity Bond Issues) or the Form 8038-G (Information Return for Tax-Exempt Governmental Obligations) filed by the issuer.

(b) Leaving aside highly unusual cases, e.g., cases in which an issuer allegedly filed a false or fraudulent Form 8038, the issuer has no stake under the tax law in the outcome of an examination. The issue is whether interest on the bonds is excludible from gross income, and accordingly, the focus of the examination is on the bondholders’ liability for tax.

(c) The “fiction” that TEB is examining the issuer is equally applicable to a tax-exempt conduit borrower – like Form 8038 and Form 8038-G, Form 990 is

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 205

Page 210: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-5

merely an information return. As noted, TEB in fact is examining the return of a taxable conduit borrower.

14. In the past, TEB has negotiated settlements relating to the tax-exempt status of bonds with third parties, such as investment bankers and bond counsel, often with minimal, if any, participation by the issuers.

(a) Does TEB’s new policy with respect to negotiations with conduit borrowers encompass negotiations with third parties?

(b) If so, how does the new policy square with section 4.81.6.1.2 of the IRM?

(c) What’s the solution? Perhaps TEB will negotiate with third parties only after it initiates section 6700 examinations of them?

Closing Agreements – In General.

15. The TEB closing agreement committee.

(a) Function.

(b) Members.

(c) Scope of authority.

16. What roles do TEB Director Rebecca Harrigal and Allyson Belsome and others play?

17. The frustration for practitioners of negotiating with the revenue agent and/or the group manager, i.e. personnel who as a practical matter function principally as messengers.

18. “One size fits all” closing agreements?

(a) TEB’s position.

(b) The practitioner’s position.

Closing Agreements – Settlement Payments.

19. Section 4.81.6.5.3.1.2.A of the IRM provides in part as follows:

For this purpose, past calendar years will generally include any calendar year for which a tax payment would be due within three years of the date the compliance failure was identified by TEB.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 206

Page 211: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-5

For examination purposes, TEB identifies a compliance failure on the date it provides written notification to the issuer of that identified issue.

The general three year open period may be increased to up to six years when TEB determines that the issuer or its representative has not acted in good faith in resolving the compliance failure.

20. In many cases, a fair amount of time passes between the day on which TEB issues written notification of a compliance failure and the day on which the issuer and TEB agree to the closing agreement terms. During that time, taxable years close. What’s the legal justification for treating such years as open? Does TEB actually regard as open the taxable years that have closed but that were open when it issued its written notification? In other words, is TEB’s practice consistent with its procedure?

21. What’s the legal justification for ignoring the three year statute of limitations in cases in which TEB determines that the issuer and/or its representative have not acted in good faith in resolving the compliance failure?

22. Does (or should) TEB differentiate between cases in which as a practical matter only a portion of the bonds are “infected,” i.e., cases involving discrete and easily quantifiable problems, and cases in which all of the bonds are “infected.”

(a) TEB arguably has leverage in cases involving discrete and easily quantifiable problems, because as a matter of law such problems “infect” all of the bonds. The concern is that TEB will use this leverage to exact a punishment that doesn’t fit the alleged “crime.”

(b) TEB arguably has no leverage in cases in which all of the bonds are “infected,” aside from the threat of pursuing the bondholders. TEB sometimes uses this threat to exact more from the issuer or conduit borrower than it could collect from the bondholders.

23. In cases that are resolved with reference to the taxable years that actually are open when TEB and the issuer agree to settlement terms, the timing of settlement negotiations can be critically important. Suppose TEB and the issuer agree to a settlement on 4/14/15. On that day, taxable year 2011 is open, and TEB likely will demand all or a portion of the taxpayer exposure for that year. If the resolution is delayed by a day, 2011 will close. Is it unethical to “slow down” settlement negotiations?

24. Does Appeals follow the procedures set forth above?

25. Some revenue agents have stated that TEB’s policy in cases involving minimal taxpayer exposure is to demand 100% of taxpayer exposure or close to it regardless of the nature or severity of the alleged violation. Is this actually TEB’s policy? If so, why?

Closing Agreements – Other Issues.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 207

Page 212: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-5

26. TEB often requires the redemption of all or a portion of a “troubled” issue as a condition of settlement. In some instances, it’s not possible for an issuer to redeem bonds immediately or in the near future due to legal and/or practical impediments. TEB generally requires the issuer to pay all or a portion of the present value of the tax which bondholders would pay in future years. TEB is unwilling to allow the issuer to pay on each 4/15 the tax which the bondholders would pay on interest paid to them during the prior taxable year. Why? Is TEB concerned about the administrative burden of monitoring the issuer’s compliance with an installment arrangement? If the issuer must pay “up front” for the privilege of leaving the bonds outstanding, what incentive does it have to redeem the bonds, i.e., how does forcing the issuer to pay “up front” advance TEB’s objective?

27. Default and remedies provisions:

(a) Closing agreements do not contain default and remedies provisions, e.g., provisions pursuant to which the IRS could seek damages from a defaulting party. If a party to a closing agreement defaults, TEB’s focus is on the tax-exempt status of the bonds. In this regard, section 4.81.6.5 of the IRM provides as follows:

TEB will evaluate the significance of a failure of any signatory to a closing agreement to satisfy the terms of that agreement. TEB will generally determine that any failure to comply with a material term to the closing agreement constitutes a new deliberate action or intentional act within the meaning of the Regulations and constitutes a new violation with respect to the bond issue.

(b) Why don’t closing agreements contain such provisions? Is the concern that such provisions would run afoul of the finality requirement of section 7121? If so, exactly what is the concern?

28. Mandatory public disclosure of closing agreements – an end run by TEB around section 6103?

VCAP Developments and Issues.

29. Recent revisions to IRM section 7.2.3 (released September 10, 2015, effective September 30, 2015):

(a) revised templates for VCAP closing agreements;

(b) modification of filing submission form for VCAP—IRS Form 14429 (March 2013), not updated; until updated it should be completed with enumerated changes per section 7.2.3.2.1.1;

(c) required completed model agreement with submission;

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 208

Page 213: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-5

(d) welcome to VCAP letter or telephone call,

(e) no special relief for post-closing compliance procedures and, effective March 31, 2016, no longer required to check the box on adoption of written procedures for post-issuance tax compliance (query—will 8038 and 8038-G be changed?),

(f) new settlement standards—TEFRA approval problems, small issue draw-down bonds volume cap, 8038 filing failure in remediation of deliberate action, direct pay bonds issued at premium.

30. TEB allows issuers to test the VCAP waters via anonymous requests. However, the narrow language and detailed procedures of section 7.2.3.1.5 of the IRM suggests that the anonymous request procedure has limited utility. Does the procedure really enable issuers to test the waters?

31. Announcement 2015-02 – VCAP Resolution Standard – Reinstated Section 501(c)(3) Status.

(a) The settlement payment is $500 for each calendar month or portion thereof starting with the month that includes the revocation date and ending with the month that includes the effective date of the reinstatement.

(i) TEB’s position.

(ii) The practitioner’s position.

(b) The closing agreement must contain the following representation:

The Issuer and Affected Organization represent that they are aware of no reason, other than the Affected Organization’s revocation under section 6033(j), that the bonds fail to qualify as qualified 501(c)(3) bonds the interest on which is excludible from gross income under section 103 of the Code.

This is similar to a demand that appears in some IDRs:

If in the process of preparing your response to the Information Document Request, or otherwise, the issuer has become aware of a problem that potentially impacts the [qualified] status of issues of which the Bonds are a part, please provide an explanation.

(i) TEB’s position.

(ii) The practitioner’s position.

32. Is the VCAP available in cases in which the issuer may have a problem, as contrasted with cases in which there is a clear violation?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 209

Page 214: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX LAW: T-5

(a) Per section 7.2.3.1.2.1:

REB VCAP requests will be accepted when an issuer’s submissions indicate that there is a sufficient basis to conclude that there has been a federal tax law violation.

Per section 7.2.3.2.1.2.C requires Form 14429 to include the following:

A description of the violation(s) for which the issuer is requesting resolution under TEB VCAP including:

A. A clear statement of the specific federal tax requirement that provides a basis for finding a violation.

B. A description of the identified violation(s) and the relevant facts

C. A statement as to when and how the facts surrounding the identified violation were discovered.

(b) However, per section 7.2.3.2.1.2.C, there appears to be some room for considering the circumstance where it is uncertain that a violation of law has occurred – albeit a convoluted scenario.

If an issuer requests that TEB consider the lack of clarity about a legal answer as a factor in determining an appropriate resolution, the issuer must also include the following information to support its request:

D. The applicable law for which the issuer believes there is uncertainty.

E. Established laws supporting a determination that ther is a credible basis for finding that a violation occurred.

F. The legal questions and their application to the facts of the submission.

(There is no reference to factual questions.)

(c) Experience with TEB’s position? Experience with changing positions?

(d) If the VCAP is available in such cases, what standards are used to compute an appropriate settlement amount? The hazards of litigation? If not, what should the issuer do? Play the audit lottery? Is that practical?

(e) If TEB demands a settlement payment which the issuer regards as excessive, what should the issuer do?

(i) Capitulate?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 210

Page 215: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

TAX

LAW

: T-5

(ii) Withdraw from the VCAP, await an examination, and at the conclusion of the examination, take its case to Appeals?

33. IRM has changed so issuers may no longer negotiate a closing agreement with TEB pursuant to the VCAP in anticipation of an event that will result in a violation, with the VCAP agreement deferred until the event resulting in a violation. VCAP is not available where private letter rulings may be more appropriate to resolve future actions and issues or where remedial action procedures are available. Recently proposed regulations relating to “anticipatory” remedial action may provide appropriate relief.

34. Issuer’s submission must include the issuer’s proposed VACP resolution terms, including the method to compute the payment amount or a description of an alternative method for the payment amount, as well as the source of funds the issuer will use to make the payment. Following the posting of the VCAP Model Agreement on the TEB website, the issuer’s submission must include a draft of the filled in VCAP Model Agreement, subject to the issuer identifying deviations, if any, from the Model, or any TEB posted Specialty Agreement Template.

Additional Topics.

35. The current enforcement climate in general – the practitioner’s perspective.

36. Student loan bonds – examinations followed by a VCAP settlement initiative – the wave of the future for market segment issues?

37. Developments in examinations of manufacturing facility bonds.

(a) The limitation on capital expenditures – equipment leases.

(b) The 95% requirement – “extra” land.

38. Cases involving unspent proceeds – does the punishment fit the alleged “crime?”

39. Total return swaps.

40. Build America Bond examinations, including the extinguishment issue.

41. Use of the technical advice process.

42. Section 6700 examinations.

43. Form 2848 (Power of Attorney) – inconsistent requirements of field agents on special instructions; problems with the Centralized Authorization File units.

* * * *

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 211

Page 216: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 212

Page 217: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Joint Session Outline

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 213

Page 218: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 214

Page 219: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

JOIN

T PA

NEL

: J-1

J-1 EXPLORING THE PRICING PROCESS

Chair:

Stephen E. Weyl Hinckley, Allen & Snyder LLP - Boston, MA

Panelists:

Marc Dispense George K. Baum & Company - Denver, CO Alison J. Benge Pacifica Law Group LLP - Seattle, WA Robert A. Fippinger Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board – Washington, DC

I. The Pricing Timeline – Underwriting (Authorization to Closing, Negotiated Public Offering)

A. Main Deal Players

1. Counsel2. Underwriting Desk 3. Sales Personnel 4. Financial Advisor 5. Issuer6. Issuing Authority (conduit, if utilized) 7. Rating Agencies

B. Preparation for Bond Issuance

1. Documentation Preparation

a. Disclosure Review b. Preliminary Official Statement c. Authorization for Issuance d. Rating Agencies

2. Formation of the Underwriting Group

a. Financial Advisor Role b. Sole Manager c. Underwriting Syndicate

i. Senior Manager role vs. Co-Managers and Selling Group Members

ii. Agreement Among Underwriters (AAU) iii. Priority of Orders

3. Underwriter Due Diligence

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 215

Page 220: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

JOIN

T PANEL: J-1

a. Reasonable belief in the accuracy of offering documents b. Internal review of Continuing Disclosure Agreement

and past compliance c. Internal credit committee

4. Example: Inaccurate Document Based On Underwriter Review

a. Underwriter refused to price and/or allow issue to close b. Could be interpreted as fraudulent if not changed

C. Pre-Marketing Period

1. Typically between 2 to 30 days

a. Shorter for stronger, highly liquid credits b. Dynamic for lower rated issuers

2. Player Roles

a. Public Finance Bankers b. Sales / Underwriting Desk c. Financial Advisors d. Potential Investors

i. Institutionalii. Retail

3. Scenario #1 - “AA” Rated Unlimited General Obligation Bond

a. Background b. Underwriter Credit Committee

4. Scenario #2 - Below Investment Grade, Highly Leveraged with Pending Lawsuits

a. Backgroundb. Due Diligence c. Counsel Interaction d. Underwriter Credit Committee e. Supplement used to ensure all investors utilizing same information

D. Pricing the Bond Issue

1. Establishment of the Initial Price a. Market comparables

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 216

Page 221: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

JOIN

T PA

NEL

: J-1

b. Syndicate (if utilized) price views c. Financial Advisor role d. Market Factors

2. The Order Period

a. Retail Order Period (if utilized) i. Priority of orders

ii. Attestation of compliance

b. Bona-Fide Order Period i. Why not 1st come ii. Investor orders are “firm” iii. Public offering, no bonds are held back

c. Syndicate Interaction

3. Review of the Order Book

a. Basis for any adjustments to price b. Financial Advisor role

4. Proposed Repricing and the Verbal Award

a. Verbal award from Issuer is the “locking” moment b. Investor option to change order c. Risk of any unsold bonds is transferred to Underwriter(s)

E. Post-Pricing

1. Allotment Process

a. Priority of Orders b. Quality of Order “Going Away” c. Unofficial categorizing of accounts i. Underwriter can only reasonably guess investor intent

2. Bond Purchase Agreement

a. Allows for “ticketing” of the bonds with investors

3. Documents

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 217

Page 222: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

JOIN

T PANEL: J-1

a. Syndicate wires and fee distribution b. Underwriter Certificates

i. Reasonable expectation ii. First 10%

iii. Investor book needs to be factual represented in certificate

3. Investor book scenario and the underwriter certificate

a. Background (example order book) b. Underwriter is striving for lowest borrowing rate c. Original Underwriting Certificate

i. First 10% ii. Definition of “Public”

d. Necessary changes for a factual representation

F. Secondary Market

1. Role of Broker/Dealer trading desk

2. EMMA post sale activity

a. Why “Inter-Dealer” doesn’t necessarily mean “Inter-Dealer” b. Investors have different internal compensation models i. compensation may show on EMMA as a trade

G. Delivery and Closing

II. SECURITIES LAW ISSUES AND CONSIDERATIONS

A. Securities Act Provisions

1. Section 17(a)(2) – makes it unlawful in the offering or sale of securities to obtain “money or property by means of any untrue statement of a material fact or any omission to state a material fact . . . .”

2. Section 17(a)(3) – makes it unlawful in the offering or sale of securitizes to “engage in any transaction, practice, or course of business which operates or would operate as a fraud or deceit upon the purchaser”

3. No scienter required; negligence is sufficient to establish liability

B. MSRB Rules

1. Rule G-17 – Duty of Fair Dealing

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 218

Page 223: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

JOIN

T PA

NEL

: J-1

a. Underwriter must deal fairly with municipal issuers and investors b. No fiduciary duties owed to issuer; arm’s length relationship c. Underwriter must purchase from issuer at fair and reasonable price and

balance that duty by selling to investors at fair and reasonable prices d. The Underwriter must review the Official Statement as part of its

responsibilities under the federal securities laws e. G-17 disclosure letter to issuer

2. Rule G-11 – Primary Offering Practices

b. Disclosuresc. Confirmation of sale d. Priority provisions e. Communicationsf. Designations and allocations of securities g. Settlement of syndicate or similar account h. Payments of designations i. Retail order period representations and required disclosures j. Prohibitions on consents by brokers, dealers and municipal securities

dealers

3. Rule G-27 – Supervision – Obligation to Supervise

a. Supervisory system b. Written supervisory procedures c. Internal inspections d. Review of correspondence e. Supervisory control system

4. Rule G-30 – Prices and Commissions – General Principles and Relevant Factors in Determining Fairness

a. Principal transactions b. Agency transactions

5. Proposed changes to Rule G-12 regarding close out procedures

B. Agreement Among Underwriters

1. SIFMA Master form 2. 2012 SIFMA G-17 riders to AAU

C. Bond Purchase Agreement

1. Underwriter’s certificate

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 219

Page 224: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

JOIN

T PANEL: J-1

D. Case Law

1. Dolphin and Bradbury, Inc. v. SEC, 512 F.3d 634 (D.C. Cir. 2008)

2. In the Matter of Edward D. Jones & Co., L.P. (SEC Administrative Proceeding – File No. 3-16751 August 13, 2015)

III. TAX LAW ISSUES AND CONSIDERATIONS

A. Current Regulations:

1. Reg. §1.148-1(b) provides that issue price for publicly offered bonds is the first price at which a substantial amount of the bonds is sold to the public.

2. Substantial Amount. Under Reg. §1.148-1(b), 10% constitutes a substantial amount.

3. Public. The public does not include bond houses, brokers, or similar persons or organizations acting in the capacity of underwriters or wholesalers.

4. Reasonable Expectations Allowed in Bona Fide Public Offering. Under Reg. §1.148-1(b), in the case of a “bona fide public offering”, the issue price can determined as of the sale date based on reasonable expectations regarding the initial offering price of the bonds (rather than actual facts).

5. Separate Terms Means Separate Pricing. Under Reg. §1.148-1(b), bonds with different terms (e.g., maturities, interest rates) have separate issue prices, which means that the rules are applied to each individual group of bonds with the same terms (as opposed to the bond issue as a whole).

6. Fair Market Value. Under Reg. §1.148-1(b), the issue price may not exceed the fair market value of the bonds as of the sale date.

B. 2015 Proposed Regulations:

1. Under Prop. Reg. Reg. §1.148-1(f)(2)(i), issue price is defined generally as the first price at which a substantial amount is sold to the public. This basic definition is the same as the current regulations.

2. Substantial Amount. 10% is retained as a substantial amount.

3. New Definition of Public. Prop. Reg. §1.148-1(f)(3)(i) defines the “public” as anyone other than an underwriter or a related party to an underwriter.

4. New Definition of Underwriter. Prop. Reg. §1.148-1(f)(3)(ii) defines “underwriter” as (i) any person contractually agreeing with the issuer to participate in the initial sale of bonds to the public, (ii) any person contracting

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 220

Page 225: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

JOIN

T PA

NEL

: J-1

with the lead underwriter to form syndicate, and (iii) any person who, on or before the sale date, directly or indirectly enters into a contract or other arrangement to sell the bonds with any of the foregoing The preamble to the 2015 Proposed Regulations provides an example for (iii) above: a retail distribution contract between a member of an underwriting syndicate or selling group and another dealer that is not in the syndicate or selling group.

5. Alternative Method Safe Harbor. If less than 10% of the bonds (with the same terms) is sold on or before the sale date, then the issuer may use the “alternative method” for determining issue price. The alternative method uses the initial offering prices for the bonds as their issue prices. Requirements for the alternative method are:

a. Underwriters must fill all orders received on or before the sale from the public at the initial offering price (unless the orders exceed the principal amount of the bonds); Underwriters must certify this and provide supporting documentation for this requirement.

b. Underwriters must not fill any orders received on or before the sale date from the public at a price higher than the initial offering price; Underwriters must certify this and provide supporting documentation for this requirement.

c. Underwriters must certify the initial offering prices and provide supporting documentation (preamble to the 2015 Proposed Regulations suggests that the pricing wire would be acceptable supporting documentation).

d. Underwriters must certify that no underwriter will fill (has filled) an order placed by the public between the sale date and the issue date at a price higher than the initial offering price or provide evidence of the sales at higher prices and that such higher prices were a result of a market change (preamble to the 2015 Proposed Regulations suggests that “proof of the values of a broad-based index of municipal bond interest rates on bonds similar to the type and credit rating of the bonds being sold” would be acceptable supporting documentation of market change).

C. Comments to 2015 Proposed Regulations:

1. Competitive sales. NABL, GFOA and other industry groups have sent comments to the IRS suggesting that the 2015 Proposed Regulations be revised to separately address competitive sales. IRS officials have indicated their willingness to consider those proposals.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 221

Page 226: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

JOIN

T PANEL: J-1

2. ABA comments. The ABA has recommended (i) clarification of due diligence and documentation requirements, (ii) clarification of the definition of underwriter, (iii) revisions relating to advance refundings, and (iv) adjustments to allow for more definite issue price determinations at more certain dates and times.

3. Uncertainty regarding level of diligence and documentation. Is the lead underwriter responsible for the actions of other underwriters in the selling group? What level of diligence do the issuer and the lead underwriter need to use when making certifications? The ABA comments include safe harbor recommendations for due diligence requirements in both competitive and negotiated offerings.

4. Pricing and Agreements. If finalized, would the new rules affect pricing, i.e. will the requirements of the ‘alternative method’ lead underwriters to charge a higher price initially? Would the regulations affect the relationship of underwriters within a syndicate or selling group or the form of AAU or selling group agreement used?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 222

Page 227: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 223

Page 228: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 224

Page 229: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

Ethics Session Outline

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 225

Page 230: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

E-1 ETHICS AND ATTORNEY LIABILITY

Chair:

N. Gordon Knox Miles & Stockbridge P.C., Baltimore, MD

Panelists:

Randy J. Curato ALAS – Chicago, IL Deanna L.S. Gregory Pacifica Law Group – Seattle, WA Doug R. Richmond Aon Risk Solutions – Overland Park, KS

This panel will include a practical discussion of how lawyers in the public finance industry can be exposed to potential professional liability. The panel will focus on the application of the Model Rules to engagement letters and the implication of the increased use of requests for proposals among bond issuers. Attention will also be given to conflicts of interest particularly in the context where more than one party to a transaction is being represented by the same lawyer. The panel will utilize hypotheticals and interactive discussion to explore these issues and other Model Rules that bond counsel should consider in any engagement. The inclusion of malpractice insurance representatives on the panel will provide “real life” perspectives on liability scenarios.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 226

Page 231: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

PRACTICAL ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS RELATED TO BOND COUNSEL LIABILITY, RISK REDUCTION AND LOSS PREVENTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

I.  INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................ 3 

II.  THE MODEL RULES, FUNCTION REPORT, AND MODEL ENGAGEMENT LETTERS ......................................................................................................................... 5 

III.  BASIS OF LIABILITY ................................................................................................... 6 

IV.  BENEFITS OF ENGAGEMENT LETTERS ............................................................. 11 

V.  SCOPE OF ENGAGEMENT ....................................................................................... 11 

VI.  ANATOMY OF AN ENGAGEMENT LETTER........................................................ 16 

VII.  IDENTIFY YOUR CLIENT ......................................................................................... 17 

VIII.  CLIENT INTAKE CONCERNS AND LIABILITY .................................................. 18 

IX.  ESTABLISHMENT AND TERMINATION OF ATTORNEY/CLIENT RELATIONSHIP ........................................................................................................... 19 

X.  CONFLICTS OF INTEREST – CURRENT CLIENTS ............................................ 20 

XI.  FUTURE CONFLICTS ................................................................................................. 24 

XII.  CONFLICTS OF INTEREST – FORMER CLIENTS .............................................. 24 

XIII.  COMPETENCE ............................................................................................................. 25 

XIV.  ROLE AS ADVISOR ..................................................................................................... 26 

XV.  IMPLICATIONS OF THE DODD-FRANK ACT ...................................................... 27 

XVI.  MULTI-STATE PRACTICE ........................................................................................ 28 

ENDNOTES AND REFERENCE MATERIALS ................................................................... 31 

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 227

Page 232: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

PRACTICAL ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS RELATED TO BOND COUNSEL LIABILITY, RISK REDUCTION AND LOSS PREVENTION

I. INTRODUCTION

There are numerous examples where Bond Counsel liability have arisen in recent years, based on disputes with some major and some smaller issuers of municipal debt. These range from the scandals of large municipalities to the complaints of small school districts. In some instances Bond Counsel liability has arisen as a result of its failure to deliver competent service and in other cases as a result of perceived conflicts of interest. Although the Model Rules (hereafter defined) are often invoked as the governing standard, general legal principles of agency, representation and reliance as well as statutory rules relating to securities transactions are of equal force and have more severe consequences if breached.

This panel will attempt to apply the Model Rules to some realistic hypothetical scenarios in which Bond Counsel might find themselves and will attempt to extract some lessons to be learned.

One potential source of liability, of course, is conflicts of interest. As we know, every practice specialty has its own challenges arising from actual, perceived, or potential conflicts of interest. For example litigators, often for strategic reasons, threaten to have one another removed from representing a particular client at trial because of such conflicts, with varying degrees of success. Recently, corporate and transactional lawyers have become a special focus of conflicts concerns, as they lateral from one major law firm to another, trailing a long list of former clients with real worries about confidentiality and trade secrets. In municipal finance, our perspectives on conflicts, when they arise, how they are addressed, and whether they may be cured, are as unique as our chosen field of practice. Many law firms trade bond issuer and underwriting clients back and forth with a clear conscience. A number of bond issuers, both local and state, choose counsel for their investment banking firms, with no consultation and less concern about conflicts of interest.

Another source of liability is the failure to deliver competent service. It could probably go without saying that lawyers should only engage in matters in which they are competent. However, in our current business environment where multitasking is the norm, we are expected to do more in less time while simultaneously handling a significant number of transactions. In addition, where the perception is that clients demand immediate results, lawyers need to be aware of the potential exposure which arises from inattention to detail and prudent due diligence.

This year’s panel as well as the materials which follow are intended to highlight some of the challenges peculiar to the bond industry in avoiding professional liability, to provide some baseline guidance as to conflicts of interest, both in identification and waiver, to explore issues surrounding the identification of the client of Bond Counsel, and to make recommendations as to the enlightened use of engagement letters. Some attention will also be given to the impact the increased use of requests for proposals (“RFPs”) play with respect to client identification and engagement.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 228

Page 233: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

Initially, of course, Bond Counsel must be familiar with the rules of professional conduct applicable in the jurisdictions in which he or she practices, and with applicable federal, state, and local laws (including securities laws, tax laws, secured transaction laws, and constitutional and statutory provisions relevant to the particular bond issue) and the rules, standards, and guidelines promulgated by various industry groups and self-regulatory organizations, such as the Municipal Securities Rulemaking Board. Reference materials available for these purposes are identified at the end of this outline at endnote 1.1

These publications, for the most part, do not establish required actions or standards for Bond Counsel. Instead, they raise issues to be considered by Bond Counsel and provide illustrative formats or models for the profession to consider. Obviously, the approach that is appropriate in a given transaction will depend on the scope of the engagement and the facts and circumstances of that particular transaction. To the extent possible, and recognizing that facts change throughout the course of a transaction, each attorney involved in a municipal finance transaction should focus on the scope of, and duties and responsibilities involved with, his engagement. A bond lawyer must clearly explain his role to a client and do his best to make sure other involved parties understand what the role of Bond Counsel is, or is not, in relationship to all other parties and to the transaction. The use of engagement letters and other written communications to non-clients can help to address Bond Counsel's role and prove valuable in any subsequent liability proceeding. And because so many Red Book firms readily undertake representation of those “on the other side of the table,” bond lawyers must also be prepared to act with loyalty on behalf of their investment banking clients. The inclusion of other tasks for bond practitioners on many deals, such as counsel to the bond insurer, counsel to the trustee or paying agent, and counsel to the letter of credit bank, makes our job that much more difficult.

Many state, county and municipal issuers have utilized RFPs to select their bond counsel. The RFP process in such cases is often led by the procurement offices of these issuers. Upon selection to serve as Bond Counsel, bond lawyers may be asked to sign a “services contract” which may be more suitable for other vendors employed by the issuer, but deviates from the format of the standard engagement letter employed in our profession.

If there were not sufficient complexity deriving from these factors, consider the value of even a thorough and detailed conflicts check undertaken prior to the commencement of an engagement, when the scope of services shifts during the transaction or when additional, unexpected parties are added to the finance team. The bond lawyer who disregards these shifts in circumstances does so at his or her own peril. In addition, a bond lawyer may also need to consider state rules and case law regarding multijurisdictional practice if involved in a transaction that is outside of the lawyer's jurisdiction of admission.

Both for a sense of professionalism and out of self-interest, all Bond Counsel today must increase their awareness of and sensitivity to pronouncements by the Internal Revenue Service, the Securities and Exchange Commission, and both State and Federal courts that may affect the manner in which legal services are provided to clients engaged in the municipal bond industry. Unhappy taxpayers, developers, issuers, or others involved in the many types of public finance transactions can make the heedless bond lawyer rue his inattention to the principles respecting conflicts of interest and those duties which can create bond counsel liability if not fulfilled.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 229

Page 234: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

II. THE MODEL RULES,2 FUNCTION REPORT, AND MODEL ENGAGEMENT LETTERS

The Model Rules of Professional Conduct (the “Model Rules”) were first promulgated in 1983 by the American Bar Association to address, among other things, criticism concerning the Model Code of Professional Responsibility’s focus on litigation.

According to the introduction to the Model Rules, they are:

. . . rules of reason. They should be interpreted with reference to the purposes of legal representation and of the law itself. . . . The Rules are thus partly obligatory and disciplinary and partly constitutive and descriptive in that they define a lawyer’s professional role. . . . Comments do not add obligations to the Rules but provide guidance for practicing in compliance with the Rules.

Model Rules, Scope, ¶ 14.

The Model Rules are invoked as governing standards in the context of disciplinary or disqualification proceedings, and not as the basis for a separate cause of action. In comment 20 to the Scope of the Model Rules, it is stated that “...nevertheless, since the Rules do establish standards of conduct by lawyers, a lawyer’s violation of a Rule may be evidence of breach of the applicable standard of conduct.” Violations of the Model Rules are considered by courts as evidence of standards of care in civil actions based on allegations of malpractice, misrepresentation, and other common law or statutory concepts.

After promulgation of the Model Rules, the Functions and Professional Responsibility Subcommittee of NABL prepared Function and Professional Responsibilities of Bond Counsel("Function"). Function reviews the historic and modern role of Bond Counsel and focuses on select Model Rules to highlight the special role and function of Bond Counsel. The most recent version of Function (the Third Edition, 2011) is available on the NABL website.

The Model Engagement Letter Committee of NABL (the “Engagement Letter Committee”) was formed to revise the Model Engagement Letters to incorporate the concepts and principles set forth in Function. The Model Engagement Letters are also available on the NABL website.

As discussed in Function, the Rules strongly suggest that the terms of the engagement be in writing. While each law firm may have its own internal rules and suggestions regarding the practice of delivering or signing engagement letters, there are general benefits which derive from the written process for both parties.

One should note that the ABA Commission on Ethics 20/20, created in 2009, submitted its suggested changes to the Model Rules in May 2012 and August 2012 to address issues of globalization and technology, with particular emphasis on confidentiality-related obligations when using the internet. On August 6, 2012, the ABA House of Delegates voted to approve many of the suggested revisions. Of particular interest are the changes to Model Rule 1.6, respecting confidentiality concerns when resolving conflicts of interest.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 230

Page 235: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

III. BASIS OF LIABILITY

Some, but not all, of Bond Counsel’s liability in public finance matters derives from the duty of Bond Counsel to deliver its various legal opinions.3 In other cases, liability seems to derive from the perception of others involved in the transaction or from the scope of engagement undertaken by the lawyers in question. Note again that the violation of the Model Rules may be evidence of a breach of the applicable standard of conduct and may be considered in a legal proceeding. From a practical perspective, if Bond Counsel must answer for an alleged conflict in addition to another legal claim, a jury is less likely to be sympathetic to Bond Counsel.

The issues raised in the following cases respecting conflicts, competence and other transaction participants should be considered in the ongoing effort of Bond Counsel everywhere to fulfill their professional obligations:

A. Cleveland v. Cleveland Electric Illuminating Co., 440 F. Supp. 193, 322 (N.D. OH 1976). The City of Cleveland owned and operated a municipal electric light plant, financed by municipal bonds, which directly competed with the private electric company. The City filed a motion to disqualify the electric company’s counsel, claiming a conflict of interest because the City previously retained the firm to handle its municipal bond issues. However, because the City had full knowledge of the scope of the firm’s representation of the electric company when it retained the firm to work on its bond issues, estoppel and waiver barred the City’s claims. In the context of a large firm, knowledge of the case could not be imputed to other firm members unless they practiced in that specialized area.

B. At the December 19, 1996 sentencing of Mark S. Ferber, formerly of Lazard Freres & Co., United States District Judge William G. Young stated, following his announcement of the sentence for this financial advisor/investment banker for wire fraud and mail fraud “[a]nd if this sorry lot of municipal bond attorneys do not understand it, let me spell it out: it is required that every potential conflict of interest be disclosed in writing and in detail.” See U.S. v. Mark S. Ferber, Criminal No. 95-10338-WGY (D. Mass).

As the judge further pointed out, the question must be “How much do we have to disclose lucidly, crisply, completely, so that we do not overwhelm the public decision makers with data?”

C. Pontiac Sch. Dist. v. Miller, Canfield, Paddock & Stone, 563 N.W.2d 693 (Mich. 1997). Bond counsel for Pontiac School District had briefly represented the underwriter at the initial stages of the transaction. The District initiated a legal malpractice action against Bond Counsel, alleging in Count III that Bond Counsel had a conflict of interest. The District claimed the conflict of interest resulted in the compromise of the District’s interest in dealing with the underwriter and a bond structure involving excessive interest and issuance costs. The trial court entered a judgment on Count III awarding $334,710.40 in present damages and $4,701,222 in future damages. On appeal, the court concluded that the “plaintiff failed to present substantial evidence from which a jury could infer that defendant’s legal malpractice (i.e., its violation of its professional duty by representing conflicting interest in the bond transaction and its failure to inform the board members sufficiently in order to permit them to make an informed decision about the bond transaction) was a cause in fact of plaintiff’s damages.” Id at 699. For that reason, the appellate court directed a verdict in Bond Counsel’s favor on Count III.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 231

Page 236: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

D. The Iowa Supreme Court Board of Professional Ethics and Conduct in Formal Ethics Opinion 95-20 (February 22, 1996) previously expressed the view that one firm could not serve as bond counsel and underwriter’s counsel in the same negotiated bond issue. That Opinion also provided that a bond counsel firm could not serve as bond counsel when that firm represented the underwriter in any unrelated, current transaction or the underwriter was a regular client of that firm. The opinion was rendered under the Iowa Code of Professional Responsibility (based on the ABA Model Code). Iowa has since adopted the Iowa Rules of Professional Conduct (based on the Revised Model Rules) which take a more liberal approach to a client’s ability to consent to a possible conflict. In response, the Iowa Supreme Court Board of Professional Ethics and Conduct modified the substance of Opinion 95-20 in Formal Ethics Opinion 06-03 (November 6, 2006) to allow for client consent in such circumstances. The 2006 Opinion provides that “…where the parties are sophisticated and experienced users of the legal services involved in representation by a lawyer of an issuer as bond counsel in a negotiated issuer debt financing with an underwriter, when the lawyer and/or other lawyers in the law firm represent or have represented the same underwriter in other unrelated financing or legal matters, is a conflict which may be consented to upon proper disclosure.” Presumably, however, a bond counsel firm is still not permitted to represent the underwriter in the same transaction in Iowa.

E. In B.L.M. v. Sabo & Deitsch, 55 Cal. App. 4th 823 (4th Dist. 1997), the court specifically rejected the theory that Bond Counsel was counsel to the transaction and found that Bond Counsel, hired by the City, owed no duty of professional care to the beneficiary of a bond issue and thus was not liable to B.L.M. for legal malpractice. The court stated:

[u]nder B.L.M.’s argument Sabo & Deitsch would end up in a completely untenable position: Having been hired by Rialto to work with and advise Rialto and its staff, Sabo & Deitsch would be subject to potential liability should that advice include something detrimental to B.L.M. According to this theory, it would appear that any time the parties to a contract are named in the contract, and a law firm is named in the contract as representing one of the parties, the law firm . . . would owe a professional duty of care to all the other parties named in the contract as well. We reject this approach as being unworkable and undermining the very nature of the attorney-client relationship. 55 Cal. App. 4th at 832.

As stated in the Comments to Model Rule 1.7, whether one can represent two parties will depend on an evaluation of whether a difference in interests “will eventuate and, if it does, whether it will materially interfere with the lawyer’s independent professional judgment in considering alternatives or foreclose courses of action that reasonably should be pursued on behalf of the client.” The Comments to Model Rule 1.7 further acknowledge that conflicts of interest in transactional contexts may be difficult to assess.

According to Function:

the advantages [of representing multiple clients in a bond transaction] would [ordinarily] include efficiencies of time and consequent costs savings, while the disadvantages would [ordinarily] include the loss of confidentiality and undivided loyalty, the inability of the lawyer to serve as chief negotiator for either side, and

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 232

Page 237: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

the fact that the one lawyer or law firm intimately familiar with the transaction would be lost to it if matters became adversarial.

F. Trimble v. Holmes Harbor Sewer Dist., 2007 Wash. App. LEXIS 585. The Washington Court of Appeals affirmed a state superior court ruling that a $20 million tax-exempt municipal bond sale from the Holmes Harbor Sewer District on Whidbey Island, Washington was illegal. The court found the sale illegal, only partly because the sale was intended to aid a private development outside the sewer district’s boundaries. Five participants in the sale had already pled guilty to a variety of criminal charges brought by the United States Attorney for the Western District of Washington, including an engineer, a mortgage broker, and developer’s counsel, a solo attorney practicing in Everett, Washington. In April 2004, developer’s counsel admitted that many representations he had made in disclosure documents in connection with the bond issuance were false and fraudulent. For example, claims that the office space had been pre-leased to Microsoft were false; representations concerning the property value were false; representations that $63 million in private financing had been committed were false; and statements that permits were in place to begin construction were also false. Additionally, developer’s counsel admitted as a part of the plea agreement that a $1.2 million reimbursement payment to the developer at closing was fraudulent and that there were efforts to obtain another fraudulent $900,000 reimbursement shortly after the bonds were issued. The Supreme Court of the State of Washington has denied the petition for review.

G. The City of San Diego filed a lawsuit against its Bond Counsel firm in connection with its pension plan. City of San Diego v. Orrick Herrington & Sutcliffe, et al., was set to proceed in Ventura County, California, about 200 miles from San Diego (Case No. CIV242050). Several City officials serving on the Pension Board had already been indicted, and the SEC filed fraud charges against the City. The City entered into a consent decree with the SEC, implementing the Commission’s notion of best practices in municipal disclosure, which is typically discussed at another of the Workshop’s Panels. The pending civil litigation by the City involved a number of bond offerings which raised over $1.4 billion in tax-exempt debt, with Orrick as Bond Counsel. The City reputedly sought $100.0 million in damages for Bond Counsel’s failure to disclose the serious underfunding of the City Pension System in the related Official Statements and failing to advise the City that the disclosure documents were inadequate. The case was settled, with Orrick paying $2.8 million to the City.

H. Wells Fargo Advantage Nat. Tax Fee Fund v. Helicon Associates, Inc., 2013 WL 1316471 (6th Cir., 2013). An officer of a charter school in Michigan was also an officer of a corporation which sold a building to such charter school. Underwriters' counsel for the bond issue that financed the building purchase drafted the Preliminary Official Statement, allegedly knowing of the conflict but failing to disclose it. As a result of the violation of state law and other problems with the bond issue, the chartering entity of the school forced the unwinding of the bond issue, which caused plaintiffs to lose several million dollars. District court granted summary judgment for counsel, but the appeals court reversed. The appeals court stated it was enough at this early stage in the litigation, that underwriters' counsel allegedly drafted the POS and edited and revised the Official Statement knowing the documents omitted material facts. Under Michigan law, a third party may hold an attorney liable for negligent misrepresentation when the attorney negligently performed a contractual duty and the third party was either

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 233

Page 238: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

someone the attorney knew would rely on the information or someone the attorney should have reasonably foreseen would rely on the information.

I. First Arkansas Bank & Trust, et. al. v. Gill Elrod Ragon Owen & Sherman, P.A., et. al, 2013 Ark. 159 (Ark., 2013). Bond counsel prepared the disclosure documents on a failed housing development project. In the documents, bond counsel omitted disclosure of a mortgage on the developed property, from which the borrower was paying user fees on the bonds. The property was sold and the plaintiffs alleged fraud on the part of bond counsel for not disclosing this information. Bond counsel contended that the lien on the user tax was prior to the undisclosed mortgage and therefore did not need to be disclosed. The Supreme Court of Arkansas found there was a material issue of fact on this point

J. SEC and Related Proceedings:

1. Weiss v. SEC, 468 F.3d 849 (D.C. Cir. 2006). An administrative law judge found that Weiss did not violate sections of the Securities Act and Exchange Act when acting as Bond Counsel for a school district. In re Ira Weiss, Initial Decision Release No. 275 (Feb. 25, 2005). The SEC reversed, finding that Weiss misrepresented the risk that interest on the bonds would be taxable. In re Ira Weiss, Exchange Act Release No. 8641 (Dec. 2, 2005). The D.C. Circuit agreed with the SEC’s decision and denied Weiss’ petition for judicial review. Although it is possible to view the proceedings in the conflicts of interest context, the proceedings focused on Weiss’ misrepresentations and failure to provide information to the school board and investors. In Weiss, the court, citing Tax Standard (which was citing the 1987 edition of the Model Bond Opinion Report), concluded that “the purpose of an unqualified bond opinion is to “assure investors that…there is no reasonable risk of…taxability that the investors should take into account in making an investment decision, except for risks disclosed in the opinion.” (emphasis added).

2. Exchange Act Release No. 17831 (June 1, 1981). Although deciding not to bring an enforcement action, the Commission issued this report to point out what it considered to be deficiencies in the performance by underwriter’s counsel in rendering his 10b-5 opinion “without questioning the omission from the offering circular of financial statements concerning the issuer’s prior operating history, reviewing any documents as to the financial status of the issuer, or making inquiry as to results of the operations of prior years.” Id. at 4.

3. SEC v. Haswell, 1977 U.S. Dist. LEXIS 13396. This proceeding involved an alleged misrepresentation of the tax-exempt status of the bonds and misleading statements in the final offering document which unfortunately, Bond Counsel did not insist on reviewing.

4. In re Derryl W. Peden, Exchange Act Release No. 35045 (Dec. 2, 1994). Bond Counsel consented to an injunction against future violations of Section 10(b) of the 1934 Act to settle a proceeding brought by SEC in In re Thorn, Alvis, Welch, Inc., John E. Thorn, Jr., and Derryl W. Peden, A.P. File No. 3-8400 (June 23, 1994) based on failure to disclose a risk that bonds were not tax exempt based on method of financing the developer’s contribution.

5. In re Jean Costanza, Securities Act Release No. 7621, A.P. File No. 3-9799 (Jan. 6, 1996). In the SEC action arising from the infamous Orange County

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 234

Page 239: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

(California) bankruptcy proceedings, Bond Counsel consented to an injunction against future violations of Sections 17(a)(2) and (3) of the 1933 Act to settle a proceeding brought by SEC alleging deficiencies in disclosure regarding investment in a pool, an interest rate cap, and the jeopardy of the tax-exempt status of the bonds related to improper issue sizing.

6. Orange County, which sued its investment banking firm, Merrill Lynch & Co., and its audit firm, KPMG Peat Marwick (now KPMG), had for several years managed a treasury pool (the “Pool”) for the County and for a number of other local agencies who were either voluntary or mandatory participants in the Pool under State law. The Pool was administered by the County Treasurer/Tax Collector, who made the decision to enter into a number of investments in repurchase agreements, among other investments that were non-standard in the world of municipal finance. Earned rates were so high that the County “hid” a certain percentage from the Pool participants, and agencies located far distant from Orange County asked to invest their spare cash in the Pool. When market conditions turned in 1994, a panicked Treasurer/Tax Collector was convinced to declare bankruptcy, rather than ride out the change in the market, resulting in a loss of approximately $1.8 billion to the Pool, spread among the participants. The County asked Bond Counsel to contribute $500 million to help ameliorate the problem. Among other aspects of the County claim, they alleged:

Bond Counsel’s partners should comprise individual defendants, with the intention of accessing “the personal assets of the partners.”

Bond Counsel failed to act responsibly in permitting the County to issue the notes (by its delivery of unqualified bond opinions);

Bond Counsel had a conflict of interest because a partner contributed to the reelection campaign of the Treasurer/Tax Collector;

Bond Counsel should have taken it upon herself to warn the County Board of Supervisors that the Treasurer/Tax Collector was in over his intellectual head; and

Bond Counsel had helpfully made notes at a meeting, which included the comment, “If interest rates go up 300 bp pts DISASTER.”

Bond Counsel’s law firm eventually agreed to settle for $55.2 million, with $6.0 million being paid by individual partners.

K. IRS’s Office of Professional Responsibility – Bond Counsel was suspended for 24 months from practicing before the IRS due to, among other things, gross incompetence. IRS News Release IR-10-57 (May 5, 2010)

L. Treasury Department Circular 230 sets forth the rules to practice before the United States Treasury Department and provides for disciplinary action against persons involved in unethical and unprofessional conduct. In May of 2010 the IRS’s Office of Professional Responsibility suspended a bond attorney for at least 24 months from practicing before the IRS for writing a false tax opinion. The bond attorney admitted to giving false opinions “knowingly,

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 235

Page 240: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

recklessly, or through gross incompetence” and failing to exercise due diligence in violation of Circular 230. In the proceeding at issue, bonds were issued to finance an office building outside of the jurisdiction of the Issuer, which led to a determination that the bonds were not validly issued.

M. Bond Counsel also may be subject to monetary penalties under Section 6700 of the Internal Revenue Code if (1) Bond Counsel organizes or participates in the sale of bonds and (2) knows or has reason to know that any statement made or furnished by Bond Counsel (such as the bond opinion) with respect to the allowability of any deduction or credit, the excludability of any income, or the securing of any other tax benefit by reason of holding an interest in the bonds was false or fraudulent as to any material manner.

IV. BENEFITS OF ENGAGEMENT LETTERS

An engagement letter is a useful tool in minimizing the risk of professional liability. A written engagement letter or formal contract – which is the preference of a substantial number of larger issuers – should be transaction-specific and will aid in Bond Counsel’s practice in several ways. An engagement letter sent prior to or shortly after the commencement of substantive work on a transaction will yield the greatest benefits for both Bond Counsel and the client. It will:

A. Minimize disagreements or misunderstandings by setting forth terms and duties of counsel, potentially reducing Bond Counsel’s exposure.

B. Focus attention on the conditions and guidelines that govern the proposed attorney/client relationship.

C. Lead to a more productive relationship through clear allocation of responsibilities.

D. Define the scope of legal services, address limits on Bond Counsel’s responsibilities, and correct any misperceptions.

E. Identify any consents which may be required and the disclosures upon which such consents are based.

F. Specify the client’s obligations.

G. Call attention to areas where the engagement of additional representation or other professionals may be required.

V. SCOPE OF ENGAGEMENT

Bond Counsel. Both Function and Model Engagement Letters delineate the services to be performed by Bond Counsel, but those services may vary from state to state and transaction to transaction. The engagement letter or contract gives Bond Counsel the opportunity to state clearly the limitations of the legal services to be provided and the scope of each opinion to be rendered. Perhaps, just as important, many malpractice insurers make the use of an engagement

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 236

Page 241: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

letter a requirement in order for coverage to be available under the applicable policy. The services to be rendered include (at least) those which are necessary to enable Bond Counsel to render the legal opinion regarding the validity and binding effect of the obligations, the source of payment and security for the obligations, and the federal (and state, if applicable) income tax treatment of interest on the obligations.

A. Customary Duties. The “traditional” services (i.e., services not specific to tax or securities laws and requirements) Bond Counsel may render include:

(i) preparing and reviewing documents necessary or appropriate to the authorization, issuance, sale, and delivery of the obligations, coordinating the authorization and execution of such documents, and, in exceptional cases, drafting enabling legislation;

(ii) assisting the issuer in seeking from other governmental authorities such approvals, permissions, and exemptions as are necessary or appropriate in connection with the authorization, issuance, and delivery of the obligations;

(iii) reviewing legal issues relating to the structure of the transaction;

(iv) initiating election proceedings or pursuing validation proceedings;

(v) preparing notices of sale in competitive bid transactions, or negotiating the bond purchase agreement and preparing newspaper publication of notices of the issuer’s governing board action in negotiated transactions;

(vi) assisting in presenting information relating to the structure and legality of the obligations to rating agencies, bond insurers, and other providers of credit enhancement; and

(vii) drafting certifications for issuer officials to execute and establish compliance with legal requirements for issuing obligations, incumbency of issuer officials, absence or status of any litigation affecting the issuance of the obligations, and closing requirements.

The engagement letter should state any anticipated opinion limitations, to the extent known at the time. This may include language stating that Bond Counsel will rely upon the certified proceedings and certifications of public officials and other persons furnished to Bond Counsel without undertaking to verify the same by independent investigation.

The engagement letter should also include any assumptions that Bond Counsel will make, such as assuming that the client or others will provide Bond Counsel with complete and timely information on all developments pertaining to the bonds and their security. Bond Counsel should remember that reliance upon the client or others to provide Bond Counsel such information does not abrogate any responsibilities Bond Counsel may have under federal and state securities laws or under general law. Bond Counsel may rely upon the work product or opinion of other parties to the transaction only to the extent that such reliance is reasonable. If there is co-bond counsel, the engagement letter may include a statement as to the role and responsibilities of co-bond counsel.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 237

Page 242: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

B. Special Assignments. Many Bond Counsel engagements now include services beyond the “traditional” or historic roles of Bond Counsel. For example, it is now presumed that Bond Counsel will undertake the necessary diligence and provide advice on the Tax Code requirements with respect to the tax-exemption of interest on the proposed issue. This role may vary when separate “special tax counsel” is engaged to provide advice related to Tax Code compliance. Examples of Tax Code-related services include, but are not limited to, the following:

(i) providing general advice under the Tax Code;

(ii) preparing and publishing the TEFRA Notice, participating in the public hearing and securing the required public approval;

(iii) investigating and inquiring as to the issuer’s or conduit borrower’s compliance with applicable requirements under the Tax Code;

(iv) establishing procedures for monitoring on-going compliance with Tax Code requirements (e.g., income requirements for residential rental property or single-family mortgage bond programs), compliance with capital expenditure limitations for “exempt small issue” bonds, or arbitrage rebate;

(v) assisting the issuer or others in structuring or evaluating the legal structure of derivative agreements (e.g., interest rate swap agreements, forward float agreements) to hedge interest rate risk or other risks relating to the bonds, including, if requested, drafting documents necessary to treat such agreements as “qualified hedges” for federal income tax purposes (see Article XIV hereof regarding the Dodd-Frank Act as described therein); and

(vi) preparing required certifications from the issuer, the conduit borrower (if any), and other parties to the transaction, such as investment providers.

C. Securities Law Advice. Bond Counsel may also provide advice and opinions on issues arising under federal securities laws. Examples of such services include:

(i) preparing the official statements, private placement memoranda, other disclosure documents, or portions thereof (especially if acting as disclosure counsel in addition to Bond Counsel);

(ii) drafting the continuing disclosure undertaking of the issuer or conduit borrower or remedying disclosure deficiencies of issues; and

(iii) advising and assisting the issuer in preparing and filing continuing disclosure documents, including investor relations websites maintained by the issuer.

Because of the variety of possible assignments, Bond Counsel should draft the engagement letter to account for the particular role Bond Counsel has been asked to perform in a specific transaction.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 238

Page 243: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

D. Exceptions. In addition to some or all of the foregoing roles in a tax-exempt bond transaction, engagement letters should specifically state which tasks are outside the described scope of Bond Counsel services. These exclusions may include, depending on the circumstances:

(i) preparing official statements or providing advice on the offering documents;

(ii) preparing requests for tax rulings from the Internal Revenue Service;

(iii) preparing Blue Sky or Legal Investment Surveys with respect to the obligations (traditionally prepared by Underwriter’s Counsel);

(iv) drafting constitutional or legislative amendments;

(v) pursuing test cases or other litigation;

(vi) making an investigation or expressing any view of the creditworthiness of the issuer or the bonds;

(vii) reviewing and opining on float forward agreements, investment of bond proceeds, interest rate swaps, and other derivative products;

(viii) responding to examinations, inquiries, or investigations by the Internal Revenue Service or the Securities and Exchange Commission;

(ix) taking responsibility for continuing disclosure and monitoring post-closing compliance with Tax Code requirements (including arbitrage rebate); or

(x) providing other post-closing advice.

This does not mean that Bond Counsel might not be engaged to perform any of these services in a specific transaction or a series of on-going transactions. Issuers often engage Bond Counsel to represent them for a set period of time, sometimes pursuant to an RFP, to provide all the above services. For single transaction engagements, the specific enumeration of services to be provided in the engagement letter can be useful. This enumeration establishes when Bond Counsel is entitled to additional compensation for services beyond the scope of the original engagement, particularly when the transaction’s structure or credit support changes over the course of the engagement.

Bond Counsel should also consider disclaiming responsibility for providing financial advice in the engagement letter. Such advice should not be considered part of the role of Bond Counsel (and may not be covered by a firm’s malpractice insurance), but explicit notice to the client may be helpful in a later dispute as to the agreed-upon scope of services. See also Section XV herein.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 239

Page 244: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

Some states require that the governing board of a public agency approve engagement of Bond Counsel. See, e.g., Cal. Gov. Code § 53060, which states that the governing board of a public agency must approve any contract for, among other things, legal services, whereupon the agency “may pay from any available funds such compensation to such persons as it deems proper for the services rendered.” The uncomfortable effect of this type of statute is to require the disgorgement of earned attorneys’ fees by a law firm whose contract either (a) was not in fact approved by the governing board or (b) did not include the paid-for services within its scope. In Louisiana, the Attorney General must approve the employment of bond counsel by public entities. In any event, it is good practice for Bond Counsel to include in an authorizing bond resolution its appointment and approval for payment of fees.

Limiting the scope of Bond Counsel’s services is permitted under Model Rule 1.2(c) provided the client gives “informed consent” after consultation with the client and the limitation is reasonable under the circumstances. The Terminology Section of Rule 1.0 of the Model Rules includes a definition for informed consent and provides that lawyers must communicate “adequate information and explanation about the material risks and reasonably available alternatives to the proposed course of conduct.”

Bond Counsel should also be aware that if Bond Counsel prepares IRS Form 8038, the IRS will consider Bond Counsel to be a paid tax return preparer, subject to IRS regulations, including registration, continuing education, compliance checks and ethical standards.

Underwriter’s Counsel. While much of the material cited herein has been produced by NABL and others specifically to address issues arising when a firm or attorney is retained as Bond Counsel, many of the same issues apply when the assignment is undertaken as Underwriter’s counsel. For some firms, state law forces them to choose between the two types of engagement on bond matters; for most, it is frequent that an underwriter (Firm Q) on a transaction for Issuer A is represented by Lawyer X, while her partner, Lawyer Y, is representing Issuer B as Bond Counsel in a transaction also being underwritten by Firm Q. If Issuer B bids out Bond Counsel work in the following year, Lawyer Y may be suggested for an assignment as Underwriter’s counsel to another investment banking firm on Issuer B’s next deal. These situations are complex and fluid and require a lawyer’s full attention.

Compliance departments at major investment banking houses have recently begun to issue their own “engagement letters” which detail all the possible assignments that underwriter’s counsel could be given in the course of a bond transaction, although in a given deal, many, if not most, of those articulated tasks are not, in fact, being requested.4 In these and all other cases, an engagement letter for work as Underwriter’s counsel might describe the following:

A. preparing the Preliminary Official Statement and the final Official Statement;

B. participating in meetings and/or conference calls;

C. assisting the Underwriter in conducting the necessary due diligence on the financing, the financed project, and the issuer’s compliance with continuing disclosure requirements;

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 240

Page 245: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

D. drafting a Bond Purchase Agreement and, in the case of a larger transaction with more than one Underwriter, an Agreement Among Underwriters;

E. reviewing and commenting on Bond Counsel documents; and

F. preparing Blue Sky and Legal Investment Surveys, as requested.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, it is generally agreed that the Bond Counsel opinion addressing the validity and binding effect of the obligations, the source of payment or security for the obligations, and the tax status of the obligations must be an objective opinion based on reasonable certainty. Underwriter’s counsel must only believe that Bond Counsel’s position is a reasonable one.

VI. ANATOMY OF AN ENGAGEMENT LETTER

A clear engagement letter with the proper elements is a powerful shield in any professional liability situation.

A. Addressee. Be certain to address the engagement letter to the person with authority to enter into such contracts generally; if unknown, direct the letter to the executive head of the public agency, whether a Mayor, a Superintendent, or the State Treasurer. If your state requires approval of such matters by a governing board, mention this requirement in your letter.

B. Communications. Consider specifically reserving the right to communicate directly with members of the governing board. It is extremely important for Bond Counsel to determine who speaks for the client. See Model Rule 1.13 which provides that the client is the “organization” acting through its duly authorized constituents. See also ABA Formal Op 97-405 (April 19, 1997) which discusses when and under what circumstances a lawyer represents the entire government or just a particular agency or department. The opinion provides that in the absence of an express agreement the identity of the government client may be inferred from the reasonable understandings and expectations of the lawyer and responsible government officials, taking into account such functional considerations as how the government client presented to the lawyer is legally defined and funded, whether it has independent legal authority with respect to the matter for which the lawyer has been retained, and the extent to which the matter involved in the proposed representation has general importance for other governmental components in the jurisdiction. A misunderstanding as to who Bond Counsel's client is subjects Bond Counsel to broader potential liability.

C. Nature and Purpose of Issue. Based on informal communications with the Issuer, the Underwriter or Financial Advisor, or, in the case of an engagement letter or services contract resulting from selection after an RFP, based on the description in the RFP, outline the basic facts of the transaction as you know them, so that if the structure materially changes, you can renegotiate the terms and scope of the engagement, and, most particularly, the fees.

D. Excluded Parties. In some situations, it may be advisable to identify certain parties to the transaction you will NOT be representing. For example, if the assignment is as Bond Counsel to an agency about to conduct a bond election, you may wish to point out that you

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 241

Page 246: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

will not be representing the Campaign Committee. There is no Model Rule governing non-engagement letters. See Comment 4 to Model Rule 1.3 as to whether the attorney-client relationship exists and the duties imposed upon the applicable lawyer.

E. Scope of Services. Outline the services, such as those discussed above, that you contemplate will be necessary in order to perform your duties as Bond Counsel, given the facts as they have been described.

F. Potential Conflicts; Fair Notice. Bond Counsel should use this opportunity to disclose the fact that either he or his firm has done or is doing work for some other party in the deal, such as the Underwriter, in unrelated matters. Where the Underwriter has not yet been selected, a general warning of this possibility should be sufficient, but should be followed with a confirmation when selection occurs.

G. Document Retention Policy. As more law firms move towards a paperless work environment, the engagement letter may provide the appropriate place to disclose to a client document retention policy as it relates to converting paper documents generated or received by the firm into an electronic format as well as what is done with the originals.

VII. IDENTIFY YOUR CLIENT

A. The historical view that Bond Counsel served as “counsel to the transaction” is no longer generally accepted among NABL lawyers, but vestiges of this perspective remain within certain segments of the industry. At least one SEC commissioner has commented that “the role of bond lawyers has expanded and now includes many more tasks[.]” The commissioner also questioned whether “it is unreasonable to expect that bond lawyers at least point out problems that they notice to the issuer and other transaction participants[.]” See Speech by SEC Commissioner Roel C. Campos to the 30th Annual Bond Attorneys Workshop, September 15, 2005, available at www.sec.gov/news/speech/spch091505rcc.htm.

B. The Model Rules assume that if a lawyer renders professional services in a transaction, at least one party to the transaction is a client of that lawyer who is either entitled to such services, or entitled to not have the lawyer render such services to another party in the transaction without the client’s consent.

C. Certain duties may be owed to non-clients, e.g., bondholders and others in the transaction. These duties, to the extent they exist, arise primarily from common law concepts of agency, representation and reliance, and from statutory rules, both civil and criminal, relating to securities transactions. See Rule 2.3 of the Model Rules on duties to third-party recipients of opinions. While some government officials or institutional purchasers continue to assert that Bond Counsel represents the bondholders, this concept is not compatible with the Model Rules and thus, not viable from a loss prevention standpoint.

D. By identifying a client, Bond Counsel can deal appropriately under the Model Rules with situations involving loyalty, confidentiality, privilege, conflict, communication, and consent. It may be advisable to communicate to the working group exactly who Bond Counsel represents in the transaction. In this context, consider whether the working group distribution list

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 242

Page 247: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

or the language on the cover of the Preliminary Official Statement and Official Statement indicating who Bond Counsel is representing is adequate. Bond Counsel may also consider sending a letter to transaction participants who may otherwise assume that Bond Counsel is representing or providing advice to them. For example, Bond Counsel to a state-wide bond bank who prepares documents, certificates, or questionnaires for participating governmental participants to complete may want to specifically disclaim that it represents those participants in the bond bank’s financing program.

E. Particularly in conduit financings for public agencies (e.g., when a joint powers authority issues for one of its members) or private entities (e.g., exempt facilities, industrial development bonds, or multifamily housing issues), Bond Counsel fees may be paid by someone other than the issuer. This does not necessarily make the second party Bond Counsel’s client. The engagement letter is a good opportunity to spell this out. Likewise, the payment by an issuer of the fees of Underwriter’s counsel will not create an attorney-client relationship between the issuer and such counsel. This situation is often resolved in language in the opinion rendered by Underwriter’s counsel.

F. In reliance letters or opinions to parties to the transaction (such as supplemental opinions to the underwriter), Bond Counsel will want to note that it has not acted as the addressee’s legal counsel and has not entered into an attorney-client relationship with the addressee.

VIII. CLIENT INTAKE CONCERNS AND LIABILITY

Many firms have come to the realization that client intake – focusing for purposes of this discussion on new clients – is one of the most significant factors in managing malpractice liability. Law firms are loathe to sue clients over fees, but both clients and bondholders have continued to sue their bond lawyers over perceived slights, leading to a few reported cases and many quiet settlements. In many instances, these lawsuits are commenced in part because of misunderstandings as to the scope of a Bond Counsel engagement, but in other instances, because of dishonest or incompetent clients or other members of the finance team, ranging from investment bankers to private corporations to inexperienced, overwhelmed or corrupt public agency representatives.

To the extent possible, Bond Counsel should take advantage of the internet to conduct as much due diligence as possible regarding not just the client or other individual bringing the matter to the firm, but also regarding other transaction participants. As a matter of practice, it would be good to avoid doing business, among other things, with investment bankers under investigation by the SEC, agency officials facing indictment for corruption and persons with no or virtually no experience in the type of project to be funded with Bond proceeds. Much of this kind of background information may be obtained electronically prior to commencing work on a matter.

During the course of a transaction, much as sensible Bond Counsel will note and re-check additional parties for conflicts purposes (see above), a lawyer who senses a lack of skill, judgment or honesty among members of the finance team should do his utmost to ascertain the

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 243

Page 248: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

nature of the deficiency and its possible effect on the transaction, and then to consult with his client, his partners and others, as appropriate. From a liability standpoint, it is far better to lose the investment of time and charges to date by withdrawing in a timely fashion from a tainted deal than to close it and expose the individual lawyer and the law firm to an adverse judgment. See“BASIS OF LIABILITY” above.

IX. ESTABLISHMENT AND TERMINATION OF ATTORNEY/CLIENT RELATIONSHIP

A. Engagement letters should specify when the attorney/client relationship is established (e.g., upon execution of the engagement letter or at an earlier point). In responding to a Request for Proposals, it is advisable for Bond Counsel to include a statement that the attorney/client relationship is created only upon selection as Bond Counsel and agreement as to the responsibilities of Bond Counsel. Such a statement will aid Bond Counsel in avoiding conflict situations. In many jurisdictions, written proposals and engagement letters or contracts must be approved by action of the governing board, and you should check your state law for situations that affect your practice. In California, for example, failure to obtain approval by the governing board can result in a law firm’s disgorgement of duly earned and paid fees.

B. An engagement letter should also include a statement as to when the attorney/client relationship is concluded. This statement is useful in dealing with conflicts of interests, such that the analysis becomes one of the duties owed to former clients should a conflict arise in the future. In most cases, the engagement of Bond Counsel will terminate upon delivery of the opinion at closing. Post-closing responsibilities (other than preparing transcripts or filing any Forms 8038 or 8038-G) should be covered specifically in the engagement letter or in a separate engagement letter. Some Bond Counsel write a separate termination (disengagement) letter.

Disengagement letters may be of particular value in circumstances where Bond Counsel has met with a potential tax-exempt borrower or public agency, which then decides to do a different kind of financing, or can never get organized for the contemplated transaction. In order to avoid later claims that a firm is still acting as Bond Counsel, based on an unproductive meeting or series of meetings, Bond Counsel can reduce exposure by sending the putative client a letter declaring that any nascent relationship is now at an end.

C. In requests for proposals, issuers sometimes request that Bond Counsel enter into an agreement to indemnify the issuer for losses associated with an incorrect Bond Counsel opinion. ALAS has gone on record that Bond Counsel should refrain from entering into such agreements for a variety of reasons, including issues of insurance coverage, creation of liability where none existed, and deprivation of defenses. As a result, some law firms have declined to respond to RFPs where indemnification is a baseline requirement. But in some states, Bond Counsel have had to accept such indemnification provisions which are non-negotiable with the issuer client. See also Section 10.27 of Circular 230 which prohibits “contingent fees” in representing a client before the IRS. The definition of “contingent fee” is generally not applicable to the bond practice, but there is language that says that “A contingent fee also includes any fee arrangement in which the practitioner will reimburse the client for all or a

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 244

Page 249: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

portion of the client’s fee in the event that a position taken on a tax return or other filing is challenged by the [IRS] or is not sustained, whether pursuant to an indemnity agreement…or any other arrangement with a similar effect.”

X. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST – CURRENT CLIENTS

Very few law firms engaged in the practice of municipal finance represent only one client at a time. The larger the firm, the more complex is the process whereby Bond Counsel can ascertain whether the firm as a whole has a conflict of interest in a matter. It is also an oddity of our practice that Bond Counsel often regards the entire “finance team” as working towards a common goal, a view that can reduce sensitivity to actual, business or perceived conflicts of interest.

In analyzing any type of conflict, the following points should be kept in mind:

A. Before establishing a new attorney/client relationship, the Model Rules require Bond Counsel to evaluate whether he can represent adequately the interests of the client, without compromising duties to existing or former clients. Bond Counsel should complete a thorough conflicts check to evaluate whether the proposed representation of the issuer presents no conflict, “business” or “political” conflicts that are only generally adverse and do not require consent, or a current or potential conflict requiring informed consent.

B. The subject of conflicts is fact-specific.

C. In general, a breach of the Model Rules may give rise to disciplinary action, but is not per se malpractice, or a breach of a contractual obligation to a client. In describing a possible conflict to, or seeking consent from, a potential client, care should be taken to ensure that Bond Counsel does not inadvertently create an unnecessary contractual obligation.

D. Again, identification of a client by Bond Counsel is critical for determining the application of Model Rule 1.7 to an engagement.

E. Under the Model Rules, a concurrent conflict of interest exists if there is: (a) direct adversity, where two clients are fundamentally antagonistic to one another, or (b) material limitation, where the quality of Bond Counsel’s representation may be affected by duties to another client, a former client, a third person, or by its own interests.

Direct Adversity: If a contemplated representation is or will be directly adverse, the duty of loyalty owed to the client will, necessarily, be affected. The general rule is that adverse representation of concurrent clients is prima facie improper and can rarely be cured by consent. Direct adversity normally means an adverse position in litigation. However, an “[a]dverse interest[] may arise between entities independent of their involvement as parties to a lawsuit.” West Virginia ex rel. Morgan Stanley & Co. v. MacQueen, 416 S.E.2d 55, 60 (W. Va. 1992) [citations omitted]. In Formal Opinion 95-390, the ABA suggested that representation is directly adverse “if the [second] representation involve[s] attacking the conduct or credibility of the second client, or seeking to compel resisted discovery from the client.” ABA Comm. on

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 245

Page 250: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

Ethics and Prof’l Responsibility, Formal Op. 95-390 at 12 (1995) (citing ABA Comm. on Ethics and Prof’l Responsibility Formal Op. 92-367 (1992)).

Whether a law firm can represent an issuer as Bond Counsel in a negotiated financing, if another lawyer in that firm is simultaneously representing the underwriter in other unrelated matters, is a subject on which positions vary. Some view that situation as a nonconsentable conflict, while others conclude that consent is possible, based upon the particular facts of a transaction. See Iowa Supreme Court Board of Professional Ethics and Conduct, Op. 06-03, Bond Counsel Representation, released Nov. 6, 2006.

In California, the Government Code contains provisions regulating the practice, which in the past had been prevalent, of a single law firm’s acting both as Bond Counsel and Underwriter’s Counsel on the same transaction:

No bond counsel with respect to a new issue of bonds shall also be counsel, with respect to that new issue of bonds, to the underwriter or other initial purchaser of the bonds. This section does not preclude the bond counsel from rendering one or more opinions to the underwriter or purchaser with respect to the bonds, the documents or laws pursuant to which the bonds are issued, the official statement, offering circular, or other disclosure document describing the bonds, or any related matter, if the opinion is rendered as bond counsel and not as counsel to the underwriter or purchaser.

Cal. Gov. Code § 53593 (1985).

The foregoing Section applies only to local California agencies, and not to the State or its agencies and authorities. Given the breadth of public finance practice, especially among the larger law firms, it will be incumbent upon the attorney seeking to undertake work in a state whose laws he does not know well to search for any similar statutory limitations applicable to public finance work in that state.

Material Limitation: Model Rule 1.7(b) deals with competing interests that may distract Bond Counsel from the main task of loyally serving his client. A “material limitation” translates to an impairment of representation, i.e., “when a lawyer cannot consider, recommend or carry out an appropriate course of action for the client because of the lawyer’s other responsibilities or interests.”5

By its terms, Model Rule 1.7(b) requires the consent of the client(s) whose representation may be materially limited by the lawyer’s other duties or interests. In cases of common representation, consent should be obtained from all affected parties. When seeking consent in a common representation, it is important to point out to the parties that (i) counsel cannot maintain separate confidences as regards each of them; (ii) should a dispute arise between them, counsel may have to withdraw; and (iii) counsel cannot represent any of them in a suit between them related to the transaction.

Imputation: Any knowledge possessed by one attorney in a firm is presumptively possessed by all other attorneys in the firm.6

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 246

Page 251: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

However, some courts have adopted a doctrine of “vertical responsibility” particularly applicable to large law firms. Under the vertical responsibility doctrine, “[a]bsent direct proof to the contrary, the attorney would not be deemed to have shared confidential information relating to matters and services exclusively within the sphere of representation of another department or section of his firm.” Cleveland v. Cleveland Electric Illuminating Co., 440 F. Supp. 193, 211 (N.D. OH 1976). In Cleveland, the court found no evidence that two attorneys in the same firm’s Public Law group and Litigation group, respectively, made confidential disclosures to each other. Id.

Case law in this area should be watched carefully for its impact upon the municipal bond practice. In the absence of State case law such as exists in the Cleveland case supra, strict adherence to the Model Rules in this area provides a safe harbor.

Reasonable Belief: In cases of either direct adversity or material limitation, Bond Counsel cannot undertake a new representation unless Bond Counsel reasonably believes that the representation (or the existing client relationship) will not be adversely affected, i.e., that the proposed representation will not materially interfere with the lawyer’s independent professional judgment.

“Reasonable belief” is defined under the Terminology section of the Model Rules in Rule 1.0 to mean that “the lawyer believes the matter in question and that the circumstances are such that the belief is reasonable.” “Reasonable belief” is determined by applying an objective analysis.

Factors for each attorney to consider before arriving at the conclusion that the representation (or in cases of direct adversity, the relationship) will not be adversely affected or that consent can be properly given, include:

(i) whether Bond Counsel can represent an existing client, as well as the new client, with undivided loyalty;

(ii) whether Bond Counsel can protect the confidentiality of each client;

(iii) the duration and extent of the engagement;

(iv) whether the representation would be limited or altered, as compared to the nature of separate representations; and

(v) the probability that the representation will lead to substantive harm or that a “conflict will eventuate.”

In cases of direct adversity, is there a reasonable element of probability of a conflict, as distinct from a remote chance?

In cases of material limitation, is there a substantial risk of material and adverse effect, “substantial” meaning that “the risk is significant and plausible, even if not probable?”

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 247

Page 252: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

In addition, Bond Counsel should develop a response to the potential conflict, so that the client can evaluate the consequences, should a conflict arise.

Consultation: If after a careful analysis and consideration of all of the factors listed above, Bond Counsel reasonably believes the representation (or in cases of direct adversity, the relationship) will not be adversely affected, then the client(s) must be consulted and advised of the current or potential conflict. The Model Rules define “consultation” as “communication of information reasonably sufficient to permit the client to appreciate the significance of the matter in question.”

The Ninth Circuit has held that the lawyer “must explain to [the clients] the nature of the conflict of interest in such detail so that they can understand the reasons why it may be desirable for each to [withhold consent].” Unified Sewerage Agency v. Telco Inc., 646 F.2d 1339, 1346 (9th Cir. 1981) (citing In re Boivin, 533 P.2d 171, 174 (1975)).

Good practice suggests that Bond Counsel call or meet with the client for consultation prior to sending the engagement letter. In the event the client is unsophisticated, Bond Counsel should consider discussing the engagement letter with the issuer’s general counsel or independent legal counsel; for many smaller issuers, none may exist and thus Bond Counsel is left with the responsibility to ensure understanding by the issuer.

Consent: Only after coming to the reasonable belief that the representation will not be adversely affected can Bond Counsel consult with the client to seek consent (also referred to as a “waiver of conflict”). The subject of conflicts of interest is one of the most fact-specific in the entire field of legal ethics. Knowledgeable, informed consent can only be given if the client is apprised of all pertinent facts and potential consequences. Therefore, it is difficult for any “form” to provide precise, comprehensive language for every transaction.

Model Rule 1.7(b)(4) requires the consent to be confirmed in writing.

Informed consent may cure the conflict of interest problem.7

There are three situations in which a conflict cannot be cured by consent, the first two of which rarely occur in public finance:

(i) conflicts between adversaries in the same litigation;

(ii) conflicts in which one or more of the clients is incapable of giving consent; and

(iii) “other circumstances rendering it unlikely that the lawyer will be able to provide adequate representation.”

Consent of Governmental Entity: One further special concern for public finance lawyers is obtaining consent to a conflict of interest from a governmental entity client. Some jurisdictions specifically do not permit such consent. See, e.g., New Jersey Rule of Professional Conduct Rule 1.7(b)(2), amended from its Model Rule equivalent to add, “provided, however, that a public entity cannot consent to any such representation;” In re Opinion 452 of the

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 248

Page 253: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

Advisory Committee on Professional Ethics, 432 A.2d 829 (N.J. 1981); West Virginia ex rel. Morgan Stanley & Co. v. MacQueen, 416 S.E.2d 55 (W. Va. 1992). Also see Op. No. 629 of the New York State Bar Association Commission on Professional Ethics dated March 23, 1992, which contains a general discussion of the issue and includes a survey of State rules on this point. As mentioned above, Bond Counsel should satisfy itself as to the State law requirements for consent to be valid.

And even if a conflict waiver is permissible where you practice, the decision as to which individual/officer at a public agency should sign such a waiver is not a trivial one. Some agencies, for example, require Bond Counsel to deal only with issuer’s counsel (city attorney, county counsel, etc.) on legal matters. Is there effective waiver of a conflict if issuer’s counsel signs a letter, but has never communicated on point with the governing board?

XI. FUTURE CONFLICTS

Prospective conflicts and prospective conflict waivers are of great importance to practicing lawyers in many fields, but perhaps particularly for Bond Counsel, who tend to represent a limited universe of municipal issuers and conduit borrowers.

Whenever a client has given a prospective waiver, Bond Counsel should reevaluate the waiver when a conflict does arise to determine whether it is reasonable to believe the client contemplated the conflict when signing the waiver. One must always question whether, having obtained a prospective waiver, a lawyer should inform that client when a future, presumably waived, conflict does arise in order to stop that client from later asserting that the waiver was not effective. The best practice will typically be to seek a new waiver from the client specifying the circumstances of the newly identified conflict. See also ABA Formal Op. 05-436.

XII. CONFLICTS OF INTEREST – FORMER CLIENTS

Model Rule 1.9 covers conflicts of interest arising from Bond Counsel’s relationships with former clients.8 Where a firm’s municipal practice includes a number of representations gained through the RFP process, this class of conflicts can be particularly troublesome, as issuers and underwriters who ask for proposals on a regular basis can be counted on to rotate assignments among a number of law firms. It is not unusual for an issuer to recommend a former Bond Counsel firm to its underwriter on the next deal.

The issues covered by Model Rule 1.9 arise where Bond Counsel represents the issuer in a transaction where Bond Counsel has served as Underwriter’s counsel or Trustee’s counsel in a separate transaction. The Comment to Rule 1.9 specifically states that a lawyer:

is not precluded from later representing another client in a factually distinct problem of that type even though the subsequent representation involves a position adverse to the prior client.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 249

Page 254: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

Comment 9 to the Model Rule 1.9 notes that the provisions of the Model Rules “are for the protection of former clients and can be waived if the client gives informed consent “confirmed in writing.”

Such a waiver is premised on consultation and consent. There is considerable support for the premise that having once served as underwriter’s counsel, later serving as Bond Counsel in another transaction would not be “the same or substantially related matter.” There are representations where such determination may not be appropriate, e.g., when Bond Counsel has learned confidential information from the underwriter that would be useful in negotiating on behalf of the issuer. Care should also be taken to ensure the termination of any prior engagement. Words indicating an ongoing relationship after billing may result in an ongoing representation and the courts will look to the belief of the client as to whether the client believes there is an ongoing attorney client relationship in making this determination.

Listed below are questions to determine whether Model Rule 1.9 applies to any of Bond Counsel’s former clients.

(1) Is the client truly a former client of Bond Counsel, i.e., has the engagement been terminated and does the client understand it has been terminated?

(2) Are the interests of the current and former clients “materially adverse?”

(3) Is there a “substantial relationship” between the two representations?

XIII. COMPETENCE

It should go without saying that a lawyer should only handle matters in which he is, or can reasonably become, competent. Rule 1.1 of the Model Rules codifies that notion and requires that an attorney “provide competent representation to a client.” The Comment to this Rule sets forth factors to be considered in determining competence including, among other things, the relative complexity and specialized nature of the matter and the lawyer’s training and experience.

A municipal finance practice is complex. According to Function:

[b]ond lawyers must be familiar with (or, in particular transactions, associate other lawyers who are familiar with) those areas for which bond counsel has accepted responsibility in the engagement, including the highly technical fields of municipal/local government law, tax law and securities law. Each attorney acting as bond counsel needs an appreciation of the general nature and requirements of all three of these areas of law in order to seek and obtain the assistance of others with requisite expertise.

In particular bond transactions, issues may arise that require knowledge of other practice areas, such as corporate law, bankruptcy and creditors’ rights, real estate and commercial law (e.g., Article 9 of the Uniform Commercial Code). It is not unusual for particular bond transactions to involve some form of dispute

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 250

Page 255: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

resolution, administrative hearing or litigation, including validation proceedings, test cases and direct challenges to the issuer’s authority to issue bonds. In these situations, the scope of bond counsel’s representation may necessarily involve other practice areas, such as administrative, regulatory, utility, injunctive relief and eminent domain matters. As stated in the Comment to Model Rule 1.1: “Perhaps the most fundamental legal skill consists of determining what kind of legal problems a situation may involve, a skill that necessarily transcends any particular specialized knowledge.” Depending on the nature and scope of the engagement, bond counsel need not necessarily be able to advise their client on questions that may arise in these other practice areas. If such issues are within the scope of the engagement, adequate representation can be provided through necessary preparation and study or through the association of a lawyer of established competence. Of course, each lawyer in the transaction, including specialists, co-counsel and supervisory or subordinate lawyers, must individually address the issue of his or her competence and that of other lawyers (if any) for whom he or she is responsible

XIV. ROLE AS ADVISOR

The role of Bond Counsel as advisor is specifically addressed in Function as follows:

“Model Rule 2.1 provides that a lawyer should exercise independent professional judgment and render candid advice. It further states that a lawyer may refer not only to law but to other considerations such as moral, economic, social, and political factors that may be relevant to the client’s situation.”

Bond Counsel are frequently put in a position in which they are asked to render both legal and non-legal advice. In some cases, as pointed out by the Comment to Rule 2.1, purely technical legal advice may be inadequate. Consequently, the right to give more extensive advice may become a duty to “indicat[e] that more may be involved than strictly legal considerations.” This would be the case where a client, inexperienced in legal matters, requests purely technical advice. Bond Counsel should consider in this regard whether such inexperience is only on the part of the representative of the issuer seeking advice, or the issuer as a corporate or governmental entity, including all its agents, staff, attorneys, and financial advisors. The answer to that question may vary depending on the context in which the request for advice is made and may dictate Bond Counsel's response.

In any event, neither the Rule nor the Comment suggests any circumstances in which the lawyer would have an affirmative duty to give substantive, non-legal advice. In this regard, an engagement letter clearly defining the scope of services and noting exclusions may help guide Bond Counsel. Clearly the extent to which non-legal advice should be offered depends upon the sophistication of the client, the client’s past course of dealings with the lawyer, and the competence of the lawyer in the non-legal field, as well as the presence in the transaction of other professionals who would be more competent to give such non-legal advice. In addition, the attorney should not hesitate to recommend the services of professionals in non-legal fields.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 251

Page 256: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

The Comment to Rule 2.1 also states that:

[W]hen a lawyer knows that a client proposes a course of action that is likely to result in substantial adverse legal consequences to the client, duty to the client under Rule 1.4 may require that the lawyer act if the client’s course of action is related to the representation. . . A lawyer ordinarily has no duty to initiate investigation of a client’s affairs or to give advice that the client has indicated is unwanted, but a lawyer may initiate advice to a client when doing so appears to be in the client’s interest.

Here again the consideration of who is the client is critical, especially where Bond Counsel may become aware either through public knowledge or in connection with subsequent work with an issuer or trustee of some event or tendency that is, or may lead to, e.g., a breach of a covenant in a prior bond issue.

In a case decided before the enactment of the Dodd-Frank Act as described below, defendant’s reliance on counsel as a defense against scienter or negligence was stricken where the advice was on financial matters and hence outside of counsel’s “respective areas of responsibility,” and of his “expertise.” See Draney v. Wilson, Morton, Assaf & McElligott, 592 F. Supp. 9 (D. Ariz. 1984).

XV. IMPLICATIONS OF THE DODD-FRANK ACT

Section 975 of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the “Dodd-Frank Act”) amended Section 15B of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 to (1) require municipal advisors to register with the Commission, (2) establish a fiduciary duty between a municipal advisor and the municipal entity, and (3) subject municipal advisors to additional anti-fraud provisions. Excluded from the term “municipal advisor” are “attorneys offering legal advice or providing services that are of a traditional legal nature.”

As discussed above, Model Rule 2.1 demands that the lawyer refer not only to the law, but also “…to other considerations such as economic…factors” that may be relevant to the client’s situation.

NABL submitted comments on February 25, 2011 to the Commission regarding the registration of municipal advisors. In such comments, NABL stated the following:

In view of lawyers’ duties to give counsel to clients, we believe that advice that is itself primarily financial (e.g., the relative cost of two alternative legally authorized methods of structuring a transaction) should be exempted if incidental to an overall engagement that is primarily legal in nature. Similarly, communications between a lawyer and a municipal entity or obligated person that are integral to delivering validity or other legal opinions should be excluded, recognizing that such communications often concern financial matters regarding debt limitations, arbitrage restrictions and other matters with a financial impact. On the other hand, we agree that a person should not be permitted to be hired for a primary financial engagement, or to solicit a municipal entity for municipal

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 252

Page 257: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

advisory work on behalf of another, without registering with the Commission, merely because he or she is a licensed attorney. This is in keeping with the standard set out in Model Rule 5.7, which includes ‘law-related services’ in the matters subject to the Model Rules if such services are provided by the lawyer in circumstances that are not distinct from the lawyer’s provision of legal services to clients.

Moreover, an exclusion limited to ‘advice provided within a lawyer-client relationship’ is somewhat problematic and ignores the tremendous amount of planning relating to the issuance of municipal securities that may occur prior to the creation of a formal lawyer-client relationship. It is sometimes the case that the lawyer-client relationship is not established with respect to a particular issue of municipal securities until the municipal entity retains the lawyer by resolution or ordinance, which may not occur until the structure, timing, terms and other similar matters concerning the particular issue of municipal securities have been discussed and determined. Even if the municipal entity intends to retain the lawyer for a bond issue, no official relationship may exist until it is memorialized by action by the relevant governing body, so the exclusion as proposed would not apply to much of the financial advice provided by lawyers. Attorney-client engagement letters often state that the engagement ends upon closing of the bond transaction. However, municipal entities and obligated persons will often request and receive advice from bond counsel related to the transaction following closing. Consequently, if the Commission does not accept our recommendation not to limit the exemption to advice given to clients, we recommend that it exempt advice provided by a lawyer with respect to a municipal securities issue or municipal financial product for which there is or is expected to be a lawyer-client relationship, or for which a lawyer-client relationship previously existed.

In addition, municipal finance lawyers will often prepare educational seminars, newsletters and e-mail alerts for clients and non-clients alike. Limiting the exclusion to advice given in the context of an attorney-client relationship would severely limit this practice to the detriment of municipal entities and obligated persons, unless ‘providing advice’ is given the limited construction urged in paragraph 4 of our introductory statement to these comments.

XVI. MULTI-STATE PRACTICE

The unauthorized practice of law is a major concern from a liability standpoint and care should always be taken in accepting engagements outside of one's jurisdiction of admission. The issue of multi-jurisdictional practice has increased in magnitude as attorneys increasingly travel to other states, often providing legal advice and services in locations and jurisdictions in which they are not licensed to practice. Invariably Bond Counsel will be approached for their expertise for a financing matter proposed to be undertaken across state lines. What occurs when Bond Counsel is licensed to practice in State A, but the matter is located in State B? May you act as Bond Counsel for an issuer in State B when you and your law firm are only licensed to practice in State A? Will retaining local counsel in State B have the effect of curing Bond Counsel’s licensing defect?

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 253

Page 258: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

The answers to these questions generally center on what is, and what is not, considered to be the unauthorized practice of law in any particular jurisdiction.

Rule 5.5(a) of the Model Rules states that:

“A lawyer shall not:

(a) practice law in a jurisdiction in violation of the regulation of the legal profession in that jurisdiction or assist another in doing so.”

Comment 1 to Rule 5.5(a) notes that:

“The definition of the practice of law is established by law and varies from one jurisdiction to another. Whatever the definition, limiting the practice of law to members of the bar protects the public against rendition of legal services by unqualified persons.”

Jurisdictions vary in their interpretation of these rules. For instance, in “Opinion 33,” the New Jersey Supreme Court Committee on the Unauthorized Practice of Law held in 1998 that a lawyer acting as Bond Counsel in a matter within New Jersey must be licensed to practice in New Jersey. This includes a requirement that the lawyer maintain a bona fide office located within the boundaries of the state. The Supreme Court of New Jersey approved a modified version of this opinion in 1999. The Court blessed two instances of out-of-state engagement. First, it held that out-of-state firms or lawyers unlicensed in New Jersey but affiliated with multi-state firms that have bona fide offices in New Jersey may perform legal services related to New Jersey bond issues if engaged to do so by New Jersey bond counsel who retains overall responsibility for representation of the issuer. Second, an out-of-state law firm directly retained by a New Jersey public agency to serve as bond counsel in respect of a bond issue that, because of its complexity, novelty or innovativeness, requires the special skill, experience and expertise of that firm, will not be considered to be engaged in the unauthorized practice of law in New Jersey.

Jurisdictions differ in their interpretations of the Model Rules. The Hawaii Supreme Court has held that an Oregon firm was not engaged in the unauthorized practice of law in Hawaii having been engaged to work with a Hawaiian law firm on a Hawaiian matter of technical complexity. See Fought & Co. Inc. v. Steel Engineering and Erection, Inc., 951 P.2d 487 (Haw. 1998).

The view that Bond Counsel is merely practicing “federal tax law” in undertaking matters outside of the jurisdiction in which he or she is licensed is also increasingly in disfavor. Almost half a century ago, for instance, the Pennsylvania Supreme Court rejected the argument that a non-Pennsylvania-licensed lawyer who limited his practice to “federal taxation” was only practicing federal law. Ginsburg v. Kovrak, 139 A.2d 889 (Pa. 1958). The Supreme Court of the United States dismissed on appeal for lack of a substantial federal question. Ginsburg v. Kovrak,358 U.S. 52 (1958).

In November of 2003, the policymaking body of the 20,000-member Pennsylvania Bar Association adopted a resolution endorsing the American Bar Association’s model professional

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 254

Page 259: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

conduct rules for multi-jurisdictional practice, thereby further refining the impact of Ginsburg,which is still widely cited. Foreign and out-of-state lawyers not licensed to practice in Pennsylvania will likely be permitted to provide legal services in the state on a temporary basis without breaking Pennsylvania ethics rules.

Because this area of public finance practice is obviously evolving, bond attorneys, especially those in larger law firms, should be mindful of the interstate differences and should perform careful review of the law and bar association rules in each state in which they hope to work.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 255

Page 260: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETH

ICS:

E-1

ENDNOTES AND REFERENCE MATERIALS

1 Fundamentals of Municipal Bond Law, published by NABL (2007), Disclosure Guidelines for State and Local Government Securities, published by GFOA (1991), Disclosure Handbook for Municipal Securities, prepared by NFMA (1990), Disclosure Roles of Counsel in State and Local Government Securities Offerings, Third Edition, published by ABA (2009), The Function and Professional Responsibilities of Bond Counsel, 2011 Third Edition, published by NABL (2011) (referred to in this outline as “Function”), Model Bond Opinion Report, Fourth Edition, published by NABL (2003) and Model Engagement Letters, published by NABL (1998). 2 This outline focuses on the ABA’s version of the Model Rules which has been adopted in various forms throughout the states. Each jurisdiction has its own rules, and a minority of states (such as Minnesota and Tennessee) still use the Model Code of Professional Responsibility. To the extent Bond Counsel practices in different states with differing rules, it is generally suggested that Bond Counsel comply with the stricter rules of a particular jurisdiction. 3 The Model Bond Opinion Report of NABL “includes an expanded conflicts section and accompanying annotations that are intended to provide bond counsel with a framework for evaluating various conflict situations. The analysis of conflicts of interest in the context of public finance transactions has been, and will continue to be, the subject of extensive debate. During the preparation of this report, the discussion of conflicts of interest among Committee members and members of the Board of Directors revealed an array of analytical approaches to conflicts issues. For many conflict questions confronting bond counsel, no clear guidance exists. Thus, this report cannot, and will not, be the final word on the subject. NABL will continue to provide opportunities for the debate and scholarly discussion of conflicts of interest rules through the Bond Attorneys’ Workshop and its seminars and publications. Model Engagement Letter at 4 (1998).” 4 Model Rule 1.2(a) addresses the scope of representation and provides, in part, that “[a] lawyer shall abide by a client’s decisions concerning the objectives of representation and . . . shall consult with the client as to the means by which they are to be pursued.”

Model Rule 1.2(c) permits a lawyer to limit the scope of representation with client informed consent after consultation with the lawyer. Model Rule 1.4 states that (a) a lawyer shall (1) promptly inform the client of any decision or circumstance with respect to which the client’s informed consent, as defined in Rule 1.0(e), is required by the Rules, (2) reasonably consult with the client about the means by which the client’s objectives are to be accomplished; (3) keep the client reasonably informed about the status of the matter, (4) promptly comply with reasonable requests for information, and (5) consult with the client about any relevant limitation on the lawyer’s conduct when the lawyer knows that the client expects assistance not permitted by the Rules of Professional Conduct or other law, and (b) a lawyer shall explain a matter to the extent reasonably necessary to permit the client to make informed decisions regarding the representation. As provided in the Model Rules, consultation includes communication of information sufficient to permit the client to appreciate the significance of the limitations of such representation. As part of such consultation, Bond Counsel should advise its client of the importance of representation on matters for which responsibility is not assumed by Bond Counsel and the necessity for reliance upon the opinions of other counsel in the transaction (such as special disclosure counsel, special tax counsel, etc.). The client’s informed consent must be confirmed in writing.

See also Model Rule 2.1, which provides that in representing a client, a lawyer shall exercise independent professional judgment and render candid advice. 5 Model Rule 1.7(b) provides that a lawyer cannot represent a client if there is a significant risk that the representation of one or more clients will be materially limited by the lawyer’s responsibility to another client, a former client or a third person or by a personal interest of the lawyer (in the same or another matter), unless the lawyer reasonably believes that the lawyer will be able to provide competent and diligent representation to each affected client and the representation will not be adversely affected and the client consents after consultation.

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 256

Page 261: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

ETHICS: E-1

“Consultation” is defined by the Model Rules as “communication of information reasonably sufficient to permit the client to appreciate the significance of the matter in question.”

Relevant factors in determining whether there is significant potential for material limitation include the duration and intimacy of the lawyer’s relationship with the client or clients involved, the functions being performed by the lawyer, the likelihood that disagreements will arise and the likely prejudice to the client from the conflict. The question is often one of proximity and degree.

When representation of multiple clients in a single matter is undertaken, the information must include explanation of the implications of the common representation and the advantages and risks involved. 6 Model Rule 1.10(a) provides that “[w]hile lawyers are associated in a firm, none of them shall knowingly represent a client when any one of them practicing alone would be prohibited from doing so by Model Rules 1.7 or 1.9.” 7 In its Formal Opinion 05-436, the ABA noted that clients may not consent to certain conflicts, such as a representation prohibited by law. See Model Rules 1.7(b)(2) and (3). The client must consent in writing under Model Rule 1.7(b)(4). A “client’s informed consent to a future conflict, without more, does not constitute the client’s informed consent to the disclosure or use of the client’s confidential information against the client.” Formal Op. 5-436. Bond Counsel should also “determine whether accepting the engagement is impermissible for any other reason [under the] Model Rule[s].” Id.8 Rule 1.9 extends the prohibition against representation adverse to a client without consultation and consent beyond the context of simultaneous representations. It provides that a lawyer who has formerly represented a client may not later represent another client in the same or a substantially related matter in which the second client’s interest is materially adverse to the first client’s interest, unless the first client consents after consultation. [Rule 1.9]then elaborates on this basic provision by tracing its implications for shifting relationships among lawyers and law firms. The Rule concludes by providing that a lawyer who has formerly represented a client in a matter shall not later:

“(1) Use information relating to the representation to the disadvantage of the former client except as these Rules would permit or require with respect to a client, or when the information has become generally known; or (2) reveal information relating to the representation except as these Rules would permit or require with respect to a client.”

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 257

Page 262: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 258

Page 263: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

NOTES

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 259

Page 264: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

NOTES

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 260

Page 265: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

NOTES

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 261

Page 266: PROGRAM BOOK & LECTURE MATERIALS...Welcome to NABL’s Fourteenth Annual Tax and Securities Law Institute, March 10-11, 2016, at the Omni Shoreham Hotel in Washington, D.C. This year’s

NOTES

14th Annual Tax & Securities Law Institute Page: 262